A Foodcentric Life

  • Best Summer Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Best Summer Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Best Summer Recipes
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Creamy Paprika Sauce Recipe

    01/06/2025 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    A glass jar of bright orange paprika sauce with a golden spoon and a bag of paprika behind.

    This rich and creamy sauce with brilliant orange color is paprika sauce, owing its gorgeous color and flavor to real Hungarian paprika. Yes, paprika! Often overlooked as just a garnish for deviled eggs, it truly shines as the star of this fantastic and flavorful sauce. Ready in just 25 minutes, this versatile sauce pairs beautifully with lean meats, chicken, fish and seafood, crowning any dish with its beautiful flavor and color.

    A jar of vivid orange paprika sauce with a gold spoon and paprika sprinkled on the table.

    When Hungarian friends gifted me a bag of fresh, vibrant paprika straight from Budapest, I was blown away by its incredible color and fragrance. It was worlds apart from the dull, dusty paprika I was used to from the grocery store.

    While I use a lot of smoked paprika in my recipes, regular paprika had been sitting on the shelf-until this game-changer arrived. Making paprika sauce is so simple, and its versatility will have you reaching for it again and again!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Paprika sauce (also called paprika cream sauce) is easy to make.
    • Versatile, for meats, chicken, fish, and seafood, even eggs and omelets.
    • Makes the most of high quality paprika.
    • It's authentic, approved by my Hungarian friends!

    Chef's tip on buying paprika: Skip the clear bags or jars and buy real Hungarian paprika in tins or solid bags where it is protected from light to maintain color and potency. Store it away from light and heat.

    If you love making homemade sauces, try this homemade cocktail sauce, or this gluten-free Hoisin sauce.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for paprika sauce in prep bowls on a gray counter.
    • Paprika: Buy fresh Hungarian paprika, also labeled sweet paprika. Check a speciality spice store and online sources versus the grocery store for best quality.
    • Butter: Buy unsalted butter so you control the salt level.
    • Onion: Hungarian cooking uses lots of onion. Use yellow, brown, or white onion, and avoid red onions, which aren't traditional and can overpower the sauce.
    • Garlic: A clove of fresh garlic, it's used with restraint in Hungarian cooking.
    • Tomato paste: Adds color, depth of flavor, and helps thicken the paprika sauce.
    • Broth: Low sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth.
    • Cream: Use heavy cream or heavy whipping cream.
    • Sour Cream: It wouldn't be Hungarian without sour cream! Get full fat sour cream; do not use low fat.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

    Substitutions and Variations

    This is one recipe where I do not use black pepper. I don't want black specks in the beautiful orange sauce. If you want to add pepper, try a little white pepper.

    • Use smoked paprika powder for a smoky flavor variation (delicious but not traditional).
    • Use part hot paprika for a spicy sauce.
    • Use creme fraiche in place of full fat sour cream.
    • If you want to spice it up afterwards, add a little of your favorite hot sauce. 

    For another delicious creamy sauce, try this roast pork tenderloin with mustard cream sauce.

    Chef's tip on paprika: Sweet paprika (made from sweet mild red peppers) is the most commonly used in Hungarian cuisine. Hot Hungarian Paprika, made from hotter varieties of peppers (similar to cayenne pepper or a  chili pepper) adds heat and is often used alongside sweet paprika for a more balanced flavor. Rose Paprika is a milder, slightly aromatic type made from the middle of the pepper. Smoked paprika is not traditional in classic Hungarian recipes, but can be used as a modern twist to add a smoky depth of flavor.

    Recipe Instructions

    Cooking chopped onions in a stainless steel pan in butter.
    Step 1: Saute onions in butter until soft over medium-low heat, about 3 minutes. Do not brown them. Add the garlic and cook another 30 seconds.
    Cooking onions turned orange from adding tomato paste.
    Step 2: Stir in tomato paste and cook another 2 minutes.
    Paprika added to a pan of cooking onions turning it bright orange.
    Step 3: Add paprika and stir into onion mixture. Cook another 2 minutes.
    Simmering onions and paprika in a steel pan becoming a sauce.
    Step 4: Add broth and simmer for 2 minutes.
    Heavy cream added to a pan of simmering red paprika sauce.
    Step 5: Stir in heavy cream until smooth and add salt.
    Simmering paprika sauce in a stainless steel sauce pan.
    Step 6: Simmer sauce for 2 minutes until blended and thickened.
    Bright red sauce in a small blender container.
    Step 7: Puree the sauce in a blender to smooth it out, 30 seconds.
    Bright orange paprika sauce adding sour cream to finish.
    Step 8: Add the sauce back to the pan, finish it with sour cream and heat through. Taste and adjust with a little more salt if desired.
    Vivid orange paprika sauce in a jar with a gold spoon and sprinkles of red paprika on the plate.

    Chef's tool tip: For making paprika sauce, I use a 3 quart sauce pan called a saucier. Unlike traditional saucepans with sharp corners, saucier pans have gently curved sides, making it easier to stir and whisk without food getting stuck in the corners. It's a terrific addition to your kitchen collection. It's also my go-to pan for risotto. Sauciers are good all-purpose pans that are easy to clean too.

    Serving Suggestions

    Because paprika sauce is rich and creamy, it pairs well with:

    • A great way to dress up simple roasted or grilled lean meats, like this grilled flank steak or a simple seared pork tenderloin.
    • Simple grilled, roasted, sautéed, or smoked chicken breast.
    • Lean fish and seafood that needs some added richness such as halibut, cod, mahi mahi, or easy baked shrimp.
    • It's even good with eggs such as poached eggs (instead of hollandaise), and omelets.
    • Paprika sauce takes an easy chicken recipe to another level.

    I generally make paprika sauce ahead of time and re-heat on a very low temperature in a small pan. Don't get the sauce too hot as it might break (separate). If it does, whisk it back together to serve.

    Paprika sauce holds for 4-5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. It's not a sauce that freezes due to the dairy content.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of paprika should I use for paprika sauce?

    Traditionally, Hungarians make paprika sauce with sweet paprika. To make it spicy, add a little hot paprika. And while smoked paprika is not traditional, it does add a terrific flavor and modern edge to paprika sauce. Try them all!

    What dishes go well with paprika sauce?

    Because paprika sauce is rich and creamy, serve it with lean grilled or roasted meats, chicken breasts, fish and seafood, or roasted vegetables. It's even good with eggs, especially in place of Hollandaise for Eggs Benedict, and omelets. It's terrific with pork tenderloin and pork chops.

    Can I serve paprika sauce cold?

    Paprika sauce is even good served cold as a dip or spread as with the fat content, it gets very thick when refrigerated. Try thinning it down and using as a cold sauce.

    How do I fix broken paprika sauce?

    Because of the sour cream, if you get paprika sauce to hot after adding the sour cream, it might separate or what is called "break". To fix it, whisk fast to re-incorporate the elements. If that does not help, put it in a blender on low speed.

    Another trick for next time you make it is using creme fraiche instead of regular, full fat sour cream, as the higher fat content of the creme fraiche won't break in sauces.

    What's the difference between Spanish paprika and Hungarian paprika?

    Both made from ground dried peppers, but they differ in flavor, smokiness, and heat levels due to the types of peppers used and their production process.

    Spanish paprika tends to be smoky, rich, and slightly sweet from drying the peppers over wood fires, giving it a rich, darker red color.

    Hungarian paprika tends to be sweet, earthy, and slightly fruity, with a more vibrant pepper taste. It's typically not smoked, allowing the natural sweetness of the peppers to shine through. They are both terrific and hold an important place in your spice cabinet.

    More Super Sauce Recipes

    Sauce makes everything good, transforming the most basic recipes into something fun and delicious. And be sure to check out the sauce recipes index page.

    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • roasted tomato marinara
      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
    • tomatillo salsa verde
      Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos
    • asian almond sauce in a bowl
      No-Cook Asian Dipping Sauce With Almond Butter

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this paprika sauce, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass jar of bright orange paprika sauce with a golden spoon and a bag of paprika behind.

    Paprika Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Rich and creamy paprika sauce is delicious served with lean meats, chicken, fish and seafood. It's good too over poached eggs and omelets.
    4.50 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American, hungarian
    Servings 8 Yield 1 ¾ cups
    Calories 90 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • ¾ cup chopped onion ½ medium onion
    • 1 small garlic clove finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
    • 1 ½ tablespoons paprika sweet paprika
    • ½ cup chicken broth low sodium or homemade
    • ½ cup heavy whipping cream
    • ⅓ cup full fat sour cream
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt or more to taste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Melt the butter in a medium (3-quart) saucepan over medium-low heat. Add the chopped onion and cook until soft but not browned, about 3 minutes. Add the garlic and cook another 30-60 seconds, stirring.
    • Stir in the tomato paste and cook for 2 minutes. Add the paprika and cook another 2 minutes, stirring, to bloom the spices and release their oils.
    • Stir in the broth and increase the heat slightly. Simmer for 2-3 minutes to blend. Stir in the broth and increase the heat slightly. Simmer for 2-3 minutes to blend. Add the heavy cream and salt, stirring until smooth. Cook for 2 more minutes to thicken slightly. Puree the sauce in a blender to smooth it out, 20-30 seconds.
    • To finish the sauce, add the puree back to the pan and stir or whisk in the sour cream until smooth. Taste for seasoning and adjust with any additional salt for your preference. Sauce is ready to serve.

    Notes

    Chef's Note: I've tested this sauce with ¼ cup, ½ cup, and ¾ cup of heavy cream. While all three amounts work, ½ cup strikes the best balance-it keeps the sauce rich and creamy without muting the paprika flavor. If you prefer a lighter sauce, use ¼ cup. For a richer, more velvety result, go with ¾ cup.
    Options
    • Use smoked paprika powder for a smoky flavor variation (delicious but not traditional).
    • Use part hot paprika for a spicy sauce.
    • If you want to spice it up afterwards, add a little of your favorite hot sauce.
    • Start with ⅓ cup sour cream, then taste. If you prefer a tangier, richer finish, add a little more to taste. 
    Make paprika sauce ahead of time and re-heat on a low temperature in a small pan. Don't get the sauce too hot as it might break (separate). If it does, whisk it back together to serve.
    Paprika sauce holds for 4-5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. It's not a sauce that freezes due to the dairy content.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 90kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 1gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 24mgSodium: 99mgPotassium: 101mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 983IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 19mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Forgotten Cookies (chocolate chip meringues)

    10/23/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.

    Forgotten cookies, called so because you make them, put them in the oven, and forget about them! In the morning you'll wakeup to freshly baked cookies that are crisp on the outside filled with chocolate chips and nuts. It's an old fashioned, vintage kind of recipe for everyone's cookie recipe file. Once you make them, you will never forget these cookies! They are easy and fun to make.

    A plate of Forgotten Cookies with chocolate chips and walnuts on a white serving plate.

    Similar to chocolate chip meringue cookies, forgotten cookies are a favorite for home cooks because they are simple to make, inexpensive, and can be flavored with a variety of add-ins like chocolate chips, nuts, coconut, or dried fruit. This method is fun, because you make them and forget about them until they are crisp and ready to munch on. Their light as a cloud!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Light and airy meringue cookies with crunch from walnuts and chocolate chips.
    • They crisp overnight in the oven, ready in the morning. 
    • Great for busy bakers as they are so easy.
    • Simple ingredients.

    For another easy and fun sweet treat, make this chocolate bark bites with cranberries and nuts.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for chocolate chip meringue cookies in prep bowls on counter.
    • Eggs: Large eggs; all you need is the egg whites (no egg yolks). 
    • Sugar: White sugar; superfine works even better with meringues than standard granular.
    • Cream of tartar: Stabilizes the egg whites for the meringue.
    • Salt: Just a pinch, I use sea salt.
    • Chocolate chips: Your favorite chocolate chips, semisweet or dark chocolate, regular or low-sugar. The mini chocolate chips work well too. Use no-sugar chips to reduce overall sugar in recipes.
    • Nuts: Walnuts provide a nice crunch and texture to these cookies. 
    • Vanilla: Real vanilla extract for the best flavor. Here is my favorite vanilla.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements. 

    Love hot chocolate? Here's spiked hot chocolate with optional liqueurs. It's like a liquid dessert. There's a kids version too.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use pecans instead of walnuts.
    • For alternative chocolate chips try: GoodSam chocolate chips, date-sweetened chocolate chips (they are good!), or these chocolate chips that are free from 14 common allergens. I'm shying away from brands with erythritol due to a recent study, and malitol, another hybrid sugar that gives some people digestive upset.
    • Try white chocolate chips, mini chocolate chips, or mint chips.
    • Chopped coconut is a nice add (unsweetened, not the sticky stuff).
    • Add a little cinnamon for cinnamon meringues.
    • Try crushed peppermint candy at Christmas or peppermint extract.

    Here's a bite-sized treat that's actually healthy but tastes like it's not; peanut butter oatmeal protein balls with chocolate chips. Keep them in the freezer!

    Chef's tip on whipping egg whites: Egg whites whip the best when they are at room temperature, but they separate more easily when the eggs are cold. So separate your eggs while they are cold, then allow the whites to warm up to room temperature for the best whipping and a nice stiff meringue.

    Recipe Instructions

    Be sure the egg whites are at room temperature before you start making forgotten cookies for best results. Cold egg whites do not whip well. Pre-heat the oven to 350º. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil.

    Beaten egg white to make meringues at the light foamy stage in a stainless steel bowl.
    Step 1: With a hand mixer on low speed, whip egg whites, cream of tartar, and salt to a foamy stage.
    Meringues whipped to soft peak stage in a silver bowl.
    Step 2: Increase speed. Keep beating until soft peaks form. Add vanilla.
    Egg whites for meringue whipped to stiff peaks, ready to proceed.
    Step 3: Incrrease speed to high and str gradually adding sugar. Whip egg whites to stiff peaks.
    Properly whipped stiff egg white on a beater over a steel bowl.
    Step 4: Example of perfect stiff peaks, ready to proceed with recipe.
    Folding chopped nuts into whipped egg white batter
    Step 5: Gently fold chopped nuts into the stiff egg whites with a rubber spatula.
    Folding chocolate chips into meringue batter for cookies.
    Step 6: Gently fold in chocolate chips to complete the meringue batter.
    Forgotten meringue cookies portioned onto parchment lined cookie trays for baking.
    Step 7: Portion meringue batter onto parchment lined cookie trays. Place the cookie tray (s) into the oven, close the door, and turn the oven off. Do not open the oven until yo're ready to test to see if they are ready; it might be overnight or as little as 5 hours.

    Note on timing: In recipe testing, I've let forgotten cookies go as long as 17 hours and also had them ready in as little as 5 hours. Pull one from the oven and test around 5 hours to see if they are crisp enough for you.

    Chef's tip: How to make perfectly portioned cookies? Use a terrific little tool called a disher or a cookie scoop. They are handy for quickly and easily portioning many things, especially cookie batter and dough. Find them online. The size I use for forgotten cookies is the #30. The higher the number, the smaller the size. If you have a cookie scoop of a different size, say a #40, the cookies will be a little smaller (more cookies). For more free-form cookies, just use a tablespoon and dollop them onto the baking sheet.

    Forgotten Cookies vs. Chocolate Chip Meringues

    Forgotten cookies and chocolate chip meringue cookies have basically the same ingredients, but they are baked differently. 

    Forgotten cookies are placed in a pre-heated oven, then the oven is turned off and the cookies are left to slowly dry and crisp overnight (I've made them anywhere from 5 hours to 17 hours).

    This unique method creates a crisp exterior while the inside remains slightly chewy. Meringue cookies are baked at a low temperature for an extended time until they are fully dry throughout. This creates a uniformly crisp and light textured cookie.

    If you leave forgotten cookies in the oven long enough, they will completely dry like a chocolate chip meringue.

    A small plate with a bitten into meringue cookie and a whole cookie.

    Here's another way you can bake the forgotten cookies. Use ¾ of the chocolate chips folded into the batter with the walnuts, and sprinkle the other ¼ cup on top before baking.

    Chocolate chip meringue cookies with chocolate chips sprinkled on top before baking on a white plate.

    Recipe Tips for Success

    • Use room temperature egg whites. 
    • Skip plastic bowls to whip meringues, choose a metal bowl, glass bowl, or ceramic.
    • Don't try to make meringues on humid or rainy days.
    • Be sure your tools a squeaky clean.
    • Use the cream of tartar for stiffer whites. 

    Serving and Storage

    Enjoy forgotten cookies anytime a cookie snack attack happens! They also make a nice gift from the kitchen at Christmas. Be sure cookies are completely cool before storing or they might get chewy and sticky versus being crisp. 

    Because forgotten cookies are meringues, they are fragile and must be packaged carefully to avoid crushing. Use a cookie tin or other stiff airtight container that seals well to protect them as they are highly susceptible to moisture. 

    To stack them in a cookie tin, place a layer of parchment paper between each layer and don't overcrowd them. Store the container at room temperature in a cool, dry place. Avoid storing them in the refrigerator, as the humidity can cause the cookies to soften or become sticky.

    Forgotten cookies can typically be stored for up to 5-7 days if kept in an airtight container at room temperature.

    A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why did my forgotten cookies turn out chewy or sticky?

    Chewy or stick forgotten cookies could be due to several reasons. Humid conditions in the environment, insufficient baking or drying time, or improper storage could be the reasons.

    How long should I leave forgotten cookies in the oven?

    Overnight is the typical instruction, so about 8 hours. Exact timing depends on the heat retention of your oven and the size of your cookies. 

    Can I make forgotten cookies without cream of tartar?

    You can, but the risk is not getting nice stiff meringue when the egg whites are whipped as cream of tartar is a stabilizer and creates a firmer meringue.

    Why did my meringue not reach stiff peaks?

    Even the smallest amount of fat, such as egg yolk, may prevent the meringue from reaching optimal stiffness. Even residual fat in the  mixing bowl can effect the meringue development. Be sure your bowl and utensils are squeaky clean when making meringue. 

    More Sweet Treat Recipes

    For more sweet ideas, check out the desserts index page for inspiration!

    • A stack of crunchy cookies on a counter with a glass of milk and cookies cooling behind.
      Cranberry Oatmeal Cookies Recipe (gluten-free)
    • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
      Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies
    • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
      Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)
    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make forgotten cookies, please comment and let me know how you liked them. If they were a hit, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.

    Forgotten Cookies

    Sally Cameron
    Here's a recipe that should be in everyone's cookie file. Once made, you will never forget these cookies. Note, room temperature whites whip better than cold ones.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 minute min
    Drying time 8 hours hrs
    Total Time 8 hours hrs 16 minutes mins
    Course Cookies, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 yield 20 cookies
    Calories 171 kcal

    Equipment

    • Hand mixer
    • Baking sheet
    • Parchment paper
    • Cookie scoop (aka disher) I use the #30

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 large egg whites at room temperature (important!)
    • ⅔ cup sugar superfine works best if you have it
    • 1 cup chocolate chips
    • 1 cup chopped walnuts pecans
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ⅛ teaspoon cream of tartar
    • 1 pinch salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Line a cookie baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
    • Using a hand mixer, beat egg whites with cream of tartar and salt starting on slow speed until foamy. Increase speed and beat whites until soft peaks form. Increase speed to high and begin adding sugar gradually until all sugar is added and peaks are stiff and glossy. Gently fold the chocolate chips and nuts in by hand with a rubber spatula.
    • Drop cookie dough by tablespoons full onto the parchment. Alternatively for portioning, use a #30 cookie scoop (aka a disher, notes below). Place the cookies in the oven, turn the oven off, and allow the cookies to slowly dry and crisp overnight in the oven, door closed. Do not open the oven.
      NOTE: I've let forgotten cookies go as long as 17 hours (super crisp) and also had them ready in as little as 5 hours. Pull one from the tray and test around 5 hours to see if they are crisp enough for you.
    • In the morning, remove the cookies and taste test one. Cool cookies on a wire rack and package in an airtight container or cookie tin with a tight fitting lid. To layer cookies, place a piece of parchment or wax paper between the layers.
      Cookies keep on the counter for about a week. Do not refrigerate, as moisture is the enemy of meringues.

    Notes

    Variations:
    • Use pecans instead of walnuts.
    • Add some chopped coconut (unsweetened, not the sticky stuff).
    • Add a little cinnamon.
    • Use finely chopped chocolate instead of chips.
    • Add crushed peppermint or use peppermint chips for Christmas.
    •  
    •  
    •  

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2cookiesCalories: 171kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 2gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 15mgPotassium: 121mgFiber: 1gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 2IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 25mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Forgotten cookies, called so because you make the batter and portion them, then put them in the oven and forget about them overnight. An old fashioned treat and cookie recipe that should be in everyone's cookie file. Once made, you will never forget these cookies. Note, room temperature whites whip better than cold ones.

    Makes: about 15-16 cookies

    Ingredients

    • 2 large or extra large egg whites (at room temperature)
    • ⅛ teaspoon cream of tartar
    • A pinch of salt
    • ⅔ cup sugar
    • 1 cup chocolate chips
    • 1 cup chopped walnuts
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Directions

    1. Pre-heat the oven to 350º. Line a baking sheet with baking parchment paper.
    2. Using an electric hand mixer, beat egg whites with cream of tartar and salt until whites are stiff. Fold in the stevia, chips and walnuts by hand. This will make a flatter cookie. See notes below for options.
    3. Drop tablespoonfuls of the batter onto the parchment lined baking sheet. You should make about 15-16 cookies. Place the baking sheet in the oven and turn it off. Leave the cookies to bake and dry until morning, or about 6-8 hours, until crisp.

    Notes on sugar options - If you are going to use all sugar or half sugar/half stevia, add the sugar to the egg whites when they are frothy when beating with the mixer. Beat until stiff, the fold in chips and nuts.  If you want more of a mounded cookie versus a flat cookie, do this for the all stevia version too.[/recipe]

    Subs: pecans for walnuts, what about for a nut allergy?

    Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

    11/07/2024 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.

    Need a fast and easy dinner? These thin, crispy air fryer chicken cutlets are ready in minutes. With a quick dip in egg wash, a coating of panko or breadcrumbs, and just 11-12 minutes in the air fryer, you'll have golden cutlets that are juicy inside and crunchy outside. I'll share my simple tip for the perfect crust - plus options for making this air fryer chicken cutlets recipe gluten-free or with classic panko. This is weeknight fast food, made better. Much better!

    Four golden crisp air fryer chicken cutlets with a sprinkle of parmesan and parsley, gray platter.

    These air fryer chicken cutlets go with just about everything. Serve them with a simple salad, over pasta, in a sandwich, or as an easy main with roasted veggies. Because they're air fried, you get the crunch of fried chicken with a lot less oil and effort. Perfect for weeknights, meal prep, or whenever you need a dinner everyone will love.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

    • Fast & easy - these chicken cutlets cook in just 11-12 minutes in the air fryer.
    • Crispy without deep frying - all the crunch, but lighter and with less oil.
    • Gluten-free or not - make them with regular panko or gluten-free crumbs.
    • No flour needed - a simple egg wash and crumb coating keeps them light and golden.

    No air fryer? This reader favorite recipe for easy chicken parmesan is made on the stovetop.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for air fryer breast chicken cutlets in prep bowls on counter.
    • Chicken - Boneless, skinless chicken breasts, sliced into thin cutlets (saves money vs. pre-cut), but buy sliced cutlets for convenience.
    • Egg - Helps the crumb coating stick.
    • Parmesan cheese - Finely grated for salty flavor (omit for dairy-free).
    • Breadcrumbs - Gluten-free panko, regular panko, or classic breadcrumbs all work (see notes below). My homemade breadcrumbs work great.
    • Garlic powder - Adds a savory boost.
    • Onion powder - Enhances flavor depth.
    • Paprika - Regular or smoked, for color and subtle warmth.
    • Italian seasoning - A simple dried herb blend for balance.
    • Fresh parsley - Optional garnish for freshness and color.
    • Cooking spray - Pure avocado or olive oil spray for crisping.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, black pepper, and complete directions.

    Chef's tip on panko vs. breadcrumbs: Panko crumbs give the cutlets an extra-light, crispy texture, while regular breadcrumbs create a finer crust. Both work - it just depends on the crunch you prefer and what you have on hand. I use both.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Spicy chicken cutlets - Add cayenne, chipotle powder, or even a pinch of cumin and coriander for a kick.
    • Herb swap - Use a single dried herb such as oregano or thyme in place of Italian seasoning.
    • Extra golden color - Stir a little turmeric into the seasoning blend.
    • Kid-friendly chicken tenders - Swap chicken breasts for chicken tenders and leave them whole for homemade air fryer chicken tenders.
    • Want Italian-style? For extra Italian flair, boost the breadcrumb mix with an extra sprinkle of Parmesan and a little more dried oregano or basil. It makes the flavor closer to the classic fried Italian chicken cutlets - but lighter and crispier from the air fryer.

    Chef's tip on GF panko crumbs: If you are gluten-free, I tested four brands of gluten-free panko: Ian's gluten-fee panko, Chef Nathan's, Aleias, and 4C gluten-free panko. I found they performed best when refined as bit as the crumbs are generally large. To refine, buzz briefly in a food processor, crush them in a pie plate with a flat meat pounder, or put them in a zip bag and use a rolling pin to crush just a bit. You'll get a finer coating but one that's still textured and crispy. Don't crush too much, leave some texture. The one I prefer is Ians. If you watch carbs, Aleias and 4C had the lowest carbs.

    Examples of the difference in gluten-free panko brands on a white cutting board.

    How to Cut Chicken Breasts into Cutlets

    If you'd rather slice your own chicken breasts into cutlets versus buying the thin-cut chicken breast cutlets, here's how to do it:

    Slicing a boneless, skinless chicken breast in half horizontally for a cutlet.
    1. Using a sharp slicing knife, slice chicken breast through the center. Aim a little high so the bottom piece is not too thin. Start rounded side up.
    A chicken breast being sliced into half for a cutlet with a thin sharp knife.
    1. Slice all of the way through for two cutlets of equal size.

    How to Make Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

    For thin-sliced chicken breasts in the air fryer, I can get 4 cutlets in my 6-quart model basket. How many you can fit will depend on the size of your air fryer.

    Crushed breadcrumbs in a plastic bag with a meat pounder beside on counter.
    Step 1: Refine the panko bread crumbs in a zip bag with a smooth-sided meat mallet, glass, or rolling pin.
    Ingredients for coating chicken cutlets in a glass pie plate.
    Step 2: Add all dry ingredients to a pie plate and mix well.
    Chicken cutlets breading station with egg and seasoned coating.
    Step 3: Set up a breading station to coat cutlets (no flour).
    Whisked egg in a glass bowl with a chicken cutlet being coated.
    Step 4: Whisk egg in a small bowl, add the raw chicken cutlet and cover in egg. Do 1 at a time.
    A panko coated chicken breast in a pie plate being breaded.
    Step 5: Place chicken cutlet flat in pie plate and coat well with panko on both sides, pressing crumbs on lightly.
    Four chicken cutlets coated in seasoned panko crumbs on a rimmed baking sheet.
    Step 6: Place breaded chicken cutlets on a baking sheet to transfer to the air fryer.
    Breaded chicken cutlets in an air fryer basket ready for cooking.
    Step 7: Arrange breaded cutlets in a single layer in the air fryer basket and spray lightly with avocado oil.
    Golden air fried chicken breast cutlets in air fryer basket.
    Step 8: Air fry cutlets at 400°F for 11-12 minutes, turning at half way for a golden crust.

    Chef's Tips for Success

    • Refine the crumbs - If your panko pieces are extra large, pulse them briefly in a food processor for a finer, more even coating or crush in a zip bag with a rolling pin or meat pounder.
    • Oil spray matters - A light mist of avocado or olive oil spray helps the coating turn golden and crisp in the air fryer.
    • Cook to temp - Always check chicken with a thermometer; cutlets are done when they reach 165°F at the thickest part.

    For another air fryer recipe that a super side dish, try these air fryer red potatoes.

    Serving Suggestions

    Air fryer chicken cutlets are endlessly versatile. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve them:

    • Classic dinner - Pair with roasted vegetables, rice, and a green salad. Or serve alongside mashed potatoes or whipped sweet potatoes for comfort food style.
    • Light & fresh - Top a crisp salad with sliced cutlets. Try fennel, avocado, and citrus salad with an orange vinaigrette for a bright, seasonal option.
    • With sauces - Serve with homemade BBQ sauce, honey mustard, or cocktail sauce. They're also delicious drizzled with melted butter or a flavored olive oil (lemon or herb).
    • Simple & satisfying - These cutlets are crispy and flavorful enough to enjoy just as they are, straight from the air fryer.

    Serve air fryer chicken cutlets with a dipping sauce such as homemade bbq sauce, or cocktail sauce. Drizzle them with melted butter or a nice flavored olive oil (lemon or herb work well). Really, they are good just plain as they are, nothing needed.

    Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.

    Storage & Reheating

    • Refrigerator: Store leftover chicken cutlets in an airtight container for 2-3 days. Place wax paper between layers to protect the coating. The crust will soften slightly as it sits.
    • Reheating: To restore the crunch, reheat in the air fryer at 400°F for 4-5 minutes. They re-crisp beautifully - perfect for lunch with a salad the next day.
    • Cold option: These cutlets are even tasty cold, sliced into sandwiches or added to a salad.

    Recipe FAQs

    How can I make the breading stick better?

    Some recipe teach a full traditional breading with egg wash and flour. I find that just using egg in this recipe works fine and the panko crumbs stick just nicely. No flour needed, and it's a little lighter.

    How do I make chicken cutlets crispy in the air fryer?

    First, use panko crumbs, which are naturally more textured providing for crispy cutlets. Regular breadcrumbs work as well, they are just give a finer coating. Second, a good trick is to spray the top of the chicken cutlets with a little avocado oil spray. They come out nice, golden, and crispy.

    Do I need to flip the chicken cutlets?

    Yes. Turning the cutlets half way insures even cooking. Start with the nicer side up (the presentation side).

    Can I use frozen chicken cutlets?

    If frozen, thaw chicken cutlets before cooking. The safest way to thaw is overnight in the refrigerator. Another way is to quick thaw by submerging the sealed package in cold water and changing every 20-30 minutes until the chicken is thawed.

    More Chicken Recipes

    Most of eat a lot of chicken as it's so versatile. From boneless to bone-in, whole chicken to chicken breasts and thighs, here are more recipes to keep things interesting. Check out the chicken recipes index page for more ideas. More air fryer recipes are on the way!

    • Sliced and whole smoked chicken breasts on a gray serving plate.
      Easy Smoked Chicken Breast
    • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
      Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make air fryer chicken cutlets, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.

    Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets

    Sally Cameron
    Crispy, crunchy, easy, and fast! For gluten-free use GF panko, or use regular panko if desired.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 3 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • Air fryer I use a 6 quart

    Ingredients
      

    Chicken

    • 1-1 ¼ pounds thin cut chicken cutlets or regular boneless, skinless breasts to slice yourself
    • 1 large egg

    Chicken coating

    • ⅔ cup GF or regular panko crumbs I recommend Ian's for GF
    • ⅓ cup finely grated parmesan cheese
    • 1 teaspoon dried Italian seasoning
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
    • ¼ teaspoon paprika regular or smoked
    • avocado oil spray

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Start here with boneless chicken breasts

    • Place the chicken breasts smooth side up on a cutting board. Position a sharp slicing knife at the top end of the chicken breast parallel to the cutting board centered in the chicken. Slice the chicken into two pieces creating cutlets. See photos in the post. Proceed with the recipe.

    Start here with pre-sliced thin chicken cutlets

    • Add the panko crumbs to a small zip bag and crush lightly to refine them with a meat pounder or rolling pin. Don't crush completely, leave some texture.
    • Add the panko, parmesan, Italian seasoning, salt, pepper, garlic and onion powders, and paprika to a pie plate or flat dish and mix well. Crack the egg into a medium bowl and whisk to blend.
    • Roll one chicken cutlet in the egg to coat, then lay flat in the pie plate of panko and coat both sides of the chicken, gently pressing the crumbs on to cover. Repeat with other three chicken cutlets. Place them on a clean plate or baking sheet and transfer to near the air fryer.
    • Pre-heat the air fryer to 400°F and set timer for 12 minutes. When air fryer is hot, add the cutlets with the nicer side up first. Spray all four lightly with avocado oil. Air fry, turning at 6 minutes. Chicken is done when it is 165°F measure internally with a digital thermometer. Chicken cutlets are ready to serve.

    Notes

    Leftovers
    Leftover chicken cutlets last 2-3 days refrigerated in an airtight container. The panko crust softens a little as they hold. To crisp them up again, pop them back in your air fryer at 400°F for 4-5 minutes. I've done this after a day and they were so good for lunch with a salad I was amazed! They are even good cold.
    About gluten-free panko crumbs
    I tested multiple brands of GF panko breadcrumbs and found that Ian's GF panko crumbs worked the best. Aleia's gluten-free panko also worked well. If your local store does not carry them, order on Amazon.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 35gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 143mgSodium: 674mgPotassium: 568mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 0.2gVitamin A: 247IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 123mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Curry Chicken Salad With Grapes and Cashews

    06/06/2016 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    curried chicken salad

    Golden creamy curry chicken salad. Classic chicken salad gets a tasty flavor twist with an Indian-inspired, creamy curry dressing, sweet red grapes and crunchy cashews. Lunch is ready! And it's easy to make ahead.

    curried chicken salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Curry Chicken Salad

    After sweating my brains out in hot yoga this morning I needed a nourishing lunch. Thankfully, this curried chicken salad was waiting in the fridge when I got home. I love it when I have healthy food made ahead just waiting. No work, just eat. And the batch I made provided several lunches. The dressing is so good! I think you'll love this recipe.

    poached chicken breasts|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Chicken breasts poaching in a pot.

    How to Poach Chicken (or use leftover chicken)

    Poaching chicken is an easy, fast cooking method you should make your friend. Use boneless skinless chicken breasts. It takes about 15-18 minutes depending on the size of your chicken breasts. After poaching, cool the chicken and cut into cubes for the chicken salad. You'll see how easy it is. You can also use leftover cooked chicken.

    curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Poached chicken cut into cubes for salad.

    Make the Curry Dressing

    The creamy, Indian-inspired dressing can be made ahead for the flavors to blend or made and used right away. You can make it a day or three ahead, then assemble your salad when you need to eat. I use a combination of plain, unsweetened Greek yogurt and mayonnaise. For paleo, use all mayonnaise and skip the yogurt. I use organic Vegenaise or Primal Kitchen which is avocado oil-based.

    curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com

    What is in Curry Powder (aka Curry Spice)?

    Beautiful golden curry powder is a blend of spices. While authentic Indian cooks have their own secret family blend, you can blend your own or buy one. Curry powder comes from mild or "sweet" also called hot.

    Spices that make up curry powder include turmeric, coriander, cumin, fenugreek, ginger, nutmeg, fennel, cinnamon, dry mustard, white, red or black pepper, cardamom, cloves, cayenne pepper, chili peppers and sometimes saffron. No wonder it tastes so good! Try different brands and find your favorite because they do taste different.

    About Turmeric and Curcumin

    The base for many curry powders is bright orangey-yellow spice called turmeric. Long used in Chinese and Indian medicine, turmeric contains curcumin, a powerful, natural anti-inflammatory. Curcumin has been shown to lower risk for heart disease and is a powerful tool in fighting cancer. Read more about the power of turmeric here.

    curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Grapes, cashews, celery, herbs prepped for curried chicken salad.

    Curried Chicken Salad Prep Ahead Tips

    Poach your chicken 3 days ahead of time, then make your salad. You can also make the dressing ahead and refrigerate it, allowing the flavors to blend. When ready to serve, mix the chicken, dressing together with the nuts and grapes (which can all be prepped ahead too).

    curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Bowl of golden yellow curried chicken salad.

    Serving Tips

    Curried chicken salad can be served in lettuce cups, over salads greens or alone. If you eat paleo, try coconut wraps.

    curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com
    curried chicken salad|AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    curried chicken salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Curriy Chicken Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Classic chicken salad gets a tasty flavor boost with a creamy curry dressing, sweet red grapes and crunchy cashews. Read the post for make-ahead tips. Make the salad with poached chicken breast or leftover roast chicken. Serve alone, in lettuce leaves, paleo wraps or whole wheat pita bread.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Total Time 28 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine Indian
    Servings 4
    Calories 471 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Easy Curry dressing

    • ½ cup Vegenaise or mayonnaise
    • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt or extra mayo for paleo
    • 2 tablespoons curry powder
    • 1 teaspoon honey
    • 1 teaspoon cumin
    • ½ lime juiced
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Curried Chicken Salad

    • 1 ½ pounds cooked boneless skinless chicken breast see recipe link for poaching below
    • ⅓ cup chopped cashews
    • 1 large rib celery chopped
    • 12 red grapes halved
    • 1 tablespoon chopped cilantro or Italian parsley

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the Curry Dressing

    • Mix together the mayonnaise, yogurt, curry powder, honey, cumin, lime, juice, salt and pepper. Stir until smooth. The dressing can be made ahead.

    Assemble the Curried Chicken Salad

    • Slice chicken breast into long thin pieces about ½" thick, then into small cubes about ½" thick. See photo in post for help.
    • In a medium bowl, mix the chopped chicken, grapes, celery, cashews and dressing, folding together until the all ingredient are coated. Stir in the cilantro and mix lightly one more time.
    • Serve the curried chicken salad alone or in lettuce cups, over salads greens, paleo wraps or whole wheat pita halves.

    Notes

    For how to poach chicken breasts follow this easy recipe. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 471kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 40gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 439mgPotassium: 815mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 113IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 51mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Meatball Beef Stroganoff

    12/22/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Creamy casserole dish of beef stroganoff made with meatballs with herbs on top.

    Meatball Stroganoff is a cozy twist on the classic beef stroganoff, swapping tender meatballs for steak in a creamy mushroom and onion sauce. It's rich, comforting, and budget-friendly, with a hint of Dijon mustard and fresh herbs for extra flavor. Serve it over noodles, mashed potatoes, or rice for a hearty meal the whole family will love.

    White oval casserole dish with creamy meatball beef stroganoff topped with fresh tarragon.

    I had beef stroganoff on my mind but no steak on hand, so I improvised with ground beef and made meatballs instead - and the result was terrific. These tender meatballs simmer in a rich, creamy stroganoff sauce made with mushrooms, onions, and crème fraîche (which won't curdle like sour cream). It's a made-from-scratch comfort food classic - no canned soups, just real ingredients. And while it's not a quick meal, it's absolutely worth the effort.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Meatball Stroganoff

    • Budget-friendly - All the classic stroganoff comfort without the steak price.
    • Flexible prep - Make meatballs ahead or use quality store-bought as a shortcut.
    • Make-ahead - The sauce holds beautifully overnight; meatballs reheat well.
    • Gluten-free friendly - Works with GF noodles or traditional egg noodles.
    • Serving options - Great over noodles, mashed potatoes, rice, or on its own for lower-carb.

    For another classic hearty meal, make my lasagna with no-boil noodles, either GF or not.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for beef meatballs in prep bowls on the kitchen counter.
    Ingredients for sauce for beef stroganoff in prep bowls ready to start cooking.

    Make meatballs ahead of time and refrigerate for up to 3 days or freeze and thaw when ready to enjoy.

    Beef Meatballs

    • Lean ground beef: I've made meatballs with 93/7, 90/10, and 85/15 lean to fat ratios and prefer the 93/7. The meatballs are still tender and flavorful, especially with the rich creamy sauce.
    • Breadcrumbs: Gluten-free bread crumbs or wheat bread crumbs help hold the meatballs together. I use homemade gluten-free breadcrumbs, or for store-bought, Aleia's.
    • Milk: Low fat or whole milk.
    • Egg: Large egg, helps bind the meatballs.
    • Onion: Yellow or brown onion adds flavor.
    • Parmesan cheese: Finely grated.
    • Garlic: Fresh cloves are best for that pungent garlic flavor.
    • Herbs: Use fresh Italian parsley and fresh thyme.

    Stroganoff Sauce

    • Butter: Use unsalted butter so you control the salt.
    • Onion: Yellow or brown onion.
    • Broth: Beef broth or beef stock. See chef's tip below.
    • Tomato paste: Adds richness and depth of flavor. Rather than a can, try a tube.
    • Mushrooms: Brown cremini mushrooms or white mushrooms. Buy them whole and slice them yourself, they are fresher.
    • Creme fraiche: French sour cream is richer than regular sour cream and won't curdle or break the sauce.
    • Worcestershire sauce: Not traditional, but adds a nice depth of flavor.
    • Mustard: Creamy Dijon mustard adds flavor and emulsification.
    • Flour: Use either a gluten-free flour blend or all purpose flour.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh tarragon adds great flavor, or use fresh thyme, or fresh dill. Fresh parsley adds color at serving if desired (I use extra tarragon).
    • Nutmeg: Just a little to add a sweet, nutty, and warm undertone of flavor.
    • Wine or spirits: A little brandy, cognac, dry white wine, or red wine contributes to the layers of flavor, (optional).

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper or white pepper. 

    Chef's tip on beef broth: Not all beef broths are created equal. There are many poor quality broths with unhealthy ingredients made from powders, extracts, and filler broths. A few I recommend are Kettle & Fire Beef Bone Broth, Butcher's Bone Broth (beef), and Bonfide Provisions (check freezer sections). They have clean, high quality ingredients and flavor. Be sure to read labels.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • In a hurry - Make the sauce from scratch using good-quality store-bought meatballs. Beef, turkey meatballs, or chicken all work well. Use bite-sized for best results.
    • Homemade option - For baked turkey meatballs, use this recipe.
    • Herbs - Swap dried herbs for fresh (like tarragon or thyme), using ½ to ⅓ as much.
    • Crème fraîche - If unavailable, use full-fat sour cream (not low-fat) and add at the very end to prevent curdling.
    • Garlic - No fresh on hand? Garlic powder will do in a pinch, ¼ teaspoon per clove.

    For another delicious dish with mushrooms, try mushroom duxelles, a classic French spread.

    Chef's Tip - Why These Meatballs Stay Tender
    The secret is a panade - a simple mix of bread (like breadcrumbs) and liquid (like milk or broth) that locks in moisture. It a culinary trick that keeps the meatballs juicy and prevents them from turning dense, which is why these meatballs stay so tender.

    If you love savory, creamy sauces, try my recipe for sour cream pork chops (it uses creme fraiche too).

    How to Make Meatball Stroganoff

    For meatballs

    Tool tip: To portion the meatballs, I use a handy little inexpensive gadget called a squeeze disher or scoop. It makes it easy and fast. I use the bite-sized #40 size disher (¾ ounce). You can use a larger size remembering the numbers of meatballs will be smaller in number and you'll need to adjust your baking time.

    Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment.

    A glass bowl with breadcrumbs, herbs, and egg to make a meatball binder.
    Step 1: Combine the breadcrumbs, milk, egg, and garlic. Let stand for 5 minutes to hydrate breadcrumbs.
    A meatball breadcrumb mix with herbs added in a glass bowl.
    Step 2: Mix in the parmesan, herbs, onion, salt & pepper.
    Adding pink ground beef to a bowl making meatball mix.
    Step 3: Add the beef and mix well with your hands but do not overwork the meat. Use disposable gloves if desired.
    Finished ground beef mix for meatballs ready to portion.
    Step 4: Finished meatball mix is ready for portioning and baking.
    Portioned meatballs on a parchment baking sheet with a disher.
    Step 5: Portion meatball mixture onto a parchment lined baking sheet using a #40 disher/scoop, or a tablespoon.
    Baked beef meatballs on a rimmed baking sheet on a marble counter.
    Step 6: Bake meatballs at 375°F for about 16 minutes. Ready to serve or cool.

    For Stroganoff sauce

    In case you've never made a classic sauce like this, I'm sharing a lot of photos to guide you through. It takes about 25 minutes in total. With a little patience and plenty of stirring you'll have a fantastic stroganoff sauce.

    A glass bowl of sliced white mushrooms on a marble counter.
    Step 1: Clean mushrooms and slice thin.
    Chopped onions sautéing in butter in a stainless steel fry pan.
    Step 2: Saute onions until soft in 2 tablespoons unsalted butter over medium to medium-low heat, 2-3 minutes.
    Adding sliced mushrooms to a pan of sautéed onions in butter.
    Step 3: Add mushrooms to onions and stir.
    Sliced mushroom and onions cooked until tender and light brown.
    Step 4: Cook mushrooms until most of the moisture is gone, add the alcohol and cook that down. Remove mushrooms to a bowl and set aside to use later.
    Melted butter and flour cooking in a steel pan with a wooden spatula.
    Step 5: In the same pan, melt the last 2 tablespoons of butter, add flour and stir until combined.
    A Flour and butter mix called a roux, basis for a sauce or gravy.
    Step 6: Cook the "roux" (roo) stirring, 2-3 minutes to remove the raw flour taste.
    A golden bubbly sauce with a steel whisk in a saute pan.
    Step 7: Over medium heat, slowly add the broth whisking to smooth and create a thickened sauce base, 10-12 minutes. Adjust heat as needed.
    A bubbling pan of stroganoff sauce in the making, adding herbs with a whisk.
    Step 8: Whisk in the tomato paste, herbs, worcestershire, mustard, nutmeg, salt and pepper.
    Creme fraiche being added to a pan with stroganoff sauce and a wire whisk.
    Step 9: Whisk in the creme fraiche until smooth and thick.
    Mushrooms added to stroganoff sauce in a saute pan with a wooden spatula.
    Step 10: Add the mushrooms and onions into the sauce and stir until thickened and you can draw a line through the sauce with a spatula. Ready to serve with the meatballs.
    A white oval casserole dish filled with meatball beef stroganoff with pasta in a bowl beside.

    Serving Suggestions

    Beef Stroganoff meatballs is best served over wide flat pasta noodles (GF or regular), egg noodles, rice, or mashed potatoes. For a lower carb dinner, simply serve meatballs and sauce in a bowl.

    Meatball stroganoff is a complete meal between the meatballs, sauce and pasta. The only thing you need is a tossed green salad on the side for balance. Use this salad recipe to make a nice homemade French vinaigrette.

    Storing

    Leftover meatball stroganoff (or made ahead meatball stroganoff) holds in the refrigerator for up to 3 days stored in an airtight container.

    I usually make my meatball beef stroganoff a few hours ahead of time (or a day ahead) then pop it into a 350°F oven covered with aluminum foil to heat back up (to 165°F).

    Freezing

    The meatballs freeze well on their own but the sauce does not because of the dairy (it gets grainy). To freeze sauce ahead of time, omit the creme fraiche. To serve, heat the thawed sauce in a pan until hot, then whisk in the creme fraiche and warm through.

    Recipe FAQS

    How do I make the sauce smooth and creamy?

    Tradition says use sour cream, but for a rich, creamy stroganoff sauce that won't curdle or break, use French sour cream, called Creme Fraiche. It's works much better.

    Can I make Stroganoff meatballs in a slow cooker?

    For the best results, make the meatballs and sauce ahead of time then heat it in a slow cooker to serve. It's a great make dish that made ahead re-heats well.

    Can I make the meatballs ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Meatballs are a terrific make-ahead dish. Make meatballs and refrigerate for up to 3 days, or cool completely and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator to use, then combine and heat with your choice of sauce.

    Do I cook the meatballs in the sauce or separately?

    Cook the meatballs separately (first), then add them to the sauce when the sauce is done to heat through. This can be done on the stovetop or in the oven in a casserole dish, covered.

    More Dinners with Great Sauces

    If you love a good sauce, try these recipes as well!

    • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
      Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe
    • bison bolognese with pasta
      Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
    • beef tenderloin on a plate.
      Roast Beef Tenderloin (Center-Cut Chateaubriand)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make meatball beef stroganoff, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Creamy casserole dish of beef stroganoff made with meatballs with herbs on top.

    Meatball Stroganoff

    Sally Cameron
    A terrific twist on classic beef stroganoff made with beef meatballs in a rich, creamy sauce with onions, mushroom, and creme fraiche instead of sour cream. Makes 30 meatballs for 5 servings or 4 larger appetites. Serve over wide pasta noodles, rice, mashed potatoes, or without. Make the meatballs ahead of time. The meatballs take 45 minutes and the sauce about 45 minutes.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 5 (6 meatballs each)
    Calories 265 kcal

    Equipment

    • Rimmed baking sheet half sheet size
    • Parchment paper
    • 12" saute pan or fry pan
    • Whisk

    Ingredients
      

    Beef meatballs

    • 6 tablespoons plain breadcrumbs gluten-free or wheat
    • 6 tablespoons milk
    • 1 large egg
    • 2 large garlic cloves zested or finely chopped
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ cup finely grated parmesan cheese
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped parsley
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
    • ¾ cup onion, very finely chopped ½ a medium onion
    • 1 pound lean ground beef 93/7 or 90/10 lean to fat

    Stroganoff sauce

    • 1 pound white mushrooms or cremini
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter divided use
    • 1 cup chopped onion ½ a medium
    • 2 tablespoons brandy, cognac, or dry white wine optional
    • 3 tablespoons flour GF blend or all purpose
    • 2 cups low sodium beef broth
    • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
    • 2 teaspoons tomato paste
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped tarragon or thyme or ⅓ to ½ amount dried
    • 1 tablespoon worcestershire GF if needed
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper or white pepper
    • ⅛ teaspoon nutmeg
    • 7-8 ounces creme fraiche

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Get ready

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a half sheet baking sheet with parchment paper.

    Make the Meatballs (can be made ahead)

    • Combine the breadcrumbs, milk, egg, garlic, salt and pepper in a medium bowl and mix well. Allow to stand for about 5 minutes for breadcrumbs to hydrate.
    • Add salt, cheese, herbs, and onion and mix well. Add the ground beef and gently mix with your hands. Disposable kitchen gloves are helpful. Mix completely until ingredients are well distributed but don't overwork the meat.

    Portion meatballs

    • With either a #40 disher (aka cookie scoop) or a tablespoon, portion meatballs onto the baking pan. They should be bite sized or the size of a small golf ball. You should get approximately 30 meatballs.

    Bake meatballs

    • Bake meatballs for 16-17 minutes until they reach 165°F internally measured with a digital thermometer. Remove pan from the oven.
      If serving immediately keep warm while you make the sauce. Alternatively cool and refrigerate for 3 days or freeze for up to 3 months, labeled and dated. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator to use.

    Clean the mushrooms (start sauce)

    • Using a paring knife, trim the stems of the mushrooms flush with the base and discard stems. Cup 2-3 mushrooms in your hands and rinse them quickly under a trickle of cold water. Dry on paper towels.

    Make the sauce

    • Melt 2 tablespoons of butter in a 12" saute pan or fry pan, add the chopped onion and cook until softened, about 3 minutes. Add sliced mushrooms and cook until the moisture is released and almost gone, 8-10 minutes. Add brandy if using, and cook until almost gone. Pour the onions and mushrooms into a bowl and set aside near the stove until needed.
    • Add the 2 remaining tablespoons of butter to the pan and melt over medium low heat, add the flour and whisk to combine. Cook for 2-3 minutes to remove the raw flour taste.
      Slowly add broth to the pan, whisking to create a smooth sauce. Cook and whisk until the sauce is thickened, 8-10 minutes. Whisk in the Dijon and tomato paste until smooth, then stir in the tarragon, worcestershire, salt, pepper, and nutmeg until smooth. Stir in the onions and mushrooms. Lastly, add the creme fraiche and stir.

    To serve

    • To serve, add the meatballs to the pan and heat through until meatballs are hot. Serve over noodles, rice, or mashed potatoes.
      At this point you can cool the stroganoff and place in an airtight container and refrigerate for 3 days before re-heating and serving.

    Notes

    Substitutions

    • Substitute ½-3/4 teaspoon granulated garlic powder for the fresh garlic.
    • Swap dried herbs for fresh at half the amount.
    • For gluten-free flour blend I use King Arthur.
    • If using spirits and you don't keep it on hand, buy an airline size bottle at a liquor store. 
    • If using white wine, get the mini, airline sized bottles at the grocery store.

    Freezing meatballs

    After meatballs are completely cooled, place them in a single layer on a baking sheet and freeze for 2-4 hours before transferring them to a container or bag. This ensures they're individually frozen and don't stick together. 
    If using frozen cooked meatballs, thaw them first before adding to the sauce. 

    Freezing sauce

    This is not a dish that freezes finished well because freezing disrupts the emulsion of the dairy and it may become grainy. If you want to freeze it, leave out the crème fraîche and stir it in after reheating the thawed sauce. Add the thawed meatballs and heat through until hot. 

    Meatballs nutrition (per 6 meatballs)

    For the nutrition calculation I've separated out the meatballs because they are good with other sauces. It's a great basic beef meatball recipe. 
    Serving: 6 meatballs provides 265 kcals, 24 g protein, 13g fat, 13g carbs, 1g fiber. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6meatballsCalories: 265kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 24gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 102mgSodium: 484mgPotassium: 419mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 325IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 136mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Turkey and Wild Rice Soup with Leftovers

    12/02/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.

    Transform your Thanksgiving leftovers into a comforting bowl of turkey and wild rice soup! This hearty soup is packed with vegetables, tender turkey, flavorful broth, and the nutty chew of wild rice. Best of all, it comes together in about 30 minutes since the main ingredients are already prepared. Top it off with fresh herbs and a sprinkle of salty Parmesan cheese, and serve with crunchy garlic toast for a cozy, satisfying meal.

    Turkey and wild rice soup in a white pot with garlic toast on the side.

    After Thanksgiving I look forward to making this turkey and wild rice soup each year. But it's too good to make only after Thanksgiving, so make it with leftover chicken for a chicken and wild rice soup or whenever you make turkey.

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Leftover turkey soup can also be made with chicken.
    • Comes together in about 30 minutes.
    • Hearty and flavor-filled.
    • A great way to use leftover Thanksgiving turkey.

    For another easy soup try this chicken rice soup made in an Instant Pot.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for turkey wild rice soup in prep bowls on the counter.
    • Turkey: Use leftover roast turkey, both dark meat and turkey breast for best flavor. Out of turkey? Use rotisserie or roast chicken.
    • Rice: Wild rice gives this soup a hearty texture and nutty, chewy texture.
    • Broth: I use homemade turkey broth which I make ahead and freeze, but chicken broth works too. Look in the freezer section of your grocery store for frozen turkey broth options. Another option, homemade turkey stock made from the turkey carcass.
    • Onion: Yellow, onion brown or white onion.
    • Leek: Use the light green part only, not the dark green tops which are tough.
    • Carrot: For sweetness and more vegetables.
    • Celery: Just a few ribs complete the flavorful, aromatic base for most soup recipes.
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves for the best flavor.
    • Herbs: Fresh parsley, fresh thyme, and bay leaves.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Instead of wild rice, use a brown and wild rice blend, brown rice, or white rice.
    • Swap dried herbs for fresh, using ⅓ to ½ as much, try an Italian seasoning blend.
    • Add a little chopped fresh fennel with the vegetables.
    • For a creamy turkey wild rice soup, use less broth and add heavy cream.
    • Add a little soy sauce or gluten-free tamari for an umami flavor boost to deepen flavor (use instead of salt). Start with 2 teaspoons.
    • To brighten the flavor squeeze in a little lemon juice. 

    For another hearty soup made with leftover chicken or turkey, make this Mexican chicken tortilla soup.

    Chef' tip on wild rice: Should I use cooked wild rice or uncooked wild rice? I recommend using cooked rice. Cook it ahead of time and refrigerate it or freeze it until you make the soup. If you add uncooked wild rice to the soup, it absorbs a lot of broth and might get mushy. I cook mine ahead so it's perfect.

    Recipe Instructions

    To cook turkey and wild rice soup, use a large dutch oven or other large soup pot. 

    Carrot, celery, onion, and leek cooking in a large soup pot.
    Step 1: Saute celery, onion, carrots, and leek in olive oil until soft.
    Adding chopped turkey to a soup pot, with a wooden spoon.
    Step 2: Add chopped turkey.
    Stirring chopped fresh green herbs into a pot of turkey soup.
    Step 3: Add chopped fresh green herbs.
    Adding wild rice to a pot of turkey soup with vegetables.
    Step 4: Add cooked wild rice and stir.
    A large glass measuring cup filled with golden broth pouring into a pot of wild rice soup.
    Step 5: Pour in the broth and stir.
    Bay leaves on simmering in a pot of soup with turkey, vegetables, and rice.
    Step 6: Add bay leaf and simmer for flavors to blend, 15 minutes.
    A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.

    Chef's tip: Is it stock or broth? While the terms are used interchangeably, technically any stock (like chicken stock) is made with bones only while broth is made with meaty pieces. Bones give stock or broth a gelatinous quality (it's jiggly) and the meat, rich flavor and more nutrition.

    Serving and Storage

    Turkey and wild rice soup is a meal in a bowl. I serve it with crisp browned garlic toast or crusty bread. To make it a bigger meal, add a tossed green salad with simple homemade balsamic vinaigrette.

    Leftover turkey and wild rice soup keeps for 3-4 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Reheat on the stovetop until heated through.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to cook the wild rice before adding it to the soup?

    For best results, cook the wild rice first. You can even cook it a few days ahead and freeze it for when you need it. Wild rice can be added raw, but pre-cooking it separately ensures it doesn't absorb too much liquid from the soup.

    Can I freeze turkey and wild rice soup?

    You can, but the rice can get mushy after thawing. The best way is to cook the soup entirely, not add the wild rice, and add cooked wild rice after thawing and before freezing. You can cook and freeze the rice separately.

    Can I use frozen turkey?

    You can use frozen cooked turkey, but thaw before adding to the soup.

    More Hearty Soup Recipes

    For more terrific soups from smooth and creamy to hearty, check out the soups recipe page. The chicken noodle soup link below is a reader favorite.

    • A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.
      Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe
    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.
      Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup
    • Creamy squash and apple soup in a gray bowl with pumpkin seeds and chives.
      Creamy Butternut and Apple Soup

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make turkey and wild rice soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A white pot of turkey and wild rice soup on a gray wooden board with herbs and parmesan cheese on the side.

    Turkey and Wild Rice Soup

    Sally Cameron
    A flavorful hearty soup to make with Thanksgiving turkey leftovers. If you're out of turkey, try it with leftover chicken.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Yield 2 quarts
    Calories 212 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot 4-5 quarts

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil
    • 1 cup chopped onion half a large onion
    • 1 medium leek, chopped use white and light green parts only
    • 3 ribs celery chopped
    • 3 medium carrots chopped
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 2 cups chopped leftover turkey or chicken, about 11 ounces
    • 1 ½ cups cooked wild rice or wild rice blend or brown rice
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves ½ teaspoon dried
    • 4 cups turkey broth or chicken broth
    • 1-2 bay leaves
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    Optional garnish

    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped Italian parsley
    • ¼ cup grated parmesan cheese

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Heat the olive oil in a large heavy soup pot, 4-5 quarts, over medium heat. Add the onion, leek, celery, and carrots. Cook for about 7 minutes until soft, stirring. Turn down the heat if needed, you don't want the vegetables to brown. Add the garlic and cook another minute.
    • Stir in the turkey, then the herbs, wild rice. Stir and cook for 3-5 minutes, then add the broth and bay leaves and bring to a simmer. Cook for about 15 minutes for flavors to blend and soup to heat through. Season with salt and pepper and soup is ready to serve.
      Sprinkle with parsley and parmesan if desired.

    Notes

    If you freeze or refrigerate this soup, you might need a little extra broth as when it sits the rice can absorb some of the broth. For brothier soup, add another cup or so of broth. 
    If you want to make the soup ahead of time, cook the rice and store it separately from the soup so it does not get mushy and absorb a lot of broth, then add it when you're heating the soup.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2cupsCalories: 212kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 21gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 52mgSodium: 1310mgPotassium: 616mgFiber: 4gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 8345IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 80mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamy Mashed Potatoes (With a Ricer)

    11/15/2024 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.

    Creamy mashed potatoes are easiest to get right when you use a potato ricer. The ricer presses the cooked potatoes into fine, fluffy strands so you can blend in warm butter and dairy without overworking them, giving you smooth, light mashed potatoes instead of dense or gluey ones. This is the method I rely on for consistently creamy mashed potatoes, whether I'm making them for a holiday dinner or a simple weeknight meal.

    A round white bowl full of creamy mashed potatoes drizzled with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley.

    When friends come for dinner, they inevitably end up in the kitchen with me, watching, asking questions, and often lending a hand. More than once, someone has watched me make creamy mashed potatoes and asked about the potato ricer because they had never used one. It's an inexpensive kitchen tool, but it makes a remarkable difference in the texture of mashed potatoes-one reason it has been my preferred method for years.

    Creamy Mashed Potatoes Recipe Snapshot

    • Fluffy, lump-free texture - A potato ricer creates exceptionally smooth, light mashed potatoes without lumps or a gluey texture.
    • Better texture with less risk - A ricer presses the potatoes gently, unlike mixers or food processors that can overwork the starch and make mashed potatoes gummy.
    • Easy to adapt - Make them rich and buttery with dairy, or use simple swaps for dairy-free or vegan mashed potatoes.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Prepare them ahead and choose from several easy reheating methods to make holiday or dinner timing easier.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for mashed potatoes on the counter with russet potatoes, milk and butter.
    • Potatoes - Use russet potatoes for the fluffiest mashed potatoes. Their higher starch content gives you a lighter texture than waxier gold potatoes. Plan on about ½ pound per person.
    • Milk - Use low-fat milk, whole milk, or half-and-half. Heavy cream works too, but it makes the potatoes richer and heavier, so use it according to your preference.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter so you can control the seasoning. If using salted butter, add additional salt carefully at the end.
    • Fresh herbs - Chives and parsley make an easy, fresh garnish. Optional.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and your choice of black or white pepper. White pepper keeps the potatoes free of black specks.

    For another buttery way to add flavor to riced mashed potatoes, add a few slices of this herbed compound butter.

    The Best Potatoes for Creamy Mashed Potatoes

    What are the best potatoes for mashed potatoes? For the lightest, fluffiest texture, I prefer russets, but other varieties work too.

    • Russet potatoes - High in starch, so they cook up light and fluffy. They're my first choice for creamy mashed potatoes made with a ricer.
    • Yellow and gold potatoes - Yukon Gold and other yellow-fleshed potatoes are naturally buttery, velvety, and a little denser when mashed. They make excellent mashed potatoes, but the texture is creamier and less fluffy than russets. I especially like them for red potato salad, gratins, and scalloped potatoes.
    • White potatoes - Medium-starch potatoes with thin skins and a slightly creamy texture. They can be mashed, but they won't be as fluffy as russets.
    • Red potatoes - Waxy, moist, and firm, so they hold their shape well after cooking. I prefer them for roasting, potato salad, soups, and air fryer red potatoes rather than classic mashed potatoes.

    How many potatoes should I buy? Plan on about ½ pound of potatoes per person, or roughly 2 pounds for 4 people and 3 pounds for 6.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Dairy-free or vegan - Use an unsweetened neutral plant milk such as oat or almond milk, along with plant butter.
    • Roasted garlic - Fold in roasted garlic for a deeper, savory flavor.
    • Parmesan - Add finely grated Parmesan for extra richness and umami.S
    • Sour cream mashed potatoes - Use a little less milk and stir in sour cream for a tangy, creamy variation.

    Chef's tip on buying a ricer: Potato ricers come in metal or plastic and with different hopper shapes, usually round or triangular. When I was catering dinner parties, I used a large metal ricer for bigger batches, but larger models take more hand and arm strength to press the potatoes through. For home use, I prefer a smaller ricer that's comfortable to hold and easy to clean. Plastic and stainless steel versions work equally well, so choose the style that feels best in your hand. This is one kitchen tool that earns its space-you'll use it for years.

    How to Make Creamy Mashed Potatoes With a Ricer

    A glass bowl of clean peeled russet potatoes ready to cook.
    Step 1: Peel the potatoes with a vegetable peeler.
    Chopped potatoes on a white cutting board with a chefs knife.
    Step 2: Cut potatoes into equal sized cubes about 1" inch.
    Potatoes simmering in a pot of water with small bubbles on top.
    Step 3: Add potatoes to a large pot, cover with an inch of cold water. Add a tablespoon of salt. Bring to a simmer over medium heat, cook 10-15 minutes.
    Cooked potatoes in a colander pierced with a paring knife showing doneness.
    Step 4: Potatoes are done when tender and easily pierced with a paring knife. Drain through a colander. Place potatoes back in colander and sit them back on the hot empty pan to reduce excess water.
    A potato ricer with a hopper full of cooked potatoes.
    Step 5: Place cooked potatoes in the hopper basket of the ricer fitted with the small holes. Work quickly while they are warm.
    Mashed potatoes being extruded from a potato ricer into a pot.
    Step 6: Press all potatoes through the ricer.
    Riced mashed potatoes being finished with butter and milk.
    Step 7: Add soft butter, warm milk from a small saucepan, and salt.
    Creamy finished riced mashed potatoes with a stirring spoon in a pot
    Step 8: Stir potatoes until creamy. Taste test for texture and flavor, adding more butter, milk, salt, and pepper.

    Chef's tip on using a potato ricer: Cook the potatoes until tender but not falling apart or waterlogged. After draining, set the colander over the warm pot for a minute or two so excess moisture can evaporate, then rice the potatoes back into the pot while they're still hot. Don't overload the ricer hopper; work in smaller batches for easier pressing and a lighter, fluffier texture.

    Peeling Potatoes Ahead of Time

    If you're making creamy mashed potatoes for a crowd, you can peel the potatoes ahead of time. Keep them completely submerged in cold water and refrigerated until you're ready to cook.

    • Keep them cold - Store peeled potatoes in cold water in the refrigerator.
    • Don't soak too long - For the best texture, use them within about 8-12 hours. Longer soaking can leach out starch and affect the finished texture.
    • Drain before cooking - Drain well before boiling; there's no need to pat them bone-dry since they're going straight into water.

    This little bit of prep can make holiday cooking much easier while still giving you light, creamy mashed potatoes.

    Serving Suggestions

    Creamy mashed potatoes are a classic side dish that pair well with everything from roast chicken to holiday beef and pork. Try them alongside:

    • Roast bone-in chicken breasts.
    • Crispy seared duck breasts.
    • Mediterranean chicken thighs.
    • Roast beef tenderloin.
    • Pork tenderloin with Dijon mustard sauce.

    For extra richness, drizzle a little melted butter over the top just before serving.

    For a complimentary vegetable side, try roasted brussels sprouts, green beans almondine, or roasted carrots with fresh thyme.

    How to Reheat Mashed Potatoes

    If you're making creamy mashed potatoes ahead of time, there are four easy ways to reheat mashed potatoes while keeping them smooth and fluffy. Remove them from the refrigerator about an hour ahead to take off some of the chill. Reheating time will vary depending on the amount of potatoes and how cold they are, so use the methods and times below as a guide.

    • Stovetop method - Place the mashed potatoes in a heavy pot over low heat. Add a splash of milk and stir frequently so they don't stick or scorch. Partially cover and continue stirring occasionally until heated through, adding more milk or butter as needed to restore the creamy texture.
    • Oven method - Transfer the mashed potatoes to an oven-safe dish and cover with foil. Reheat in a 350°F oven for about 20-30 minutes, stirring once halfway through. Add a little milk or butter if needed, and heat until hot throughout.
    • Slow cooker method - This is how I kept mashed potatoes hot for catered parties, and it works beautifully for holiday meals. Reheat on low, stirring every 20-30 minutes and adding a splash of milk if needed. Once hot, switch to warm. I place a clean kitchen towel between the insert and lid to catch condensation so it doesn't drip back into the potatoes.
    • Microwave method - Place the mashed potatoes in a microwave-safe dish and cover. Reheat in 1-minute intervals, stirring between each, until hot. Add a little milk or butter as needed to refresh the texture.
    Creamy mashed potaotes with fresh chopped herbs on top and a serving spoon.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of potatoes are best for creamy mashed potatoes?

    Russet potatoes are my first choice because their higher starch content creates light, fluffy mashed potatoes. Yukon Golds also work well, but they produce a richer, denser, more velvety texture.

    Should I peel potatoes before using a potato ricer?

    Yes. Peel the potatoes before cooking and rice them while they're still hot for the smoothest texture and the easiest pressing.

    Can I add garlic, herbs, or cheese to mashed potatoes?

    Absolutely. Roasted garlic and freshly grated Parmesan are two of my favorite additions. Add extra ingredients gradually, tasting as you go so the potatoes stay balanced and creamy.

    How much butter and milk should I add to mashed potatoes?

    I start with about 4 ounces of milk and 3-4 tablespoons of butter per pound of potatoes, then adjust to taste. It's easier to add more than to fix potatoes that have become too thin. I usually use whole milk or half-and-half because they create a creamy texture without making the potatoes overly rich.

    More Potato Recipes

    Love potatoes? Me too. Here are more delicious potato recipes to try next.

    • Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
      Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe
    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • Parmesan potato wedges
      Crispy Baked Parmesan Potatoes (Sliced & Oven-Roasted)
    • scalloped potatoes gratin
      Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make creamy mashed potatoes, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.

    Creamy Mashed Potatoes (With a Ricer)

    Sally Cameron
    Skip the hand potato masher and use a ricer for the best fluffy creamy mashed potatoes.
    4.50 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    mashing time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 297 kcal

    Equipment

    • Potato ricer
    • Medium pot

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 pound russet potatoes 6 medium
    • 6 ounces milk: whole milk, low fat, or half and half or non-dairy
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 tablespoon sea salt for cooking water
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon white pepper optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Peel potatoes and chop into approximately 1-inch pieces, keeping the pieces the same size.
    • Add potatoes to a medium pot and add cold water to cover by 1-inch. Add 1 tablespoon sea salt. Bring almost to a boil then turn down to simmer and cook until potatoes are tender when pierced through with a paring knife, 10-15 minutes.
      Warm the milk so cold milk doesn't chill your hot mashed potatoes, and be sure the butter is at room temperature or melted.
    • Drain potatoes through a colander then place the colander back on the warm pot on the stovetop to dry for a minute. Place ricer over top of the pot and spoon potatoes into the hopper. Press the potatoes through the ricer.
      When done, add butter and milk gradually, stirring, until you get to the perfect taste and texture. Season with salt and a little white pepper if using.
      Keep potatoes warm for serving or cool completely and refrigerate to be re-heated. Leftover riced mashed potatoes last 4-5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. They can be frozen for up to a month but may not be as creamy upon thawing.

    Notes

    For no-dairy or vegan riced mashed potatoes, use either coconut milk, almond milk, oat milk, or you favorite plant-based milk, and plant butter.
    Add roasted garlic or finely grated Parmesan cheese.
    For four ways to re-heat riced mashed potatoes after refrigerating (if making ahead of time), please see the post; stovetop, in the oven, microwave, or slow-cooker. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 297kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 6gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 34mgSodium: 217mgPotassium: 992mgFiber: 3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 398IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 68mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Compound Butter for a Turkey

    11/25/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A yellow butter log with herbs with sliced pieces, fresh herbs behind.

    For a golden, flavorful Thanksgiving bird, compound butter for turkey is your secret weapon. Soft butter mixed with fresh herbs, citrus zest, and garlic gets tucked under the skin to baste the meat from within-so it stays juicy with beautifully crisp, bronzed skin. It takes minutes to prep, can be made ahead and frozen, and is simple to use on roasting day. For a reliably delicious, perfectly roasted turkey, start with this compound butter.

    A yellow log of compound butter flecked with green herbs rolled in parchment paper.

    For years I've made an herbed compound butter for a turkey. The butter's fat helps deliver that golden, crispy skin, while fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic infuse flavor and keep the meat juicy. Most of it goes under the skin, with a thin smear on top-so when you pull that bird from the oven, it gets the rightful oohs and ahhs. Sounds good? It is-and it's surprisingly easy to make.

    Why You'll Love Compound Butter for a Turkey

    • Simple, make-ahead recipe - Mix in minutes; refrigerate 5-7 days or freeze up to 3 months.
    • Big payoff on roast day - Adds flavor, moisture, and gorgeous color as the turkey roasts.
    • Under-skin = juicy meat - Butter goes under the skin; a thin smear on top for bronzing.
    • Flexible seasoning - Make it with or without salt and pepper.

    Add a slice of compound butter to each of the roast bone-in chicken breasts while they are finishing in the oven.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for an herbed compound butter for turkey on a marble counter.
    • Butter (unsalted) - Best for control, especially if you dry-brine. Salt the bird first, then apply the herb butter. If you only have salted butter, reduce added salt elsewhere.
    • Garlic (fresh) - Use freshly grated or finely zested garlic cloves for an even, punchy flavor that spreads well.
    • Herbs (fresh) - Pick your favorites: thyme, parsley, rosemary, sage, chives, marjoram. You don't need them all-2-3 herbs are perfect. Chop finely so they distribute evenly.
    • Citrus zest - Lemon zest is my go-to; orange zest (or both) is nice, too. Zest carries the aromatic oils that brighten the butter without adding liquid.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper. Note salt and pepper are optional.

    For the best turkey, brine baby brine, and then use your compound butter. If you've never done it, here's my turkey dry brine tutorial. It's super easy and way easier than wet brining giving you a flavorful turkey.

    Chef's note: What is a compound butter? It's any butter blended with herbs, spices, citrus zest, garlic, honey, and many other flavoring possibilities. They are sometimes called infused butters or flavored butters. Using them is a great way to add extra flavor to food and can be used almost anywhere you'd use plain butter. Compound butters can be made savory (as in this compound butter for a turkey) or sweet compound butter, as in this maple vanilla butter. There are also speciality butters such as blue cheese butter, truffle butter, and this miso butter which is terrific on fish and seafood.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Herbs & citrus - Mix and match your favorites-thyme, parsley, rosemary, sage, chives, marjoram. Use lemon or orange zest…or skip citrus entirely.
    • Garlic options - Substitute garlic powder for fresh at ¼ teaspoon per clove.
    • Classic lemon-herb - Lemon zest + parsley + dill (bright and turkey-friendly).
    • Southwestern - Cumin + coriander + chili powder (or smoked paprika) for warm spice; add lime zest instead of lemon.
    • No fresh herbs - Use half the amount of dried (they're stronger). Let the butter stand 30 minutes so dried herbs can rehydrate and soften before using or chilling.

    Use a slice of this butter to dress up simple blanched green beans. They take 5 minutes!

    Chef's Tip: Salt Strategy

    • Dry-brined turkey: Keep the butter lightly salted so you don't overdo it.
    • Wet-brined turkey: Skip salt in the butter (or add just a pinch).
    • Unbrined turkey: Use about ¼-½ teaspoon kosher salt per stick (8 Tbsp) of butter.
    • Taste before you spread: Mix, taste a tiny dab, then adjust.
    • Pepper: Add a pinch of black pepper to the butter; adjust on the bird as needed.

    How to Make a Compound Butter for Turkey

    Start with very soft butter at room temperature for the easiest mixing. Do not melt the butter. Get out a piece of parchment paper, waxed paper, or plastic wrap and some kitchen twine (or rubber bands) to make the butter log. Do not use aluminum foil. It reacts with certain ingredients (like acidic ones) and also tears easily.

    Be sure your herbs are totally dry. Wet herbs do not chop well. Try washing them ahead of time and air drying on a kitchen towel.

    Herbs and butter prepped to make a compound butter in glass bowls.
    Step 1: Stir the butter. Finely chop the herbs, zest the garlic (for super smooth garlic), finely chop the citrus zest so that everything blends together well.
    Butter, citrus zest, herbs, and garlic in a glass bowl.
    Step 2: Add room temperature butter and all ingredients to a medium bowl. If using salt and pepper, add now.
    A soft compound butter mixed with herbs in a glass bowl with herbs on side.
    Step 3: Blend butter mixture with a fork or a flexible spatula until well mixed and the herbs are evenly distributed.
    A yellow compound butter with flecks of green herbs on a piece of white parchment paper.
    Step 4: Place the butter near the bottom third of the parchment paper and shape into a log as best as possible.
    Compound butter in the process of rolling into a log in parchment paper.
    Step 5: Fold the bottom of the parchment over the butter and pull the top back against the butter forming a log.
    A log of herbed butter in wax paper with open ends, not twisted yet.
    Step 6: Roll turkey butter into a tight log.
    A finished log of herbed butter with ends twisted to secure and seal, with a label.
    Step 7: Twist the ends in opposite directions compressing the butter. Refrigerate or freeze.

    Chef's tip: How to get very fine garlic. Biting into a piece of raw garlic is not pleasant. Rather than simply chopping garlic, use one of three techniques: use a microplane zester and zest the garlic fine, chop fine and smear into a paste with the back of your chef's knife, or use a garlic press and chop it finer by hand. Either way, you're creating a fine garlic paste that easily incorporates into butter. No biting into a piece of raw garlic.

    How to Use Compound Butter for Turkey

    As a general rule, allow the turkey to stand unwrapped at room temperature for one hour to get the chill off before applying compound butter, then apply herb compound butter for turkey before roasting. The flavors from the butter melt in during roasting and self-baste the meat.

    For best application, work with room temperature butter. Use it for a whole turkey or for a turkey breast.

    With dampened hands, gently insert fingers between the turkey skin and meat to loosen the skin. Slowly work your fingers as far back under the breast skin and near the legs as possible. The skin stretches a fair amount but be careful not to tear it.

    When skin is loosened, spread some of the compound butter in three places:

    • Under the skin of the turkey.
    • On top of the turkey breast and legs.
    • A little inside the cavity of the turkey, rubbing it on the inside walls.

    How much you use depends on the size of your turkey. You won't use it all (save the extra). Don't over-do it for delicious a golden, delicious roast turkey. Save the rest for more delicious dishes. Once applied, the turkey is ready to roast.

    Serving Suggestions

    There are many ways to use a compound butter for turkey beyond turkey!

    • Not just for turkey - Use this butter beyond the bird.
    • Roast chicken - Slide under the skin or melt over sliced breast.
    • Steak - Finish grilled steak with a coin for that steakhouse gloss.
    • Fish - Melt over grilled or baked salmon, halibut, or cod.
    • Mashed potatoes - Stir into riced potatoes or whipped sweet potatoes.
    • Vegetables - Toss with hot green beans, carrots, or roasted broccoli.
    • Bread/rolls - Spread on warm dinner rolls or toasted bread.
    • Grilled corn - Slather on hot grilled corn on the cob in summer.
    • Cornbread - Smear on a slice of your naturally gluten-free cornbread.

    If the compound butter is cold and solidified, allow it to soften at room temperature to use for the best flavor.

    Storage & Freezing

    Compound butter lasts 1 to 2 weeks in the refrigerator when stored properly rolled and wrapped or in an airtight container to keep it fresh and prevent it from absorbing refrigerator odors.

    For longer storage, freeze butter for up to 3 months. Slice off just what you need when ready to use.

    A yellow butter log with herbs with sliced pieces, fresh herbs behind.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use salted butter?

    Yes. If using salted butter, reduce added salt elsewhere and taste the mixture before spreading-especially if you dry- or wet-brine.

    Do I need to baste the turkey?

    Not really. When most of the butter goes under the skin (with a thin smear on top), the turkey essentially self-bastes. Opening the oven often drops the heat. If you like, spoon pan juices over the bird once in the last 30-45 minutes; tent with foil if browning too fast.

    Can I use dairy-free butter?

    Yes. Use a stick-style plant butter (not whipped/light tubs). Salt levels vary, so adjust. Browning may be less than dairy butter.

    Recipes to Use Compound Butter With

    Use compound butter for turkey for more than turkey! Add some to potatoes dishes. Place a sliver on chicken breasts before oven roasting. Use for a whole roast chicken. Use over simple steamed or blanched vegetables for flavor. It's really versatile.

    • A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.
      Creamy Mashed Potatoes (With a Ricer)
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • whole roast chicken
      How to Roast a Whole Chicken (sear first method)
    • A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.
      Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make compound butter for a turkey, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A yellow butter log with herbs with sliced pieces, fresh herbs behind.

    Compound Butter for a Turkey

    Sally Cameron
    Compound butters are a secret weapon in the kitchn for adding flavor and moisture. This is for turkey but works with roast chicken, steak, and many other things! For a plain herbed butter, omit the citrus. If you prefer using salted butter, be careful of salt elsewhere.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16
    Calories 205 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces unsalted butter or salted butter 2 sticks, half pound.
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped fresh thyme leaves
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped fresh parsley leaves
    • 1 teaspoon finely chopped fresh rosemary leaves
    • 2 large fresh garlic cloves zested or chopped fine and smeared into a paste
    • 1 teaspoon lemon zest optional
    • 1 teaspoon orange zest optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Be sure the butter is very soft before you start blending. Allow it to stand at room temperature for 2-3 hours. Do not melt the butter if you try to speed up the process.
    • Chop the herbs very fine so the blend into the soft butter well. Zest the garlic fine or chop fine then smear into a paste with the back of your chef's knife, into a paste.
      Add the butter and all herbs, garlic, and zest if using to a small bowl. Blend well with a flexible spatula until ingredients are evenly distributed.
    • See photos in the post for help! To make a butter log, place the herbed butter on a full size (12"x16") piece of parchment paper or waxed paper. Using a spatula, spread it into a log shape in the bottom third of the paper with the short edge at the top.
      Fold the bottom of the paper over the top of the butter, then with your fingers or the spatula, gently pull the paper back against the butter to tighten it into a log. Roll the log the entire length of the parchment. Twist end the opposite way from each other and tie them to secure.
    • Compound butter lasts 1-2 weeks in the refrigerator. Wrap the log in plastic film for more protection if desired. Freeze for up to 3 months. Slice off just what you need to use.

    Notes

    Herbs note: Choose fresh herbs such as thyme, Italian parsley, rosemary, sage, chives or marjoram. Don't use them all; choose your favorite 2-3 fresh herbs.
    The parchment paper I use for this is a non-stick parchment paper. Find it here on Amazon. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 205kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 0.3gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 61mgSodium: 3mgPotassium: 14mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 0.04gVitamin A: 734IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 11mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Baked Brie with Jam Appetizer

    11/23/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A round wheel of baked brie cheese with a fruit and nut topping, with apples, pears, and crostini.

    If you're looking for a show-stopping, easy holiday appetizer, this baked brie with jam is it! Warm creamy cheese topped with fig compote of fig jam, dried figs and cranberries, and chopped pecans for a perfect balance of sweet and nutty flavors. Serve it with baguette and crisp apple slices for an unforgettable appetizer that will have your guests asking for the recipe. And it's so simple to make!

    A platter of bake brie cheese with fig jam, cranberries, pecans, and bread with apple slices.

    This baked brie with jam recipe was always a crowd pleaser at my catered parties. While the brie bakes to melty perfection, prepare a warm, fruity fig compote on the stovetop with jam, dried fruits, and nuts. Spoon it over the warm brie and serve with baguette slices, fresh grapes, and apple slices. It's irresistible and one of the easiest appetizers.

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Baked brie with jam is a good party appetizer.
    • Simple to make for a busy holiday season.
    • Halve the recipe for a smaller group (8 ounce brie wheel) or double (2-pound brie wheel) for a bigger crowd.
    • No puff pastry to deal with like brie en croûte.

    For another delicious fruity topping, make some of this apple cinnamon compote.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for baked brie cheese appetizer on the counter with cranberries, figs, pecan, jam, orange, and cinnamon.

    Baked Brie

    • Brie: Get a one pound wheel of brie cheese. Don't get a wedge of brie, it doesn't work, as the cheese oozes out everywhere. It needs the rind to hold it in shape.
    • Jam: This fig-orange jam is my favorite and what I recommend. See options below.
    • Dried fruit: Dried figs and dried cranberries.
    • Nuts: Chopped pecans, either raw or these homemade maple glazed pecans.
    • Orange: For the zest and juice.
    • Spices: A little cinnamon added to the topping adds subtle flavor.
    • Liqueur: Add a splash of orange liqueur such as Grand Marnier (optional).

    For Serving

    • Bread: 1-2 baguettes or gluten-free bread.
    • Crackers: Your favorite sturdy crackers to handle the gooey baked brie, and gluten-free crackers for your GF guests.
    • Fruit: Apple and pear slices.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Another good topping for baked brie is this cranberry orange sauce.

    Chef's tip on brie rind: Do you take off the top of the rind or leave it on? I leave the top rind on as it's totally edible, delicious, and holds the melty cheese together when it comes out of the oven. Without the top rind it oozes everywhere.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Brie is a buttery, mild-flavored cheese that stands up well to flavor variations.

    • Change up the dried fruit such as apricots, raisins, golden berries, or others.
    • Use different jams, such as raspberry preserves, strawberry jam, apricot jam, or other favorite jam.
    • Use sliced fresh figs instead of dried for the topping.
    • If you can't find a 1-pound brie wheel, use 2-8 ounce wheels and place them side by side.
    • No dried figs? Swap pitted dates.

    When fresh figs are available, make these goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto.

    Recipe Instructions

    Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. If you're out of oven space and want to use your air fryer, use the bake setting. To bake the cheese, use a small sheet pan, an oven-safe dish, or a small cast iron skillet. Skip the parchment for the cast iron option and serve baked brie right from the skillet.

    A round wheel of brie cheese on parchment paper on a baking sheet.
    Step 1: Unwrap and place brie on parchment paper piece on a baking sheet or in a baking dish. Place in the oven to bake.
    Dried cranberries, dried figs, nuts, and spices in a silver pot.
    Step 2: Add fig jam, orange juice, dried cranberries, dried figs, pecans, and cinnamon in a small pot.
    Fig jam topping with dried fruit and nuts simmering in a small pot
    Step 3: Simmer fig compote for 3-5 minutes until melted, hot, bubbly and thickened. It will thicken more as it cools.
    A round wheel of baked brie cheese with a fruit and nut topping, with apples, pears, and crostini.
    Step 4: When brie is baked and cooled for a few minutes, spoon fig compote over the top and serve.

    Serving and Storage

    Serve baked brie with jam individually or as part of a cheese board. Place the warm cheese on a plate or platter with slices of baguette, crackers, and fruit slices. Grapes are another nice addition. Garnishing the arrangement with herbs such as fresh rosemary or fresh thyme adds fragrance and green color.

    To keep apple and pear slices from turning brown, place slices in lemon water, then dry and arrange on your cheese display.

    Store leftover fig compote in an airtight container for a week.

    Chef's tip for leftover fig compote: Leftover fig compote is good over ice cream or frozen yogurt, or over oatmeal or creamy overnight oats. As pork and fruit are classic companions, the fig sauce can be served along side a pork roast or pork tenderloin.

    Warm brie cheese oozing out of the wheel on a platter topped with fruit and nut sauce.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of jam works best for baked brie?

    Any kind of fruit jam or preserves works well with baked brie. Choose seasonal flavors such as fig and cranberry in the fall, or raspberry and strawberry in spring. Blueberry and blackberry are good too, as well as orange preserves. Leftover cranberry sauce works great after Thanksgiving and Christmas.

    Do I need to remove the rind from the brie?

    The rind of brie is totally edible so it does not have to be removed. In fact it helps hold the warm cheese wheel together after baking. If you prefer to remove the rind you can. Trim the top with a sharp knife but leave the side and bottom rind.

    How do I prevent the brie from leaking out?

    Don't over-bake the brie to keep the cheese from running out of the rind. If it does, just enjoy it! It still tastes great even if a bit messy.

    More Appetizer Recipes

    For more appetizer and snack recipes for easy entertaining, check out these recipes or look at the appetizer recipes index page.

    • Mediterranean appetizer tray with baked feta (mezze platter).
      Baked Feta Cheese (Easy Mediterranean Appetizer)
    • Belgian endive leaves filled with herbed cream cheese on a white platter.
      Belgian Endive with Herbed Cream Cheese
    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make baked brie with jam, please comment and let me know. Id love to hear how it came out and I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A round wheel of baked brie cheese with a fruit and nut topping, with apples, pears, and crostini.

    Baked Brie with Jam

    Sally Cameron
    A decadent appetizer with gooey baked brie topped with a compote of fig jam, dried fruits, and nuts. Easy, elegant, and festive. Serve with baguette or apple and pear slices.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 370 kcal

    Equipment

    • small 2 quart pan
    • Parchment paper
    • Baking sheet

    Ingredients
      

    Baked Brie with Jam

    • 1 pound whole brie wheel or 2-8 ounce wheels
    • ½ cup pecans halves chopped
    • ½ cup fig-orange jam or preserves half of an 8 ounce jar
    • ½ cup dried cranberries
    • ¼ cup dried figs 3-4 dried figs, chopped
    • 1 medium orange zested and juiced
    • 1 tablespoon Grand Marnier or other orange liqueur optional
    • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

    For Serving

    • 2 large baguettes sliced on diagonal
    • 1 large apple cut into thin pieces
    • 1 large pear cut into thin pieces

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Remove brie from the refrigerator and allow to warm up on the counter for 1 hour. If you forget, just bake it longer and keep an eye on it so it does not melt too much.
    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Place the brie wheel on a square piece of parchment paper that extends beyond the brie, then on a baking sheet or in a baking dish. The parchment will make it easier to move the soft bake brie onto a serving plate.
      Bake brie uncovered for 20-25 minutes until the cheese feels soft when touched in the center. How long it bakes depends on how cold it was before baking.
    • While brie is baking, make the fig jam topping. In a small pan (2 quart) over medium low heat, place the fig jam, pecans, cranberries, figs, orange juice, and cinnamon. Add liqueur if using. Allow the jam topping to become melted and juicy, and cook for 3-5 minutes to thicken.
    • When the brie is ready, remove from the oven using the parchment to support, place on a serving platter and spoon the warm fig jam sauce over the top. To finish, add orange zest to the top. Serve with baguette and fruit slices.
      Note - Allow the baked brie to sit on the serving platter a few minutes before cutting into the wheel or the cheese may all ooze out.

    Notes

    Group size
    For a smaller group (4), do an 8-ounce brie wheel, or for a bigger group (16-20), do a 2-pound brie wheel. They area little harder to find but can sometimes be ordered from a good cheese department.
    Baking options
    If you're out of oven space and want to use your air fryer, use the bake setting. To bake the cheese, use a small sheet pan, an oven-safe dish, or a small cast iron skillet. Skip the parchment for the cast iron option and serve baked brie right from the skillet.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 370kcalCarbohydrates: 34gProtein: 14gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 57mgSodium: 409mgPotassium: 261mgFiber: 4gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 399IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 139mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)

    10/17/2024 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.

    I've tested this gluten-free cornbread over and over to ensure it's just right for you. The result? A moist cornbread with bold corn flavor and tender crumb, made without flour, so it's naturally gluten-free and enjoyable by everyone. Best of all, it's quick and easy to make in one bowl in 30 minutes, so skip the little packaged boxes and make homemade! Dairy-free option.

    A square piece of golden cornbread with a stack of pieces behind it on a wire rack.

    After baking batch after batch of corn bread, trying different corn and grain blends, sugar versus honey, milk versus buttermilk, different temperatures and pans, I've come up with an easy gluten-free cornbread recipe. It's not the cake-y style of cornbread, but more rustic and textured as there is no flour. It's my almost Southern cornbread.

    After all of the testing, I think this is the best cornbread, but that's for you to decide! If you bake a batch, please let me know what you think.

    Why You'll Love Gluten-Free Cornbread

    • Naturally gluten-free - no wheat flour or GF flour.
    • No sugar - Sweetened with honey.
    • Buttermilk for tenderness - but with a dairy-free option.
    • Nice and moist - instead of crumbly and dry.
    • Perfect side dish - for soup, salad, or in cornbread dressing for the holidays.

    What goes good with cornbread? Try this southwestern turkey chili recipe.

    Cornbread Ingredients

    Ingredients in prep bowls on a kitchen counter for making cornbread.
    • Gluten-free cornmeal: Use polenta or medium grind cornmeal. Buy certified gluten-free if needed (cornmeal is naturally GF). Don't buy corn flour, instant, or quick-cook polenta as it has been pre-cooked and dried, which means it absorbs liquids differently and will not behave the same way in a baked cornbread recipe.
    • Xanthan gum: Helps as a binder and provides structure.
    • Baking powder: Buy aluminum free and check the date on your package to see it's not expired.
    • Baking soda: To leaven or lighten the cornbread.
    • Milk: Low fat buttermilk (see sub below), or use buttermilk powder, reconstituted.
    • Eggs : Large un-cracked eggs.
    • Butter: I only use and buy unsalted butter to control the salt and recommend you do the same.
    • Sweetener: Honey replaces white sugar in this cornbread recipe, use a mild flavored honey such as clover, orange blossom, or acacia honey.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    For soups to accompany cornbread, try this Instant Pot lentil soup or check out the soup recipes index for lots of delicious options.

    Chef's tip: Buying cornmeal. I use a medium-grind, stone-ground yellow organic cornmeal. If organic isn't available, choose non-GMO, and if needed, buy certified gluten-free. Medium grind yields a softer, more cohesive crumb-ideal if you'll use this cornbread for cornbread dressing. Prefer a heartier texture? A coarse grind (polenta) makes a more rugged cornbread that's great on its own.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For dairy-free cornbread, use a dairy-free milk such as strained unsweetened almond milk or coconut milk, adding 1 ½ tablespoons of lemon juice or apple cider vinegar (to give it the acidity of buttermilk); let is stand for 5-10 minutes or until curdled (lumpy).
    • For dairy butter substitution use plant-based butter. Buy solid cubes, not the tub stuff.
    • For a sweeter cornbread, use a little more honey.
    • If you can't use xanthan gum, swap for an equal amount of guar gum or twice as much psyllium husk (not powder).
    • No buttermilk - Use buttermilk powder and water reconstituted, works great.

    Chef's Note: What is xanthan gum? Xanthan gum helps mimic the structure of gluten in baked goods where there is no wheat. Just a little is all that's needed. It is used in gluten-free baking to add volume, bind, and thicken. Alternatively use guar gum (it's less expensive). What about guar gum vs. xanthan gum in cornbread? Either works well because it's a quick bread, not a yeasted dough. You'll get a cohesive, sliceable texture either way.

    Xanthan gum gives a slightly more elastic, cohesive crumb - it's ideal for batters and baked goods that need structure, like quick breads and muffins.

    Guar gum gives a softer, lighter texture, slightly more tender but a touch more fragile. It's a good choice if you prefer a delicate crumb or are using more whole-grain flours.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Cornbread

    Tool note: I prefer baking in a light colored metal square pan versus a dark non-stick one or a cast iron skillet. A square of parchment in the bottom helps protect the bottom and make sure it came out of the pan easily or just use cooking spray. I've done both.

    A glass mixing bowl with cornmeal and dry ingredients with a silver whisk.
    Step 1: Add dry ingredients (cornmeal, baking powder and soda, gum, salt) to a large bowl and whisk together.
    Wet ingredients added to the bowl for golden cornbread batter.
    Step 2: Whisk the wet ingredients (milk, melted butter, honey, eggs) together in a large measuring cup then pour into the dry ingredients.
    Cornbread batter whisked together in a glass bowl with a whisk.
    Step 3: Whisk the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients until smooth.
    Cornbread batter poured into a square silver baking pan ready to bake.
    Step 4: Pour batter into the prepared baking pan (spray or parchment).
    A square loaf of golden brown cornbread on a wire cooling rack.
    Step 5: Bake until golden brown, the top feels firm, and a toothpick or cake tester comes out the the center with moist crumbs. Allow to cool for a few minutes then gently remove from the pan to cool on a wire rack.

    Serving Suggestions

    Gluten-free cornbread is nice with a bowl of soup or chili, alongside a salad, as a snack, or turned into cornbread stuffing for a Thanksgiving turkey, roast chicken, or holiday ham. What else is classic? See below.

    A piece of golden cornbread topped with maple butter on a white plate with fork.

    Homemade Maple Butter

    Smear a piece of this savory cornbread with homemade maple butter or honey butter. It's super easy to make in a minute! All you need is 2 sticks soft unsalted butter and some maple syrup or honey. Find the recipe for homemade maple butter here.

    Glass jar of yellow whipped maple butter with maple drizzle on top.

    Storing Cornbread 

    Leftover cornbread keeps on the counter well wrapped for 3 days or in the refrigerator. It also freezes well, for about 3 months, wrapped in plastic wrap then foil, then into a zip bag. Be sure to label and date. 

    Recipe FAQs

    Is cornmeal gluten-free?

    Yes, cornmeal is a naturally gluten-free grain, however if you follow a gluten-free lifestyle or are celiac, be sure to purchase a package that is certified gluten-free so there is no cross-contamination during packaging.

    Are cornmeal and polenta the same thing?

    They are almost the same. Cornmeal is usually more finely ground and polenta is a bit more of a coarse grind (as are grits). Cornmeal is often used for making cornbread and muffins (or cornmeal mush), and polenta for a traditional Italian savory side dish of the same name.

    Historically, they start with different kinds of corn; for American Southern grits or cornmeal, it's dent corn, for Italian polenta, it's flint corn. Today, they terms are often used interchangeably but there are differences.

    What kind of cornmeal should I use?

    Cornbread is best with a medium grind, stone-ground cornmeal. Using a fine ground cornmeal will yield a denser cornbread. Coarse grind yields a more granular texture. Use what the recipe calls for is the safest option for making good cornbread.

    What makes a cornbread recipe Southern?

    No flour or very little flour, recipes are usually all cornmeal, like this one. Also little to no sugar, and baking it in a cast iron pan or skillet for a more golden crust. Butter is a preferred fat, but sometimes a southern cook will use lard or bacon fat. I prefer butter.

    More Baking Recipes

    Love to bake? Try these easy quick breads and muffin recipes.

    • carrot cake muffins
      Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)
    • A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.
      Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe
    • Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.
      Easy Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread
    • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make gluten-free cornbread, please comment and let me know how you liked it, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.

    Gluten-free Cornbread (no flour)

    Sally Cameron
    With a golden color and tender crumb, this gluten-free cornbread has big corn flavor and can be enjoyed by anyone following a GF diet as it is naturally gluten-free. Its nice with a bowl of soup, chili, or a cup of tea for a snack. It's also wonderful in cornbread dressing for Thanksgiving and Christmas turkeys or with roast chicken during the year.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9
    Calories 169 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1 8x8 light colored metal baking pan
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    Dry ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups gluten-free cornmeal 8 ounces
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder 6 grams
    • 1 teaspoon xanthan gum 4 grams
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda 2 grams
    • ¾ teaspoon salt 5 grams

    Wet ingredients

    • 1 ¼ cups low fat buttermilk remember to shake it! Sub note below
    • 2 large eggs beaten
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted and cooled slightly
    • 2 tablespoons honey

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Mix Dry Ingredients

    • Gather up your ingredients and pre-heat the oven to 375 degrees. In a large bowl, add the cornmeal, xanthan gum, baking powder, baking soda and salt. Whisk to incorporate.

    Mix Wet Ingredients

    • Whisk in the buttermilk (or dairy-free substitution) until smooth, then add the eggs, melted butter and honey. Whisk until the batter is well mixed.

    Pout Batter, Bake and Cool

    • Cut a square of parchment to fit into the bottom of an 8″x8″ square light colored baking pan. Spray with nonstick spray. Pour batter into the pan. Bake for approximately 20-25 minutes (I have a convection oven) on the center rack, or until the cornbread is golden and a toothpick stuck in the center comes out clean. The cornbread will be pulling away from the sides of the pan slightly. Use your nose. When the cornbread is done you'll really smell it. Remove from the oven and turn out onto a cooling rack.
    • To serve, cut into squares or to make the cornbread dressing, see the post for cornbread stuffing on how to cut and dry the cornbread.

    Notes

    For no-dairy cornbread, substitute almond milk for the buttermilk, mixed with 1 ½ tablespoons of lemon juice or apple cider vinegar to give it the needed acidity to activate the leavening agents. Allow it to stand for 10 minutes until it curdles and turns lumpy (don't rush this step).
    If you can't use xanthan gum, swap for an equal amount of guar gum or twice as much psyllium husk (not powder).
    Buttermilk powder reconstituted with water works great as a buttermilk replacement and what I usually have on hand these days. Use 1 ¼ cups of water + ¼ cup powder and + 1 Tbsp. of the powder. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 169kcalCarbohydrates: 25gProtein: 5gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 432mgPotassium: 155mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 153IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 87mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Beet Salad with Feta

    11/11/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.

    Earthy roasted beets, salty feta cheese, fresh herbs, and buttery pine nuts come together with a simple vinaigrette in this richly colored beet salad with feta. Perfect for fall and winter, this healthy salad adds a burst of color and flavor to your table for a satisfying and hearty side dish. Roast fresh beets in foil ahead of time for easy prep, then simply chop, toss, and assemble when ready to serve. It goes together in minutes.

    A white bowl of jewel colored beet salad with feta cheese, pine nuts, and herbs.

    If you love beets, here's a terrific salad to add to your repertoire. To create a flavorful salad, don't boil beets or steam beets; roast them. Roasting beets brings out their natural sweetness. Preparing roasted beets in foil keeps them moist and is super easy. Dress roasted beet salad with feta with almost any vinaigrette from a simple balsamic vinaigrette or a classic French vinaigrette, to a citrusy blood orange or lemon vinaigrette.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Make roasted beets in foil ahead of time, or use store bought cooked beets.
    • Vary the dressings to change up the salad.
    • A great side dish for fall and winter. 

    Recipe Ingredients

    Red and gold beets, fresh herbs, nuts, and cheese for a salad on the counter.
    Red and gold beets, fresh herbs, nuts, and cheese for a salad on the counter.

    Beet Salad

    • Beets: To be roasted for the salad. Buy whole fresh raw beets of medium size with the beet greens on for the freshest beets. Use both red, gold, or both. 
    • Oil: Olive oil or avocado oil to drizzle over the beets for roasting.
    • Cheese: A good tangy, Greek feta cheese is terrific against earthy beets and worth seeking out.
    • Herbs: Fresh parsley, fresh dill, and fresh chives all compliment this beet salad adding good color and flavor. Fresh mint it nice too.
    • Nuts: Buttery pine nuts are a ice compliment but there are options below.

    Vinaigrette Salad Dressing

    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best choice, or avocado oil.
    • Vinegar: Balsamic vinegar and red wine vinegar are good options.
    • Mustard: A little Dijon mustard helps emulsify the dressing and add flavor.
    • Garlic: Optional, just a little for flavor if desired.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

    Chef's tip on feta cheese: I love good Greek feta cheese. It's tangy and salty from the brining process and has much more flavor than cow's milk feta because it's a blend of goat and sheep milks. Greek feta usually is in block form, not pre-crumbled. You can still use the crumbled regular feta if it's your preference. If you don't digest cow's milk cheeses well, you might find you do better with a blend like this.

    For another feta recipe, try mezze appetizer tray with baked feta. It's great for entertaining.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap goat cheese for the feta cheese.
    • Vary the vinaigrettes.
    • Change up the nuts. Crunchy walnuts are terrific as are these glazed maple pecans which add sweetness.
    • Use a flavored olive oil such as lemon, blood orange, or basil.
    • Use lemon juice or orange juice instead of vinegar for the vinaigrette.
    • Thin slices of red onion are a nice addition for more flavor and color.
    • Can't get fresh beets to roast? Try this beet salad with canned beets.

    Recipe Instructions

    For more photos and detailed directions for how to roast beets in foil please see the link.

    Roasted beets in foil with a thin metal skewer piercing one to show they are done.
    Step 1: Trim beet tops and roast beets in aluminum foil packets  at 400°F until tender throughout, 45-60 minutes. 
    A peeled red beet with a paring knife and a y-vegetable peeler.
    Step 2: After roasting, skin beets with a paring knife, vegetable peeler, or by rubbing off with paper towels. Chill beets.
    Red and gold beets being chopped on a black cutting board.
    Step 3: Chop beets into ½" - ¾" cubes.
    Vinaigrette whisked together in a glass bowl with a silver whisk.
    Step 4: Whisk together oil, vinegar, mustard, and salt in a small bowl (add finely chopped garlic if using).
    Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.
    Step 5: Combine beets with nuts, cheese, and herbs in large bowl and toss with vinaigrette. 

    Chef's tip on working with raw garlic. When you want to add fresh garlic to something like a vinaigrette, it must be very fine so you don't bite into a piece of raw garlic (really unpleasant). The best way to make the garlic fine is with a microplane zester. It disappears into the vinaigrette nicely. Otherwise, chop it fine then with the back of your knife smear it into a paste before adding.

    For another terrific fall and winter salad, try this fennel orange salad with orange vinaigrette.

    Serving Suggestions

    Toss the beets with the dressing by themselves, then add the cheese, nuts, and herbs. This way the beets get a good coating without turning the cheese pink.  

    These pairings allow the beet and feta salad to shine while creating a balanced, flavorful meal

    • Grilled or Roast Chicken: The mild flavor of chicken complements the boldness of beets and feta.
    • Salmon: Salmon's richness balances the fresh flavors in the salad.
    • Grain Bowls: Add quinoa to add texture and make it a more substantial, hearty meal.
    • Pasta with Olive Oil and Herbs: A simple pasta dish provides a nice contrast.
    • Serve beet salad with feta on salad greens like peppery arugula or red lettuce.

    Storage

    Roasted beets keep refrigerated in an airtight container for 3- days. I recommend that you store the beets, cheese, herbs, and nuts separately and combine when ready to eat.

    If you have leftover salad all combined and dressed, it will hold for a few days except but the cheese will probably turn pink because of the beets. It still tastes good but might need a little more vinaigrette.

    Recipe FAQs

    Should I use red or golden beets?

    Use either or both for beautiful color depending on availability at your grocery store.

    How do I keep the beets from staining everything?

    When working with red beets in particular, wear disposable kitchen gloves and don't work on a cutting board that will stain easily, such as a white one. For wood cutting boards, lightly wet them with water then wipe off before cutting beets on them. This helps protect the cutting board from staining. Then be sure to wash the cutting board right away. Golden beets are less staining.

    Can I make this salad ahead of time?

    Absolutely, it's a great make-ahead salad. Roast your beets, chop the herbs, crumble the cheese, toast nuts if desired, and make the vinaigrette but don't put it together yet. Assemble and dress just before serving. The components for beet salad with feta can be made several days ahead of time.

    Can I use the packaged steamed beets for beet salad?

    Yes, you can use the steamed and peeled vacuum sealed packages of beets, but roasting your own beets is easy, more flavorful, and can be done ahead of time. If you are short on time and need a quick shortcut, use the packaged option. Beets are always good! You'll need 3-8 ounce packages.

    More Complimentary Recipes

    Serve beet salad with feta alongside these crispy air fryer chicken cutlets or easy roast chicken breasts. Use the maple pecans for the nuts, they are fantastic.

    • A bowl of pasta noodles tossed with cottage cheese alfredo sauce, black pepper and parsley.
      Cottage Cheese Alfredo Sauce
    • A bowl of cream white bean dip tipped with olive oil, pepper, and herbs with colorful vegetables all around.
      Creamy White Bean Dip and Puree
    • Smoked spatchcock chicken on a wood cutting board with a carving knife.
      Smoked Spatchcock Chicken
    • Goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto drizzled with honey.
      Goat Cheese Crostini with Figs and Prosciutto

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this beet salad with feta, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.

    Beet Salad with Feta

    Sally Cameron
    A beautiful and healthy salad for fall and winter. Roast beets ahead of time then it's easy to assemble and enjoy. Using both red and gold beets creates more color but one color is good too. Be sure to wear disposable kitchen gloves for working with beets!
    3 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 285 kcal

    Equipment

    • Disposable kitchen gloves

    Ingredients
      

    To roast beets

    • 2 pounds raw beets, medium-sized red, gold, or both, tops on
    • 1-2 teaspoons olive oil or avocado oil
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Beet salad

    • 3 ounces feta cheese preferably Greek feta
    • 2 ounces pine nuts walnuts, or pecans
    • 1-2 tablespoons fresh chopped herbs parsley, dill, and/or mint

    Vinaigrette

    • 6 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons vinegar balsamic or red wine
    • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 small garlic clove zested or chopped very fine (optional)
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Roast beets

    • Pre-heat the oven to 400°F. Trim top greens leaving 1-inch of beet stem. Scrub beets clean and dry with paper towels.
    • Place a double layer of heavy foil large enough to wrap the beets all together on the counter. Place the beets in the center and drizzle with oil, sprinkle with salt. Roast beets until very tender, 45-60 minutes depending on size. The larger the beets the longer they take. When done you should be able to easily pierce through them with a thin metal skewer like a cake tester.
    • When beets are done, open packet and cool until you can handle them, then peel with a vegetable peeler, paring knife, or by rubbing with paper towels.

    Make the vinaigrette

    • While the beets are roasting, make the vinaigrette. Add all ingredients to a small bowl and whisk until smooth. Alternatively add to a jar with a tight lid and shake well.

    Make the beet salad

    • Chop the beets into approximately ¾" cubes and add to a medium bowl. Add two tablespoons of the vinaigrette and toss to coat the beets.
      Sprinkle in the crumbled cheese, nut, and chopped herbs. Add more vinaigrette if desired or serve extra on the side. Beet salad is ready to serve.
    • If making the salad ahead of time, ready the components and refrigerate separate. Combine and dress when ready to serve. Leftover beet salad lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. The cheese will turn pink! Add more dressing if needed.

    Notes

    • Swap goat cheese for the feta cheese.
    • Walnuts are terrific as are these glazed maple pecans.
    • Use a flavored olive oil such as lemon, blood orange, or basil.
    • Use lemon juice or orange juice instead of vinegar.
    • Thin slices of red onion are a nice addition.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 285kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 6gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gCholesterol: 13mgSodium: 381mgPotassium: 501mgFiber: 4gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 125IUVitamin C: 7mgCalcium: 96mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Lemon Mousse (Light and Airy)

    08/22/2011 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    easy lemon mousse

    Light, airy, and bursting with bright citrus flavor, this lemon mousse is a dreamy dessert for lemon lovers. It's made by folding together fluffy whipped egg whites, homemade lemon curd, and billowy whipped cream for a luscious, cloud-like texture. Refreshing, elegant, and make-ahead friendly, it's an easy lemon dessert that feels special enough for guests but simple enough for any spring or summer meal.

    A stemmed wine glass with softly whipped lemon mouse garnished with mint and a blackberry.

    For fifty years, Amelia's restaurant on Balboa Island was a beloved Southern California landmark. Although now closed, their famous lemon mousse inspired this recipe. Making lemon mousse is simpler than it sounds: cook a bright lemon curd, whip the egg whites and cream, then gently fold everything together. Chill it for a few hours and it's ready to serve as a light, elegant make-ahead dessert.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Lemon Mousse

    • Light and airy - Billowy whipped cream and whipped egg whites give this lemon mousse its cloud-like texture.
    • Bright lemon flavor - Homemade lemon curd gives it fresh, tangy citrus flavor without tasting heavy.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Chill it a few hours before serving, making it perfect for entertaining.
    • Elegant but easy - It looks and tastes special, but the steps are simple: cook, whip, fold, and chill.

    For another tasty dessert mouse, try this white chocolate mousse.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Eggs: large, un-cracked eggs.
    • Lemons: Fresh lemons, for the juice and zest.
    • Cream: Buy heavy whipping cream (not just whipping cream).
    • Sugar: Use either white sugar, superfine white sugar, natural unrefined sugar, or granular monk fruit/allulose blend ro reduce sugar.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Reduce the sugar - Replace half of the sugar with a monk fruit/allulose blend, or use all monk fruit blend if preferred. This keeps the mousse lighter in sugar while still tasting bright and balanced.
    • Orange mousse - Swap the lemon juice and zest for fresh orange juice and orange zest for a softer, sweeter citrus mousse.
    • Lime mousse - Use fresh lime juice and lime zest instead of lemon for a tangier variation.
    • Whipped cream garnish - For extra whipped cream on top, buy an additional ½ cup heavy cream and whip it separately with a little sugar or monk fruit blend.

    For another terrific mousse flavor, try this white chocolate mousse. It's divine!

    Chef's Note: Traditional lemon curd is usually finished with butter for richness and shine, but it's not needed here. The whipped cream adds richness, while the butter-free lemon custard keeps the mousse light, bright, and airy.

    How to Make Lemon Mousse

    Step 1: Make the lemon curd. Set up a double boiler. In a medium bowl, whip the egg yolks by hand with a whisk until thick and pale in color (and get a good arm workout).

    Step 2: Whisk in the sugar, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Place the bowl on the saucepan of barley simmering water (double boiler set-up) and cook yolks, whisking continually. In a few minutes it transforms into a thick light curd. You will know when it is ready when it coats the back of a spoon and you can draw your finger through it and the line stays.

    The back of a stainless steel spoon with a line through it showing lemon curd it ready.

    Step 3: Whip the egg whites until stiff and glossy. For hands-free preparation use a standing mixer with a wire whip attachment or a hand mixer with beaters. Clean the whip or beaters, then use them to whip the cream. See note below recipe.

    Whipped and blended mousse in a large stainless steel bowl with a whisk and spoon.

    Step 4: Lastly, whip your cream. The cream should be very cold, and use the clean beaters from whipping the egg whites.

    Step 5: Finish the mousse. Combine all three parts by gently folding together with a flexible spatula (or gently whisk together). Cover and chill your mousse until serving time.

    For another delicious lemon dessert, try this easy lemon posset. Just 3 ingredients!

    Serving and Storage

    Spoon lemon mousse into glasses and top with fresh berries. Stemmed wine glasses make a pretty presentation, but small dessert glasses or ramekins work too. Fresh raspberries are my favorite, but blueberries, strawberries, blackberries, or pomegranate seeds all pair beautifully with the bright lemon flavor.

    For an extra garnish, whip an additional ½ cup heavy cream with a little sugar or monk fruit blend, then spoon or pipe it on top just before serving.

    Lemon mousse can be made a few hours ahead, or up to 1 day ahead. Keep it covered and refrigerated until ready to serve.

    Fluffy light lemon mousse in a glass.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make lemon mousse without cream?

    For a dairy-free lemon mousse, try using stiffly whipped coconut cream or a non-dairy heavy cream alternative. I have not tested the current brands, so results may vary.

    Can I make lemon mousse ahead of time?

    Yes. Lemon mousse is best made a few hours ahead and can be made up to 1 day in advance. Keep it covered and refrigerated until ready to serve.

    How do I get a fluffy texture?

    Fold the lemon custard, whipped egg whites, and whipped cream together gently so you don't deflate the mousse. The goal is to keep as much air in the mixture as possible for a light, fluffy texture.

    Is lemon mousse the same as lemon curd?

    No. Lemon curd is a thick, tangy lemon custard usually made with egg yolks, lemon juice, sugar, and butter. Lemon mousse is lighter and fluffier because the lemon custard is folded with whipped egg whites and whipped cream.

    More Lemon Recipes

    Love lemon? Try this lemon almond cake, or lemon thyme brussels sprouts. Maybe you'd rather have lemon ice cream? It's divine.

    • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
      Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
    • Four lemon posset custard dessert cups topped with fresh berries.
      Easy Lemon Posset Recipe
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this lemon mousse, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers

    📖 Recipe

    Italian Lemon mousse | afoodcentriclife.com

    Lemon Mousse

    Sally Cameron
    This light lemony dessert recipe is always a hit. Garnish with a few fresh berries and mint leaves if desired. If you prefer a totally smooth mouse, omit the lemon zest but it adds lemon flavor. Lemon mousse can be made a day ahead and refrigerated until serving.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Whip cream and white 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 318 kcal

    Equipment

    • Hand mixer with beaters or standing mixer with whisk attachment

    Ingredients
      

    • 6 large eggs separated
    • ½ cup natural granulated sugar OR monk fruit blend, or ½ and ½
    • 2 large lemons zested, juiced and juice strained
    • 1 ¼ cups heavy cream well chilled

    Optional Garnishes

    • ½ cup fresh berries or more
    • fresh mint leaves
    • ½ cup whipped heavy cream lightly sweetened

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Separate the egg whites from the yolks while they are cold (it's a little easier) and set the whites aside to come to room temperature for better volume when you whip them.
    • Set up a double boiler. Place a large saucepan on the stove top with a few inches of water in it. Bring the water almost to a boil and turn down to simmer. Choose a stainless steel or glass bowl that will fit on top yet partially inside the pan taking care that the bottom of the bowl does not touch the hot water.
    • In the bowl, whip egg yolks with a whisk until thick and pale in color, then whisk in the sugar, 4 tablespoons of strained lemon juice and the lemon zest. Place the bowl on top of the saucepan of hot water and cook yolks, whisking until it sets, thickens, and forms a thick pudding or custard, 5-6 minutes. You will know when it it ready when the curd coats the back of a spoon. You'll be able to draw your finger through it and the line stays. Remove the bowl of lemon custard and set aside to cool. See note below for faster cooling
    • While curd is cooling, whip egg whites to stiff, glossy peaks with a standing mixer fitted with a whip attachment or a hand mixer with beaters. Next, whip the cream in a separate bowl.
      When custard is cool, gently combine all three parts: custard, whipped egg whites and whipped cream. Chill until serving time.

    To Serve

    • Serve in stemmed wine glasses or regular glasses topped with berries and garnished with mint. If you want to top with extra sweetened whipped cream, that's another option.

    Notes

    If you have a standing mixer with the whisk attachment, use it to whip both the whites and cream. Do the whites first and transfer them to a clean dry bowl. Fat from the cream prevents whites from whipping stiffly. Next, whip the cream, then add the cold lemon curd into the bowl and combine on low speed. Lastly add the white back in. 
    TO REDUCE SUGAR - use either all monk fruit blend or half sugar and half monk fruit.
    To cool the lemon curd quickly, set up an ice bath; a larger bowl of half ice and half cold water. 
    Egg safety note: This recipe uses whipped egg whites that are not cooked. Use clean, fresh, un-cracked eggs, and separate them carefully. For anyone pregnant, very young, elderly, or immune-compromised, use pasteurized eggs for extra peace of mind.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 318kcalCarbohydrates: 24gProtein: 8gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 254mgSodium: 91mgPotassium: 184mgFiber: 1gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 1014IUVitamin C: 26mgCalcium: 72mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe

    10/26/2024 by Sally Cameron 23 Comments

    A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.

    Creamy leek and mushroom soup is a cozy, flavorful bowl of comfort welcome in soup season. Earthy meaty mushrooms pair perfectly with the subtle sweetness of leeks to create a simple yet satisfying dish that's both creamy and light. Perfect for a chilly evening or a warm lunch, this one-pot soup can easily be made vegan, dairy-free, or with regular dairy to suit many dietary needs.

    Gray bowls of leek and mushroom soup with garlic toast and parsley.

    Making this leek and creamy mushroom soup is straightforward. Sauté the leeks and mushrooms until they're soft and fragrant, then simmer everything together with broth and herbs for added depth of flavor. For a creamy finish, blend part of the soup and stir in your choice of dairy cream or non-dairy cream. Mushrooms are good for you and all of the ingredients in this soup are immune system boosters, great for fall and winter.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Make mushroom leek soup dairy-free, vegan, or with regular dairy. 
    • With wonderful earthy flavors, it's delicious soup. 
    • If you like cream of mushroom soup, you'll like this too.

    For another recipe that uses leeks, try this braised cabbage with leeks and bacon. It's a terrific side dish.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Prep bowls of mushroom, leeks, cream, onion, lemon, herbs, and garlic for leek and mushroom soup.
    • Fresh mushrooms: Buy medium white mushrooms, brown mushrooms, or a combination. 
    • Butter: Unsalted dairy butter or vegan butter. 
    • Leek: Get a large one. Use the pale green and white portion of the leek, discarding the tough top dark green parts.
    • Onion: Use brown, white or yellow onions. 
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic is best.
    • Herbs: Fresh tarragon or fresh thyme leaves add flavor (I use both). Fresh parsley or a little green onion add nice color and garnish.   
    • Broth: Homemade chicken broth (chicken stock) or vegetable broth for vegetarian and vegan diners. If buying broth, look for low sodium and clean ingredients. 
    • Milk: Use heavy cream, half and half, or canned coconut milk for creamy soup as a non-dairy option. You don't taste the coconut at all!
    • Lemon juice: For a little flavor lift. 
    • Cornstarch: For optional thickening at the end. For thinner soup, omit.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities and all ingredients, salt and pepper.

    For broth options, make your own for the best soup. Here's an easy Instant Pot chicken broth recipe, my vegetable broth recipe, and turkey broth recipe for rich flavor.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For dried herbs instead of fresh, the swap is approximately ⅓-1/2 as much dried as fresh.
    • For the ground black pepper, try white pepper.
    • Use fun garnishes such as grated Parmesan, finely chopped Italian parsley, chopped crisp bacon, or crunchy croutons. 
    • If you can't do coconut milk, also try a plant-based heavy cream substitute. 
    • Use two tablespoons of olive oil as a sub for butter.
    • Incorporate wild mushrooms as part of your mix. 

    Chef's Tip: Buying mushrooms. Fresh mushrooms have firm caps that are closed underneath with no exposed gills. Mushrooms should not have brown spots, be slimy or withered. For this soup I use both white and brown (cremini) mushrooms, but you can use all of either one.

    Recipe Instructions

    Hands trimming mushrooms with a paring knife on a walnut cutting board.
    Step 1: With a paring knife, trim the stems of the mushroom.
    Hands holding mushrooms under a trickle of water to rinse them.
    Step 2: Briefly rinse mushrooms under a trickle of cold water rubbing them gently in your hands. Yes you can get them wet.
    A tray of washed brown and white mushrooms drying on paper towels.
    Step 3: As mushrooms are washed, lay them on a paper towel lined tray to dry.
    Hands showing thinly sliced mushrooms above the bowl of a food processor.
    Step 4: Thinly sliced mushrooms in a food processor about ⅛th inch thick. Alternatively slice them thin by hand.
    Chopped onions and leeks sautéing in a dutch oven.
    Step 5: Melt tablespoons butter in a heavy large pot. over medium heat. When hot, add chopped onions and leeks.
    Cooked onions and leeks with green herbs making a soup base.
    Step 6: When onions and leeks are soft, 5-7 minutes, add garlic and herbs. Cook 1 minute more.
    A pot full of raw sliced mushrooms cooking down for soup.
    Step 7: Add all of the mushrooms to the pot and stir from the bottom to mix the onions, leeks, and herbs.
    A heavy pot full of juicy cooking mushrooms as they give off their liquid.
    Step 8: Mushrooms give off liquid as they cook down, getting very juicy. Cook until moist of the liquid is gone, 20-22 minutes. 

    A gray dutch oven filled with finished  leek and mushrooms soup ready to eat.
    Step 8: Add the cream or coconut milk and simmer for a few minutes to blend flavors and heat through for serving. If you have extra fresh herbs chopped, add them near the end for more fresh flavor.

    Chef's tip: How to clean leeks properly. Chop off the dark green top and root end. Discard or save for making broth if desired. Slice the leek in half lengthwise and rinse under cold water to remove any dirt or sandy grit. Lay the leek halves flat, slice in half lengthwise, then thinly crosswise. Have extra leeks? Use them anywhere you would use onions and shallots; in soups, stews, casseroles, and more. Their subtle sweetness is delicious in recipes. 

    What else do I use leeks in? My gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing recipe, for another level of flavor.

    Serving and Storage

    Sometimes I give my soup a couple of pulses in a blender to refine it just a bit (optional). An immersion blender (stick blender) used right in the pot works too. Place the pot in the sink to reduce splattering. Serve it just as it is with more texture. Taste the soup and adjust the seasoning with salt and pepper if desired.

    For a little color, add fresh chopped parsley. Serve with a green salad for a nice balance with a fresh lemon vinaigrette. Crusty bread is a nice accompaniment.

    Leek and mushroom soup lasts in the refrigerator for up to four days and reheats nicely on the stovetop. Because of the dairy, it won't freeze well but try these options: 

    • Make the base of the soup without the dairy, freeze, then add cream or milk, or coconut milk upon reheating after thawing.
    • Freeze it with the dairy but reheat gently and slowly on the stovetop.
    • If it separates, puree it in a blender. 
    • Use heavy cream as with the higher fat content it will freeze better.
    A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I clean leeks properly?

    To properly clean leeks, chop off the top part where the stalks are dark green. This part is tougher and not used for cooking. You need only the white and pale green portion of the leek. Slice the leek longways in half and run it under cold water to dislodge any sand, grit, or dirt. Dry the leek and proceed with the recipe.

    How can I make the soup creamy without using cream?

    One great trick is to use canned coconut milk. It's a great replacement for cream in creamy soup, and surprisingly does not impart a coconut flavor. Use it straight from the can or dilute it just a little before adding to the soup.

    Can I make leek and mushroom soup vegan or vegetarian?

    To make leek and mushroom soup vegan or vegetarian, use coconut milk instead of cream or heavy cream, and replace chicken broth with vegetable broth. Also, to saute the vegetables, use either a plant-based butter or extra virgin olive oil.

    Can I add other vegetables to leek and mushroom soup?

    If you want to add more vegetable to leek and mushroom soup, try small diced cooked gold potatoes (as they hold their shape better than starchy russets), cooked carrot and celery.

    More Meaty Mushroom Recipes

    If your a mushroom lover, try steakhouse roasted mushrooms or stuffed portobello mushrooms with goat cheese, or mushroom duxelles - The classic French mixture of finely chopped mushrooms, herbs, garlic and shallots cooked in just a little butter. It's a terrific spread for crostini or crackers.

    • steakhouse roasted mushrooms
      Sauteed Mushrooms and Onions
    • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
      Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese
    • stuffed portobello mushrooms with goat cheese and tomatoes
      Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms
    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make leek and mushroom soup, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    Originally published 12-8-2013, updated 10-26-24.

    📖 Recipe

    A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.

    Leek and Mushroom Soup

    Sally Cameron
    Leek and mushroom soup is earthy and satisfying. Lemon gives this soup a lift of bright flavor and the fresh herbs provide aromatic flavor. A food processor makes quick work of thinly slicing the mushrooms, but you can slice them by hand. If you don't like tarragon, use thyme. For vegan soup use plant-based butter and vegetable broth.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Yield 2 quarts
    Calories 380 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor optional
    • 5 ½ quart Dutch oven or similar pot

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 pounds fresh mushrooms white, brown or combination
    • 2 tablespoons dairy butter or plant-based butter or extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 ½ cups thinly sliced leek 1 large leek, light part only
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion 1 medium onion
    • 3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped tarragon or thyme leaves or use both
    • 3 cups low sodium chicken or vegetable broth
    • 1 cup cream, half and half, or canned coconut milk
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon white pepper or black pepper
    • 1 small lemon, juiced
    • 1-2 tablespoons finely chopped Italian parsley optional garnish
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch for thickening, optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep Mushrooms

    • With a paring knife, trim mushrooms stems flush to the base. Discard stems. To clean mushrooms, cup 2-3 mushrooms in your hands and quickly run them under a trickle of cold water, rubbing the mushrooms gently between your hands. Place washed mushrooms on a clean kitchen towel or paper towel.  Slice mushrooms ⅛″ thick (3 mm) in a food processor with the slicing blade or by hand.

    Cook the Vegetables

    • In a large pot (5 quart) heat oil over medium low heat. Add the leek and onion and cook slowly until soft, stirring occasionally, 5-7 minutes. Add garlic and herbs, cook 1 more minute, stirring. Add mushrooms. Cook until mushrooms have given off their moisture and cooked down. Most of the liquid should be gone, 20-22 minutes.

    Finish the Soup

    • Add broth and cream or coconut milk. Heat through and serve hot. Add the lemon juice, then taste and season with additional salt and pepper if desired. If you want the soup a little smoother, pulse in a blender a few times before serving.  
      Note - If you have extra fresh herbs, I add a little more towards the end for a boost of herbal flavor.

    Notes

    This soup will keep refrigerated for 4- days, so make it ahead on the weekend and enjoy during the week. It's great for lunch or dinner. Just add a green salad.
    Nutritional information was calculated with regular dairy butter and cream. If you use plant-butter and coconut milk your numbers will be a little different. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2cupsCalories: 380kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 14gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 18gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 426mgPotassium: 1107mgFiber: 5gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 1696IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 102mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe

    10/06/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.

    Craving the perfect fall treat that's easy to make, gluten-free and dairy-free? This gluten-free pumpkin bread recipe has everything you need for delicious autumn baking. With a blend of warm spices, creamy pumpkin purée, and just the right amount of sweetness from brown sugar, it's moist, tender, and packed with cozy flavor. Best of all, you probably have everything in your pantry-so let's get baking!

    A sliced loaf of pumpkin bread on a wire cooling rack with a knife and coffee.

    Fall and baking just go together. So if you're craving something with pumpkin and spices, something easy to make and bake, here's the answer: gluten free pumpkin bread. The ingredients are simple and the results delicious.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Warm spices for fall flavor.
    • It's a "quick bread", easy to make with simple ingredients.
    • Perfect for breakfast or an afternoon snack.
    • Freezes for up to 3 months.
    • Serve it with this easy maple butter!

    Here's another easy gluten-free bread recipe, my Irish Soda Bread. It's not just for St. Patrick's Day!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for pumpkin bread in small prep bowls on a marble counter.
    • Pumpkin puree: Use pure canned pumpkin puree, not pumpkin pie filling.
    • Flour: I tested with King Arthur Measure for Measure GF flour. Other flours may work, I just haven't tried them. If your blend does not have xanthan gum, add ½ a teaspoon to your flour. It helps bind, thicken, and emulsify the batter.
    • Baking soda and powder: Both are needed as leavening agents for light fluffy structure.
    • Sugar: I went with all light brown sugar for this pumpkin bread, for more flavor and moisture than white sugar.
    • Eggs: Large eggs. I have not tested flax eggs for vegan pumpkin bread.
    • Oil: Use a healthy neutral oil.
    • Vanilla: Use good vanilla extract, the real stuff. Here is the best vanilla and my favorite brand. If you love vanilla, get some of their vanilla paste too.
    • Warm spices: Use ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, allspice, ground ginger, and a little ground cloves.

    For measurements please see the recipe card. You'll need a 9x5 light metal baking loaf pan.

    For another easy baking recipe, try this naturally gluten-free cornbread.

    Chef's Tip on Oil: I use Zero Acre Farms and it's terrific for all neutral cooking oil needs. It's fermented from sugarcane plants (isn't that cool?), full of monounsaturated fat, with a high smoke point and a clean taste. Don't use vegetable oil. It's industrially processed and terrible for you. Toss it. We have better options today. This is now my #2 oil along side olive oil.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For other oil options, use quality avocado oil or coconut oil melted, or expeller pressed grapeseed oil.
    • If you like nuts, add ½ cup - ¾ cup of finely chopped pecans or walnuts to the batter. Fold it in by hand before baking.
    • Swap a pumpkin spice blend for the individual spices.
    • For coconut sugar, substitute a cup of coconut sugar for the brown sugar, with one note. Coconut sugar looks and tastes a lot like brown sugar, but it doesn't hold as much moisture. This pumpkin bread is super moist, so it should work without becoming dry.

    For another homemade baked treat, try this golden gluten-free cornbread.

    How to Make Pumpkin Bread

    Flour and spices for pumpkin bread in a glass bowl.
    Step 1: Sift dry ingredients into a medium bowl. Whisk well to combine.
    Egg, oil, pumpkin puree, and brown sugar in a glass bowl.
    Step 2: Add eggs, oil, pumpkin, brown sugar, and vanilla to another bowl.
    The start of pumpkin batter after being mixed smooth.
    Step 3: With an electric hand mixer, beat wet ingredients until smooth.
    Unmixed dry ingredients and wet ingredients in a bowl for making pumpkin bread.
    Step 4: Add dry ingredients to the bowl.
    Finished pumpkin bread batter, smooth and creamy, ready to bake.
    Step 5: Beat the batter for 4 full minutes, until smooth and creamy.
    Pumpkin bread batter in a silver metal baking pan ready for the oven.
    Step 6: Pour the finished batter into a 9x5 light metal baking pan sprayed with cooking spray. Bake at 325°F for 1 hour. 
    A sliced loaf of pumpkin bread on a black wire cooling rack.
    Step 7: Remove pumpkin bread from the oven, run a thin spatula or knife around the inside edge, then gently turn the bread out onto a wire cooling rack. Cool completely before slicing.

    Gluten-Free Baking Tips

    This is why gluten-free pumpkin bread is done as it is. Many of these tips are also for general gluten-free baking.

    • Gluten-free flours need resting time to hydrate for best results. Don't skip this step.
    • Since there is no gluten to toughen the bread from beating, beat it well to aerate and help build structure.
    • More leavening is needed to lighten the batter and final result, so I use more baking soda and powder.
    • Gluten-free baking often requires a little lower temperature (25°F) and maybe a longer bake time.
    • Use a GF flour blend with xanthan gum to bind the ingredients, which is usually the role of gluten in wheat flour.

    Chef's Tip: Pumpkin and chocolate chips is a great combination, try this pumpkin cake with chocolate chips sweetened with maple syrup.

    Serving Suggestions

    Gluten-free pumpkin bread is terrific with a cup of coffee at breakfast or a cup of tea for an afternoon snack. Tuck a wrapped piece into a briefcase or lunch bag. It's a welcome treat pretty much anytime especially in fall.

    It's delicious plain but also nice dressed up for dessert with a dollop of softly whipped cream sweetened with a little sugar and vanilla extract. Also nice is a little cream cheese frosting. Serve it at room temperature or warm it up.

    How to Freeze Pumpkin Bread

    Be sure the pumpkin bread is completely cooled in a wire rack. Wrap and seal in plastic wrap, then in aluminum foil, and then into a freezer bag. This keeps the bread from drying out and avoids freezer burn.

    Be sure to label and date the package. Bread freezes well for up to 3 months. To thaw, place overnight in the refrigerator.

    A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.

    Recipe FAQs

    What gluten-free flour is best for pumpkin bread?

    The best gluten-free flour blend for pumpkin bread is the one that the recipe creator identifies in the recipe as tested with. There are many differences in gluten-free flour blends. Even when the ingredients look the same or similar, they may provide a different result.

    Choose a gluten-free flour blend that has xanthan gum, or add it. It helps with structure, acts as a binder (because gluten is a binder), and helps the moisture of the pumpkin bread batter so your pumpkin bread doesn't crumble. If your blend does not have xanthan gum, add a ¼ teaspoon per cup of flour. It's the secret weapon of GF baking.

    Can I substitute different sweeteners?

    Yes, but realize your result when experimenting might be a little different than the original recipe, plus any changes may effect baking times. That being said, you can generally swap coconut sugar, turbinado, demerara or sucanat (coarse brown raw sugars) for brown sugar. To swap maple syrup or agave syrup for sugar, use ⅔ as much.

    Another swap, to reduce sugar and carbs is to use either a white granulated monk fruit/allulose blend or the golden monk fruit. Try substituting half and half to start, and if you are happy with that, try all monk fruit.

    How should I store gluten-free pumpkin bread?

    Pumpkin bread can be stored on the kitchen counter well wrapped for 3 days. If you prefer, it can also be refrigerated. For freezing, wrap in plastic film, then sealed in foil, then into a freezer bag with the air pressed out for up to 3 months.

    More Pumpkin Recipes

    For more delicious fall recipes with pumpkin, try these pumpkin recipes. From soups to smoothies, pumpkin is for more than dessert!

    • black bean pumpkin soup
      Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
    • A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.
      Pumpkin Mousse (Easy No-Bake Dessert)
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • Pumpkin tart
      Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this pumpkin bread recipe, please comment and let me know how you liked it, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.

    Gluten-free Pumpkin Bread

    Sally Cameron
    With a tender crumb and warm spices, this pumpkin bread is gluten-free, dairy-free, and totally delicious. Great for an afternoon snack, at breakfast, even dessert.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Batter rest time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10
    Calories 242 kcal

    Equipment

    • Hand mixer
    • 9"x5" light metal baking loaf pan
    • Cooling rack

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups gluten-free flour blend I used KA Measure for Measure, see notes
    • 2 teaspoons baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoon baking powder aluminum free
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon allspice
    • ¼ teaspoon ground ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground clove

    Wet Ingredients

    • 1 cup canned pumpkin pure (not pie mix) 8.4 ounces
    • 3 large eggs
    • 1 cup light brown sugar, lightly packed 6 ounces
    • 1 ½ teaspoons real vanilla extract
    • ⅓ cup neutral flavored oil melted coconut oil or MCT oil

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 325°F. Spray a 9x5 light metal baking loaf pan.
    • Measure out all of the dry ingredients and sift into a medium bowl or onto parchment or waxed paper.
    • To a medium bowl add all of the wet ingredients. With an electric hand mixer whip until it's smooth and blended, about 1 minute.
    • Add the dry ingredients into the smooth wet batter, start on low and build to high speed beating for 4 minutes. Pour the batter into the prepared loaf pan and smooth it out with a spatula. Bake for 1 hour, until a cake tester or long thin skewer comes out clean with just a few moist crumbs.
    • Remove pan from the oven. Run a thin knife or thin metal spatula around the inside of the pan then gently turn the pumpkin bread out onto a wire cooling rack. Allow it to cool completely before slicing.
      Pumpkin bread lasts 3-4 days well wrapped on the counter or can be refrigerated. for freezing, after completely cooled, wrap in plastic wrap, then in aluminum foil, then place in a freezer zip bag for up to 3 months. Be sure to label and date the bag.

    Notes

    Flour
    I tested with King Arthur Measure for Measure gluten-free flour which includes xanthan gum. Other flours will likely work, I just have not tested all of the options. If you're blend does not include xanthan gum, add ½ a teaspoon to the dry mix. 
    If you use another flour blend, drop a comment in a let me know, until I get more tested.
    Spices
    If you do not have all of the spices, use at least cinnamon and whatever else you have, but all of the spices do provide great flavor. 
    Oil
    My oil preference for neutral oil is Zero Acre Farms. It's clean and healthy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 242kcalCarbohydrates: 37gProtein: 4gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.03gCholesterol: 56mgSodium: 283mgPotassium: 103mgFiber: 3gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 3895IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 65mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!



    Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon

    02/05/2018 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    roasted broccoli

    Broccoli is endlessly versatile: steam it, snack on it raw with dip, shred it for slaw, or purée it into soup. But roasted? That's where it turns sweet and nutty. This roasted broccoli with parmesan gets a bright finish of lemon zest and toasted pine nuts and comes together with minimal prep. It's a fast and tasty side that pairs with just about any main and it always gets eaten.

    A serving platter of green broccoli spears with parmesan cheees and lemon zest garnish.

    We eat broccoli a few times a week, and I love roasting vegetables-so roasted broccoli was a natural evolution. Toss florets with a little olive oil, kosher salt, black pepper, and a pinch of granulated garlic, then slide the pan into a hot oven for about 15 minutes. To serve, finish with lemon zest, toasted pine nuts, and a shower of Parmesan. Simple-and so good.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Roasted Broccoli

    • Quick & foolproof. Minimal prep; the oven does the work in about 15 minutes.
    • Actually crave-worthy veggies. Roasting turns broccoli sweet, nutty, and irresistible.
    • Parmesan finish. A salty, savory lift (for dairy-free, skip it or use a vegan Parm alternative).

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for roasted broccoli on a counter in glass prep bowls.
    • Broccoli - Choose crowns if possible. This is the top part, less stem and waste. Skip pre-cut bags; they're often small, uneven, and less fresh.
    • Lemon - Zest for brightness and color; serve with wedges for a fresh squeeze at the table.
    • Oil - Extra-virgin olive oil or avocado oil-just enough to lightly coat so the edges brown.
    • Garlic - Granulated garlic powder for even flavor without burning. (Not garlic salt.)
    • Parmesan - Finely grated for a salty, nutty finish. For dairy-free, skip or use a vegan-style Parmesan.
    • Nuts - Pine nuts bring buttery crunch; toast lightly in a dry skillet while the broccoli roasts or use raw.

    Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Cheese - Try Pecorino Romano (saltier, sharper).
    • Nuts - Try pistachios, walnuts, cashews, or slivered almonds. Toast briefly for extra flavor.
    • Heat: Add red pepper flakes or a pinch of Aleppo pepper before roasting.
    • Balsamic glaze - Add a light drizzle of balsamic glaze after roasting.
    • Crunch: Sprinkle with toasted breadcrumbs right before serving for extra texture.

    Looking for another terrific broccoli recipe? Try my Crunchy Broccoli Bacon Salad (for your bacon lovers)

    Chef's Tip: Temperature & Timing

    • Why 400°F: More forgiving than 425°F-browns without scorching, but you can go wtih 425°F, just keep an eye on the broccoli while roasting.
    • Floret size: For bite-size florets, roast 14-18 min at 400°F; larger needs longer.
    • Convection: Check 2-3 min earlier.
    • Parmesan: Add in the last 1-2 min or off-heat as a garnish.

    How To Roast Broccoli

    Pre-heat the oven to 400°F and ready a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment.

    Trimming a head of green broccoli into smaller florets for roasting.
    1. Wash broccoli and trim broccoli into florets. Be sure it is completely dry before roasting.
    Broccoli florets arranged flat on a baking tray for roasting.

    2. Toss florets with oi, garlic, salt, and pepper. Lay flat in a single layer on the baking tray.

    Roasted broccoli on a baking tray atop parchment paper.

    3. Roast until edges are lightly browned and stems are tender when pierced, about 15 minutes.

    A serving platter of green broccoli spears with parmesan cheees and lemon zest garnish.

    4. Arrange broccoli on a platter and sprinkle with the parmesan, lemon zest, and nuts to serve.

    Serving Suggestions For Roasted Broccoli

    • With proteins: Roast chicken, seared salmon, steak, or pork tenderloin.
    • Pasta toss: Combine with hot penne, a splash of pasta water, lemon zest, and Parmesan.
    • Grain bowl: Spoon over quinoa or farro; finish with olive oil and extra lemon.
    • Eggs & brunch: Fold into a frittata or serve alongside soft-scrambled eggs.

    Storage & Reheating

    • Fridge: Store in an airtight container up to 3 days.
    • Reheat: Sheet pan at 400°F for 5-7 minutes to re-crisp; add fresh lemon zest and a little Parm to revive.

    This is not ideal for freezing as the broccoli really softens.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I keep roasted broccoli from getting soggy?

    Dry florets thoroughly after washing, don't crowd the pan, and use enough heat. A preheated heavy sheet pan helps with browning.

    Should I use parchment or a bare sheet pan?

    Parchment = easy cleanup, good browning. Preheated bare pan = deepest browning, but watch closely and use a light film of spray oil to prevent sticking.

    Can I roast frozen broccoli (IQF)?

    Many sources say yes, and you can get passable results with high heat and careful technique. But fresh broccoli is best for roasting. IQF-individually quick-frozen-broccoli may release slightly less water than block-frozen, yet it still tends to steam as it heats, so browning is limited. For true roasted flavor and texture, use fresh; keep frozen for soups, casseroles, or a quick sauté. In a pinch, use the IQF broccoli spears right out of the freezer, and higher heat, 425°F - 450°F.

    More Green Veggie Recipes

    While many people don't think they are veggie lovers, these green veggies recipes might just change their mind. And be sure to check out the sides & veggies recipe index for more ideas.

    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • broccoli cabbage slaw
      Broccoli Slaw Recipe with Creamy Apple Cider Dressing
    • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
      Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this roasted broccoli with parmesan, please leave and comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you and appreciate your feedback, plus comments are good for others readers. And please add a star rating. Thanks!

    📖 Recipe

    roasted broccoli

    Roasted Broccoli with Lemon and Parmesan

    Sally Cameron
    Another great way to get more veggies onto your plate, roasted broccoli takes just minutes in the oven, top with pine nuts, lemon zest and Parmesan or non-dairy cheesy sprinkle. Broccoli browns are just broccoli heads with some of the thick stem already cut off. Many stores sell the top "crowns", but you can buy heads of broccoli as well. Parchment is available in rolls at most grocery stores next to foil, or online in pre-cut sheets (which are super handy).
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 203 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking sheet tray
    • Parchment

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 pounds broccoli crowns
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 lemon, zested
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • 3 tablespoon pine nuts
    • 2-3 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese or dairy free vegan cheese powder

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 400°F and line a half sheet baking pan with parchment. Trim broccoli into florets with some stem left. Slice larger pieces in half top to bottom. For trimming help, see photos in post. 
    • Toss florets with oil. Lay florets flat in a single layer and sprinkle evenly with garlic, pepper and salt. Roast for 15 minutes or until the edges are just browned and stems are tender when pierced with a sharp paring knife. Timing will depend on your oven. To serve, sprinkle with pine nuts, lemon zest and Parmesan.

    Notes

    Link to the dairy free cheesy sprinkle is here

    Nutrition

    Calories: 203kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 8gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 2mgSodium: 265mgPotassium: 776mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 1439IUVitamin C: 204mgCalcium: 133mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Turkey Broth Recipe

    11/18/2022 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

    Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.

    If you've never made homemade turkey broth, it's time you do! After years of making this recipe, I've perfected a method for the richest, most flavorful turkey broth recipe, starting with roasted turkey legs and thighs plus caramelized vegetables. This is truly amazing broth, slow-simmered for hours (or an Instant Pot option) until golden and deeply savory. It's the secret to incredible Thanksgiving gravy, soups, and sauces, with a depth of flavor no store-bought version can touch.

    Finished golden brown turkey broth.

    Is turkey stock the same as turkey broth? Basically, yes. Technically, broth is made with meaty turkey pieces, while stock is made mostly from bones. You'll also hear it called turkey bone broth or turkey stock-the terms are often used interchangeably. This recipe is a foundational flavor engine for your Thanksgiving gravy and for soups, stews, and risotto after.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love this Turkey Broth Recipe

    • Rich flavor, simple process - Roasting the turkey pieces and vegetables first creates a deeply flavored broth with almost no extra effort.
    • Two options - Stovetop or Instant Pot/pressure cooker, both mostly hands off.
    • Better than store-bought - The depth, aroma, and clean ingredients make this homemade broth unbeatable.
    • Make ahead and freeze - Break the process into two easy days, freeze portions for soups, sauces, and gravies later.

    To make a terrific turkey soup, use this recipe for chicken vegetable soup and swap leftover turkey and turkey broth.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Turkey broth ingredients.

    Instead of using a roasted turkey carcass, this recipe starts with fresh turkey parts-just like making chicken stock, but richer from roasting.

    • Turkey - Use a mix of legs, thighs, backs, or whatever your butcher has. Starting with meaty pieces gives the broth a richer body and golden color.
    • Onions - Brown, yellow, or sweet onions add savory depth. Avoid red onions, which can tint the broth. Onions form part of the classic flavor base for stocks and broths.
    • Carrots - Add natural sweetness and balance. Together with onion and celery, they form the classic French mirepoix base that builds flavor.
    • Celery ribs - Essential for aromatic, earthy flavor and balance in the broth.
    • Garlic (optional)- I add a whole head of garlic, sliced in half crosswise. It gently perfumes the broth with savory depth without making it taste "garlicky." You can skip it if you prefer a more neutral broth.
    • White wine or dry vermouth (optional) - Adds depth and subtle acidity to round out the flavors. Small airline size bottles are perfect to keep on hand for cooking.
    • Bay leaves - Leaves add a faint herbal note that brings everything together.
    • Parsley - Fresh flat-leaf (Italian) parsley adds brightness. Skip the dried.
    • Thyme - Fresh sprigs are best. Toss them in whole. A must-have herb for turkey broth.
    • Black peppercorns - Use whole peppercorns for gentle spice and rounded flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Why I Add Garlic - I tuck a whole head of garlic, sliced in half crosswise right through the papery skin, into the pan with the turkey parts and vegetables because it contributes roasted depth, sweetness, and "umami". Roasting the garlic mellows the sharp, raw garlic flavor and caramelizes its natural sugars, so it doesn't make the broth taste garlicky. Instead, it adds gentle sweetness, savory depth, and a rich, golden flavor-especially wonderful for turkey gravy and soups. If you prefer a very neutral broth, you can leave it out.

    Use turkey broth in this French Onion Soup, it's a great alternative to beef broth.

    Chef's Tip - Remove the Skin Before Roasting. Removing the skin before roasting gives you a cleaner, more refined turkey broth. It reduces grease from the start and leaves more room in the pot for meaty, collagen-rich pieces that build body and depth of flavor. You'll spend less time skimming, get a broth that freezes and reheats beautifully, and still achieve a rich golden color from the roasted meat and vegetables.

    How to Make Turkey Broth

    Start in the oven: Roasting is the secret step to a rich, deeply flavorful turkey broth. Roasting the turkey pieces, bones, and vegetables intensifies their natural flavor and gives the broth that beautiful golden-brown color. It's the difference between a good turkey broth and a truly great one.

    Because this recipe makes a large batch (perfect for freezing), the stovetop stockpot method is ideal. You'll get the best flavor and high yield by simmering slowly for several hours, rather than using a smaller pressure cooker or slow cooker.

    If you prefer to use an Instant Pot, it works great (I do it), see notes below for my turkey broth Instant Pot method.

    Raw turkey pieces and vegetables in pan.

    Step 1: Roast the turkey and vegetables

    Remove as much skin as possible from the turkey pieces. Distribute the turkey parts in a large roasting pan, then top with roughly chopped carrots, celery, onion, and a split head of garlic (unpeeled).

    Roast the turkey and vegetables for 1 hour at 375°F, then add 1 cup of dry white wine or dry white vermouth and roast for another 30 minutes. This is what you use to make the broth. Allow the roasted turkey and vegetables to cool, refrigerate until the next day to make the broth. Breaking up the process make it more manageable.

    Note - When I use my pressure cooker, I do it all in one day as it is faster (about 4 ½ hours total).

    Chef's tip: How much salt? None. Never add salt to your broth. Any broth. Add salt to the dish you're cooking with the broth. This gives you more control over the salt levels in a dish.

    Turkey and veggies after roasting.

    Step 2: Start the broth

    Early the next morning, place everything in a large 10-12 quart stock pot and cover with 5 quarts of cold water to start. Add bay leaves, fresh thyme, parsley, and black peppercorns to the pot. 

    Turn up the heat to get the pot to a simmer, then turn down to low for a low gentle bubble for 10-12 hours. As the broth cooks down and the water level drops, add boiling water from a tea kettle. Over a 12 hour period I add from 1-3 quarts to keep the water level up.

    Simmering broth on the stovetop.

    Cooking long and slow ensures extracting the most flavor and nutrition for fantastic turkey broth. The house will smell like roasting turkey and you will have a rich, golden brown broth, full of flavor.

    Chef's Tip: Simmer Don't Boil. Keep the broth at a gentle simmer, not a rolling boil. Boiling breaks up the proteins and vegetables, turning the broth cloudy and muddy in flavor. Slow simmering draws out flavor and keeps the clarity of the broth.

    Step 3: Strain and chill

    Strain the broth through a fine sieve into a large clean pot. Don't use plastic as it will slow cooling. Discard the spent bones, meat and vegetables.

    A pot of chilling broth in an ice bath.

    Quickly chill the strained broth by placing the pot in an ice water bath. Fill a sink half full with with cold water and ice. To speed cooling, place something under the pot like a trivet so cold water circulates underneath (the photo is chicken broth).

    Stir broth occasionally for faster cooling. You want the broth cooling as quickly as possible for food safety. Cool to 70°F before refrigerating. 

    Chef's tip: If you want to skip the roasting process you can still make great turkey broth. The flavors will not be as rich but it's still delicious.

    Step 4: Refrigerate and degrease

    Transfer the cold broth to large storage containers and cover to refrigerate overnight. I use these commercial kitchen style Cambro containers.

    In the morning, remove any fat that has solidified on top. Divide broth into containers, label and freeze for Thanksgiving and after. Homemade turkey broth will add big flavors to your Thanksgiving recipes.

    Chef's Tip: Make the broth Monday of Thanksgiving week and it will be good until Thursday. For longer use, freeze it. You can also make it a week or more ahead and freeze.

    Instant Pot Turkey Broth Method (Pressure Cooker)

    These days, I make turkey broth in the Instant Pot more often than I do on the stove. You won't get the bigger volume you can achieve with a large stockpot, but the pressure cooking environment extracts flavor exceptionally well. You get a deep, rich broth in a fraction of the time. It's faster, it's reliable, with great results.

    Roast the turkey parts and veggies as the directions outline. Use 5 pounds of turkey thighs (stripped of skin) plus a few less vegetables, and you'll get about 2 ½ quarts of rich, roasted turkey broth. Fill with water to the max line, lock on the lid, press the broth setting and set for 2 hours.

    After two hours, allow natural pressure release then strain and chill. It follows my Instant Pot chicken broth recipe but with turkey.

    How to Use Turkey Broth

    Roasted turkey broth is what i use to make my turkey gravy on Thanksgiving. It's also terrific in soups, such as this turkey and wild rice soup recipe, and this pumpkin risotto, just about anywhere you would use a good broth. For good sipping on a chilly day, remember to add a little salt for flavor.

    A white bowl of rich French onion soup with a cheesy crouton on top and sprinkle of fresh herbs.

    I use it to make my easy French onion soup. Look at the photo above and see how dark and rich the soup looks. That's not beef broth but homemade turkey broth! Another soup it's terrific in is my creamy black bean and pumpkin soup, plus it's a really simple soup to make.

    Black bean pumpkin soup with a sauce spider web on top.

    How to Freeze Turkey Broth

    If you don't plan to use your turkey broth within 4 days, portion and freeze it for later. Turkey broth freezes beautifully and keeps for up to 3 months.

    Best containers for freezing:
    I freeze all of my broths in Souper Cubes®. The ½-cup, 1-cup, and 2-cup Souper Cubes are ideal for portioning, thawing, and cooking. Glass Mason jars, or square glass containers with tight-fitting lids also work.

    To thaw frozen broth:

    1. Refrigerator method (best): Transfer containers to the refrigerator for 24 hours to thaw slowly.
    2. Cold-water method: Submerge sealed containers in a bowl of cold water until partially thawed, then heat gently on the stovetop over low heat.
    3. Microwave method: Defrost at 40% power or on the "manual defrost" setting until slushy, then transfer to a pot and finish thawing on low.

    ⚠️ Food Safety Tip: Never thaw broth on the counter at room temperature. It puts the broth in the temperature danger zone (41°F-135°F) where bacteria can grow rapidly.

    Recipe FAQs

    How can I use turkey broth?

    Use turkey broth in place of chicken broth for soups, stews, risotto and just about any where you need broth, being sure the flavor is complimentary.

    Should I add salt when making turkey broth?

    No. Keeping your broth unsalted makes it more versatile, so you can season precisely when using it in soups, sauces, or gravy later.

    Can I make turkey broth in the Instant Pot?

    Yes. Roast the turkey pieces and vegetables first for rich flavor, then transfer to your Instant Pot. Do this is two batches for a 6-quart Instant Pot. Add cold water to the max fill line and cook on High Pressure for 2 hours, followed by a natural release. Strain and cool before using or freezing. The longer cook time extracts deeper flavor and gelatin from the bones for a richer broth.

    Do I need to roast the turkey and vegetables first?

    Technically no, but roasting creates deeper flavor and color. The caramelization adds that rich golden brown hue and roasted aroma that separates homemade from store-bought broth.

    Why is my turkey broth cloudy?

    Cloudy broth usually means it boiled too hard. Always keep it at a gentle simmer and avoid stirring. Boiling emulsifies fat and proteins into the liquid, making it look cloudy. It's still delicious, just not clear.

    More Broth and Soups Recipes

    For more broth recipes, try my long-simmered chicken bone broth, Instant Pot chicken broth, or vegetable broth. And here's my terrific Thanksgiving stuffing recipe where you can use this turkey broth.

    • Instant pot chicken broth
      Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth
    • Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.
      Low Sodium Vegetable Broth
    • Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.
      Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)
    • Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.
      Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this turkey broth recipe, please comment and let me know. I appreciate hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers. And if you have any questions, comment or email me.

    📖 Recipe

    Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.

    Turkey Broth Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    There is no comparison to the flavor of homemade broth. Roast the turkey parts and vegetables, then make the broth. Make ahead and freeze for using Thanksgiving Day for gravy and afterwards for soup.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Simmering Time 10 hours hrs
    Total Time 12 hours hrs
    Course Broth, Soup, stock
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 Yield 3-4 quarts
    Calories 45 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large stainless steel roasting pan 14"x16"
    • OR a large heavy duty disposable aluminum pan works You may need to double them up for strength or place the pan on a rimmed baking sheet pan for support. Dispose of after use.
    • large stock pot (10-12 quart)

    Ingredients
      

    For the oven

    • 7 pounds turkey pieces thighs, necks, legs
    • 1 large onion brown, yellow, sweet, white
    • 3-4 large carrots
    • 3-4 celery ribs
    • 1 whole head garlic
    • 1 cup white wine or dry white vermouth or water

    For the stockpot

    • 3 bay leaves fresh or dry
    • ½ bunch Italian parsley
    • ½ bunch fresh thyme
    • 2 teaspoons whole black peppercorns
    • 5 quarts cold water
    • Boiling hot water to fill pot as needed

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Heat oven, prep turkey

    • Pre-heat oven to 375° (190 c) and get out a large roasting pan. Remove as much skin and any extra fat that you can from turkey pieces. Place pieces into the roasting pan in a single layer.

    Prep veggies and roast

    • Roughly chop onions, carrots and celery. Split garlic head horizontally through the center (no need to peel). Add vegetables and garlic to the roasting pan with the turkey. Place pan in the oven and roast for 1 hour. At the end of the hour, add the wine and roast another 30 minutes.

    Make the broth

    • Place roasted turkey and vegetables into a large stock pot (10-12 quarts). Add bay leaves, parsley, thyme, peppercorns and cold water. Bring the pot to just under a boil, turn down to low and barely simmer for 10-12 hours. You want the pot to be at a slow, gentle bubble to extract as much flavor as possible. When the water level drops about 2", add a little boiling water from a tea kettle, keeping the ingredients just under water.
    • At the end of 10-12 hours, remove all meat, vegetables, herbs and discard, as they will be spent. Drain broth through a fine sieve into a clean large pot or bowl. Place in a sink filled with ice and cold water to cool quickly. Place pot on a trivet or small rack to help water circulation under the pot for faster cooling. Stir occasionally. You want the broth to cool as quickly as possible for food safety.
    • When stock is cool, below 70°, cover and place in the refrigerator. The next morning, remove any fat solidified on top, place into containers, label and freeze.

    Notes

    To thaw broth, place containers from the freezer into the refrigerator for 24 hours and thaw slowly. Alternatively, place frozen containers in a sink with cool water to start the thaw, then place semi-frozen broth into a pot and heat over low until liquid, or use the microwave at low power.
    Do not leave broth out on the counter to thaw at room temperature as this is not food safe.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 45kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 9gFat: 1.5gCholesterol: 9.6mgSodium: 84mgPotassium: 211mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gCalcium: 29mgIron: 0.5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Caesar Pasta Salad with Chicken

    08/23/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.

    Combine two beloved classics-Chicken Caesar Salad and Pasta Salad-into one irresistible dish: Caesar Pasta Salad! Crisp romaine lettuce, tender chicken, and perfectly cooked pasta all tossed in a creamy Caesar dressing. Add crunchy croutons, and a generous sprinkle of salty Parmesan cheese, and you've got a salad that's sure to become a new favorite. Make it gluten-free or not, even vegetarian if desired. Plus, there are three ways to make this salad!

    A large shallow bowl of caesar pasta salad with romaine, curly pasta, croutons, chicken and dressing in a small pitcher.

    This caesar pasta salad is perfect for gatherings, meal prep, or any time you crave a fresh, satisfying meal. It's especially nice in hot weather when cool foods are not just welcome but needed. Use grilled chicken or rotisserie chicken, homemade caesar dressing or bottled, and store or homemade croutons.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Three ways: Make all of the parts homemade, some homemade, or buy them all.
    • Make ahead of time and combine to serve.
    • Use leftover grilled chicken or rotisserie chicken
    • Make it with gluten-free pasta or use regular pasta.
    • Make homemade croutons or use store-bought.
    • It's a great main dish as it's got everything.

    For another terrific pasta salad, try this lemony Mediterranean pasta salad.

    Recipe Ingredients

    I've listed just the Caesar pasta salad and dressing ingredients, but have recipe links to the homemade gluten-free croutons and grilled chicken if you want to make it all as I do.

    For the Caesar Pasta Salad

    • Chicken: Use either grilled chicken breast or rotisserie chicken, whatever cooked chicken is easiest.
    • Lettuce: Crisp romaine leaves are the best for a Caesar salad. Get whole heads and tear or chop yourself.
    • Caesar dressing: You can buy bottled but homemade take just a minute in a blender with only healthy ingredients (and it's gluten-free).
    • Pasta: Choose a short pasta shape such as rotini pasta, bow-tie pasta, penne pasta or elbow pasta. Use either gluten-free pasta or regular wheat pasta.
    • Croutons: Once again, either store bought for speed and ease or use my homemade croutons recipe. They are sooo good.
    • Parmesan cheese: For Caesar dressing if you are making homemade, plus more for over the top as a garnish.

    For Homemade Caesar Dressing

    What make a good Caesar salad? The dressing. This creamy homemade Caesar dressing is restaurant quality, made in a minute in the blender.

    Caesar salad dressing ingredients in small bowls.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best but avocado oil will work.
    • Lemon: The acidity in fresh lemon juice lifts the flavor.
    • Egg: You only need the yolk, emulsifies the dressing.
    • Mustard: Go with Dijon mustard for flavor plus it's a natural emulsifier in dressings.
    • Anchovy: Anchovy paste in the tube adds a subtle depth of flavor without being fishy, but it is optional. Trust me, I can't stand anchovy but it's good in this dressing.
    • Garlic: Fresh is best, finely zest.
    • Vinegar: Balsamic vinegar adds richness and depth.
    • Worcestershire sauce: A must! Adds a savory, umami boost to Caesar dressing.
    • Parmesan cheese: Adds a salty, savory flavor, or tryn Mexican Cotija.

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements, plus salt and pepper.

    If you love creamy dressings, try this creamy ginger vinaigrette.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For a vegetarian Caesar pasta salad, swap the chicken with hard boiled eggs (1-2 per person), halved and served on top of the salad. Another good add is chickpeas (garbanzo beans).
    • Toasted pepitas make a fantastic extra garnish and take minutes to make.
    • Add cooked or grilled corn kernels for more texture and flavor.
    • For more color, add a chopped red onion, halved grape tomatoes, fresh cherry tomatoes, or slivers of colorful bell peppers.

    How to Make Caesar Pasta Salad

    This is a salad of components: Romaine lettuce, leftover cooked chicken, Caesar dressing, pasta, and croutons. You can make Caesar pasta salad 3 ways:

    • All homemade, and can be done ahead.
    • Partially homemade.
    • All store purchased, just assembly.

    My photos are for if you are making Caesar pasta salad with all homemade components. Make the Caesar dressing the day of serving as it has a raw egg yolk. It takes a minute in the blender.

    Homemade components: gluten-free croutons recipe, Caesar dressing recipe. For chicken, I used leftover boneless skinless grilled chicken. Make the marinade in the blender, add the chicken, and grill the next day, then chill and chop.

    Bread cubes tossed with butter and olive oil in a glass bowl.
    Step 1: Start the croutons or make them ahead of time, if making homemade.
    Pouring dry pasta into a large pot of boiling water to cook.
    Step 2: Boil pasta in a large pot of salted water, then drain, rinse with cold water, dry and chill.
    Chopping romaine leaves for a salad on a white cutting board.
    Step 3: Chop the romaine leaves and wash, then dry well.
    A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
    Step 4: Make the Caesar dressing in the blender.
    Grilled chicken breasts on the grill, with nice grill marks.
    Step 5: Grill chicken a day or two ahead, or use leftover or rotisserie chicken. Cool and chop.
    A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.
    Step 6: Once all of the components are ready, toss to serve in a large mixing bowl with extra dressing on the side.

    Serving Suggestions

    When you add the chicken to this Caesar pasta salad it's truly a complete meal. Serve it with extra dressing, extra Parmesan, and extra croutons (because they are fantastic), so everyone can customize if desired. For more of a side salad, skip the chicken.

    You can also skip the croutons and serve with crusty garlic bread.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of pasta works best for Caesar pasta salad?

    Short shaped pastas work the best for a Caesar pasta salad. Look for rotini, corkscrew pasta (cavatappi), elbow macaroni, fusilli, and farfalle (bowtie pasta). Penne or mini penne may also work.

    How do I keep the pasta from getting mushy?

    Cook the pasta until just done, called al dente. Taste a piece to test. Don't overcook it. Then drain and rinse the pasta under cold running water to stop the cooking process. Drain well and lay the past out on a clean kitchen towel to dry before chilling in the refrigerating (if making ahead) or using in the salad.

    Can I make Caesar pasta salad ahead of time?

    Yes, this is a great make ahead salad. Ready each component ahead of time and refrigerate, then toss together and dress at serving time for the best texture.

    More Great Salads and Pasta Recipes

    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing
    • Chicken blueberry salad
      Blueberry Vinaigrette
    • A white bowl of sun-dried tomato pesto pasta with basil and parmesan garnish.
      Creamy Sun-Dried Tomato Pesto Pasta
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Caesar salad dressing, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A Caesar pasta salad ready to serve with salad servers and dressing in a marble counter.

    Caesar Pasta Salad

    Sally Cameron
    This Caesar pasta salad is a terrific main course salad. Make it gluten-free if desired, and notes for vegetarian diners. Make your own homemade caesar dressing or use bottled. Serve extra croutons, Parmesan, and dressing on the side. See links at the end for homemade chicken and croutons.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Assemble time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Entree, Main Course, Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 628 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot to cook pasta
    • blender if making homemade caesar dressing
    • Baking sheet for croutons
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    Caesar Salad

    • 12 ounces hearts of romaine 3 large heads in a package
    • 4-6 ounces pasta gluten-free or regular, cooked
    • 1 pound chopped cooked chicken grilled or rotisserie
    • 1 cup croutons gluten-free or regular
    • 4 tablespoons grated parmesan cheese

    Caesar Dressing (yield ¾ cup)

    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or more to taste
    • 1 large egg yolk
    • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
    • ½ teaspoon anchovy paste in a tube optional
    • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • ½ teaspoon balsamic vinegar
    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons finely grated Parmesan cheese or Mexican Cotija cheese
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches white pepper or black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Homemade Caesar dressing

    • Place the lemon juice egg yolk, mustard, anchovy paste, garlic, vinegar, and Worcestershire sauce in a blender and puree on lowest speed for a few seconds to blend.
    • With the blender top on and the center top removed, slowly stream the oil into the blender until dressing is creamy and emulsified. Increase the speed as you go. Add the Parmesan and puree until creamy. If the dressing gets too thick, add either a little more lemon juice or warm water to make it the consistency you prefer.
      Refrigerate the dressing until serving time in an airtight container. Due to the egg yolk, the dressing lasts 2-3 days max in the refrigerator. Be sure to label and date.

    Make the salad

    • Pasta: Cook the pasta in a large pot of boiling sated water, then drain and rinse with cold water to stop the cooking process. Drain again and allow pasta to dry on a clean kitchen towel or baking sheet. Refrigerate until serving time so it's cold.
      In the mean time work on the other parts of the salad.
    • Lettuce: Slice the hearts of romaine crosswise into 1-inch strips. Separate the leaves and wash (if not pre-washed), then dry well and chill. Using a salad spinner makes it easy.
    • Chicken: Cube or shred the cooked chicken.

    Serving the salad

    • Add the romaine, chicken, and pasta to a large salad bowl and toss with a few tablespoons of Caesar dressing. Top with the croutons and Parmesan cheese. Serve extra dressing on the side along with more cheese and croutons.

    Notes

    For the chicken:
    For the grilled chicken that I use, make this super easy blender lemon chicken marinade, marinate boneless, skinless breasts for an hour or overnight, then grill for 12 minutes. 
    For the croutons:
    Here's my recipe for gluten-free croutons.
    To make this vegetarian:
    Swap the chicken for hard boiled eggs and/or chickpeas (garbanzo beans. Use canned beans, rinsed and drained well. 
    Nutrition calculation just for the dressing:
    Serving is 2 tablespoons. 
    calories: 179kcal, carbs 1 g, protein 1 g, fat 19g, cholesterol 32mg, sodium 54mg, potassium 22mg, fiber 0, sugar 0. For all numbers please see the dressing recipe card. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 628kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 44gFat: 35gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 22gCholesterol: 148mgSodium: 502mgPotassium: 619mgFiber: 3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 7558IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 142mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Gluten-Free Crepes (Sweet or Savory)

    08/14/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

    Easy gluten-free crepes bring all the magic of classic French crepes to your kitchen. These thin, delicate pancakes are simple to make and work with both sweet and savory fillings or no filling at all. They taste every bit as delicious as traditional crepes and freeze beautifully, so they're perfect for special breakfasts, quick desserts, or light lunches. A dairy-free option is included too.

    Plates of golden crepes topped with blueberries, powdered sugar, and whipped cream.

    While I fell in love with crepes at the street stands of Paris, I still remember my first Crepe Suzette at a tiny French restaurant in San Diego. I was instantly hooked. After going gluten-free, I updated my recipe so we could still enjoy them. These gluten-free crepes are easy, flexible, and made with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Gluten-Free Crepes Recipe Highlights

    • Sweet or savory - Serve gluten-free crepes for breakfast, lunch, dinner, or dessert.
    • Make ahead friendly - Refrigerate or freeze the crepes for later.
    • Flexible for everyone - Not gluten-free? Use all-purpose flour or white whole wheat flour.
    • Dairy-free option - Use unsweetened oat milk and dairy-free butter to grease the pan while cooking.
    • Easy to serve - Fill and roll, or simply fold and stack crepes with your favorite fillings.

    For another gluten-free breakfast recipe try these golden crisp waffles.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Flour, eggs, milk and ingredients to make crepes on a counter.
    • Flour - Use a gluten-free flour blend but you can make them with all purpose flour (wheat flour) as well. The gluten-free ones are so good no one would know they are gluten-free crepes. Seriously.
    • Milk - I use what I have in the fridge, usually low fat but whole milk is good too.
    • Eggs - Large eggs, clean, un-cracked.
    • Butter - I use unsalted butter for gluten-free crepes, especially sweet crepes.
    • Sugar - To reduce sugar, I usually use monk fruit, but you can use regular or superfine sugar. Use sweetener only for sweet, dessert crepes. Omit for savory crepes.
    • Flavorings - For dessert crepes, a little vanilla extract is nice. For savory crepes, omit.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

    For another style of pancake, try these hearty buckwheat pancakes, entirely gluten-free.

    Chef's notes on flours: I've made gluten-free crepes with both King Arthur Gluten-Free Measure for Measure flour (with xanthan gum) and King Arthur Gluten-Free All-Purpose flour (without). Both work well. The all-purpose flour without xanthan gum may make a slightly more tender crepe. Similar gluten-free flour blends should work too. I have not tested this recipe with cornstarch-heavy blends such as Cup4Cup.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Almond flavor - For dessert crepes, try almond extract instead of vanilla extract.
    • Citrus twist - Make lemon crepes with fresh lemon zest and a little lemon juice, or add a touch of orange flower water.
    • Dairy-free option - For dairy-free crepes, use plant-based butter and dairy-free milk. Unsweetened oat milk is my recommendation, though almond milk should work too.
    • Savory crepes - Omit the vanilla and sugar for savory fillings.

    Tools for Making Crepes

    None of these tools for making crepes are expensive, plus they are versatile and good for many uses beyond crepes. This is what I use for making crepes, but I've listed alternatives.

    • A crepe pan: The best pan is a 10" non-stick crepe pan. The good news is they are inexpensive, and not only usable for crepes but for eggs and other foods. The crêpe pan I use is light weight and allows you to handle and swirl the batter to cover the pan bottom to make a crepe. You can also use a 10" nonstick skillet instead of a special crepe pan. The benefit of a real crepe pan is the sides are low, so it's easier to turn the crepes.
    • A mini off-set spatula: This cheap little tool is something I reach for often, not just for crepes. If you don't want to bother, use a fork. You need something to gently life the edges of the crepe while it cooks to peak underneath, then grab the edges to flip it.
    • Blender: While you can make gluten-free crepe batter by hand in a medium bowl with a whisk, a good blender does a better job. If making crepe batter by hand, whisk it very well until smooth and if needed, strain out any lumps. 
    • Fine sieve: A fine sieve is a basic tool everyone should have in the kitchen. Flour for crepes must be sifted to lighten and aerate the batter and remove any lumps. You can also use an old fashioned sifter. If you like to bake, you'll love having a sifter. It's faster than using a sieve, but both work. Find them at kitchen stores, Walmart, online, etc.
    • Parchment paper: I buy handy 9" parchment rounds to layer finished and cooled crepes when making them ahead. You can use parchment squares or wax paper as well and trim them to fit. The rounds fit perfect, and you can use them to line cake pans and springform pans.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Crepes

    Note: I've made gluten-free crepes with ¼ cup of batter for very thin crepes, and with ⅓ cup, for crepes that are just a little sturdier (and still delicious). That's only 1 tablespoon difference, both work.

    Sifted flour on  parchment paper with a sifter and sieve.
    Step 1: Sift the flour to lighten it and remove any lumps.
    Flour, eggs, milk, vanilla in a blender container to make crepe batter.
    Step 2: Add milk, flour, eggs, vanilla, and sugar, and salt to the blender.
    Pale yellow batter inside a blender container.
    Step 3: Blend on low speed blend until smooth, about 45 seconds. Crepe batter will be thin and will thicken a bit upon resting and refrigerating.
    A Pyrex glass measuring container with light yellow batter covered in plastic.
    Step 4: Pour the batter into a container, cover and let the batter rest refrigerated for 30 minutes(or longer). Can be made ahead. Melt butter when ready to make crepes.

    Chef's tip: Why rest the batter? For better results. So the flour hydrates, any bubbles dissipate for a smoother batter, and for more delicate crepes. The flavor is also better. Rest 30 minutes. I've made batter up to 2 days in advance then whisked well to reincorporate. I also get it out of the refrigerate and let it stand to get the chill off, until the temperature is closer to room temperature.

    Yellow batter in a crepe pan for making crepes, finished crepes on a plate.
    Step 5: Place pan over medium heat. Brush with a small amount of melted butter. Pour scant ⅓ cup of batter and immediately turn and swirl the pan in a circular motion until the batter coats the bottom of the pan entirely. Cook 60 seconds on first side. Crepe should be set and edges done.
    A golden crepe in a black shallow pan finished cooking.
    Step 6: Lift the edge of the crepe and with your fingers gently turn it over to the second side. Shake the pan a bit to re-center. Cook another 45 seconds. Turn the heat down a bit if needed so they don't brown too quickly.
    A stack of golden crepe between rounds of parchment paper on a plate.
    Step 7: As each crepe is completed, slide it out of the pan onto a flat plate. When done, layer them between parchment paper or wax paper.

    When crepes are cool, wrap in plastic film then into a zip-stye bag. Refrigerate for 3-4 days or freeze up to 4 months (remember to label and date).

    Chef's tip: Frozen crepes are fragile. Place as many gluten-free crepes as you need in the refrigerator overnight to thaw and handle with care so they don't break. Allow crepes to thaw completely before unwrapping and separating to prevent tearing. The parchment layers really help with handling.

    Serving Suggestions

    In France, one of the simplest and most beloved ways to enjoy crepes is crêpe au sucre, served with melted butter and a sprinkle of sugar. Crepes filled with Nutella are another favorite. At home, an easy way to serve gluten-free crepes is with good jam, fresh fruit, and a light dusting of powdered sugar or powdered monk fruit for a no-sugar option. Find more ideas below.

    Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

    Sweet Crepe Ideas

    Find your favorite fillings and toppings. Fill crepes with lightly sweetened vanilla whipped cream, also called Chantilly cream, or whipped ricotta sweetened with a little honey. Another option is pureed cottage cheese, blended smooth in a food processor and sweetened however you like.

    For breakfast, a drizzle of maple syrup is delicious. For dessert, try strawberry coulis, jam, fresh berries, or a little whipped cream. I usually keep it simple with jam, berries, or whipped cream, or all three if I'm serving crepes to friends for dessert.

    For a topping that works well for both breakfast and dessert, try this cinnamon apple compote or blueberry compote.

    Savory Crepe Ideas

    For breakfast, fill savory crepes with softly scrambled eggs and cheese. For lunch or dinner, try a creamy chicken, mushroom, or creamed spinach filling.

    A little French restaurant near our house serves buckwheat crepes filled with slices of ham, then topped with a poached egg and cheese. Always a treat.

    Savory vegetables make a great filling too, like this roasted vegetable ratatouille, another terrific French-inspired dish.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I make crepe batter smooth and lump-free?

    The best way to achieve lump free crepe batter is with a blender on low speed. Without a blender, whisk well in a bowl until smooth and if lumps persist, strain the batter through a fine sieve before using. Another tip, strain your flour before mixing.

    Should I let the crepe batter rest before cooking?

    After mixing, rest crepe batter in the refrigerator for 30-60 minutes so the flour has a chance to hydrate. This is especially important for gluten-free crepes.

    What type of pan is best for making crepes?

    While I've used carbon steel pans, a non-stick pan frying pan will do. Best is a non-stick crepe pan for making crepes. They are shallow, so the crepes are easy to turn, and not a heavy pan, so they are easy to swirl the batter and handle. The good thing is that non-stick crepe pans are inexpensive and worth buying if you love crepes. They make making crepes easy, so you can enjoy them more often.

    Can I make crepes ahead of time?

    You can definitely make crepes ahead of time. Cool crepes then stack them between pieces of parchment paper or wax paper and refrigerate until serving time.

    To freeze, just wrap the stack in plastic film and then in a zip-style bag. To freeze, wrap the stack of crepe in layers of plastic wrap then into a freezer-safe bag. Label and date for up to two months. To thaw, place them in the refrigerator overnight. When thawed, gently remove the layers an fill as desire with sweet or savory options.

    More Breakfast and Brunch Recipes

    Looking for more breakfast and brunch inspiration? Here are a few reader-favorite recipes to add to your table, whether you're planning a cozy weekend breakfast or a special brunch spread.

    • A golden cinnamon muffin with dripping glaze on a muffin paper.
      Bakery Style Cinnamon Muffins (Gluten-Free)
    • A golden cheesy frittata in a cast iron skillet sprinkled with parmesan and chopped parsley.
      Ham and Cheese Frittata
    • Dutch baby oven pancakes
      Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
    • Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.
      The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe

    If You Make Gluten-Free Crepes

    Let me know if you made these gluten-free crepes by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Two golden folded crepes on a white plate with blueberry jam and whipped cream.

    Gluten-free Crepes

    Sally Cameron
    The classic thin French pancakes called crepes, made gluten-free (or with all purpose wheat flour). Delicious for a sweet dessert or for a more savory breakfast, lunch or dinner. Easy and fun to make, crepes freeze so you can make them ahead to use anytime.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Total Time 23 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Dessert, Dinner
    Cuisine French
    Servings 4 to 5, 8-10 crepes, 2 per person
    Calories 189 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10" non-stick crepe pan or non-stick fry pan
    • blender
    • Sifter or fine sieve
    • Mini off-set spatula or fork
    • Small pastry brush optional but makes buttering the pan easier

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup gluten-free flour or regular all purpose flour (wheat)
    • 2 cups low fat milk whole milk or plant milk
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 tablespoons sugar or monk fruit for sweet crepes only
    • ¾ teaspoon vanilla extract sweet crepes only
    • 1 pinch salt
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or plant butter, melted

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make crepe batter

    • Sift the flour onto a piece of wax paper or parchment paper. Add the milk to the blender, then the sifted flour, eggs, sugar or monk fruit, vanilla, and pinch of salt. Blend on low speed for about 45 seconds, until blended. Don't use high speed. Note: for savory crepes, omit the sugar and vanilla.

    Refrigerate batter

    • Pour the crepe batter into an airtight container and refrigerate for 30 minutes to hydrate flour. Can be made ahead up to 2 days.

    Make the crepes

    • Remove the batter from the refrigerator. Whisk crepe batter to re-incorporate into a smooth batter.
    • Melt the butter in a small bowl in the microwave. Place the pan over medium heat to get hot, then turn down to medium low. Brush a little melted butter over the pan surface, it should sizzle just a little.
      Pour in a scant ⅓ cup of batter and immediately lift the pan and gently swirl so the batter evenly covers the bottom of the pan. Don't worry if the first one is not perfect looking. It will still taste great.
    • Cook the first side of the crepe approximately 60 seconds. Lift an edge to see if it is lightly golden, the with your fingers (it's a little hot) pick up the crepe and turn it over. Shake the pan to re-center if needed. Cook approximately 30-45 seconds longer, the slide the crepe out of the pan onto a flat plate.
      Continue making crepes, brushing between each one with a very small amount of butter. Stack crepes as you go.

    To serve

    • Fold into quarters serve and top as preferred, or to refrigerate for another day.
      Stack them each between a layer of parchment of wax paper then wrap well in plastic film and refrigerate for 3-4 days. Alternatively, freeze crepes for up to two months. Be sure to label and date the package. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight.

    Notes

    Nutrition calculation was done with standard sugar. If you make them with monk fruit (as I do), it is only 3 grams of sugar per crepe (and 21 carbs for 2). Numbers are included for the crepes only, not for any topping or fillings you might enjoy. 
    If crepes are frozen, they are fragile until completely thawed so handle them carefully so they don't break. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight for best results. Separating them is easy if you've layered between parchment paper. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2crepesCalories: 189kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 8gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 85mgSodium: 73mgPotassium: 179mgFiber: 2gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 363IUCalcium: 147mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce

    07/22/2024 by Sally Cameron 106 Comments

    roasted tomato marinara

    As farmers' markets overflow with fresh, ripe summer tomatoes, now is the perfect time to make a batch of roasted tomato sauce. Skip the stockpot and reach for your roasting pan to create a richly concentrated and flavorful sauce that captures the essence of summer. While 'the best' is a bold statement, this recipe has been shared more than 50,000 times through the years. It's a reader favorite for good reason, since 2011.

    Jars of rich red roasted tomato sauce on a wood counter with fresh tomatoes and garlic cloves.

    In late summer when prices are low, I'll bring home 10-20 pounds of fresh tomatoes and make my own roasted tomato sauce. Roasting tomatoes concentrates their natural sweetness. Adding garlic, onions, and herbs adds wonderful flavor. Store-bought pasta sauce can't hold a candle to this!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Roasted tomato sauce freezes well for a quick meal in colder months to come.
    • Takes advantage of fresh summer tomatoes.
    • Terrific with many dishes like this easy chicken parmesan, and of course simply with a bowl of pasta.

    If you love homemade tomato sauce, here's another recipe, my easy homemade marinara sauce. Make it in about 30 minutes with canned tomatoes.

    Roasted Tomato Sauce Ingredients

    Ingredients for roasted tomato sauce on a marble counter with tomatoes, onion, garlic, oil, wine.
    • Tomatoes: Use meaty, fresh ripe tomatoes, whatever looks best and is a good price as you need a lot of tomatoes. Check out your local farmer's markets. Different types of tomatoes is good
    • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves, not garlic powder, for that punch of flavor. A must for tomato sauce.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is the best.
    • Wine: A little dry red wine adds nice flavor but it's optional.
    • Herbs: Fresh oregano, fresh basil leaves, or some of each.
    • Onions: Yellow, brown, or white, all are fine.
    • Red pepper flakes: If you want to add a little spiciness.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

    Here's another of my favorite tomato-based sauces; mushroom marinara. Rich and meaty but no meat!

    Chef Sally's tip on wine: When I cook with wine I use the mini airline size bottles so I don't have to open a big bottle. They work great, are inexpensive, and easy to keep in the pantry. Wine enhances flavor in cooking, but of course using it is optional.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • To offset the acidity of the tomatoes, some people add a little sugar. If your tomatoes are sweet, you probably won't need it, but you can use it if perferred. Another option is a little monk fruit.
    • Another nice addition is a tablespoon or two of balsamic vinegar. Add this when pureeing the roasted tomato sauce. It adds nicely to the flavor of the sauce. 
    • To use dried herbs instead of fresh herbs, use a dried Italian seasoning blend. Use ⅓ to ½ as much as fresh herbs.

    Chef's tips on tomatoes: So what's a good tomato for this sauce? I usually buy a combination of heirloom varieties like Brandywine and Purple Cherokee (a purple beefsteak) and Roma tomatoes, for fun color and flavor mixed in. Red beefsteak tomatoes are excellet too. Buy what looks best and is a good price as this is a lot of tomatoes! A mix is great for roasted pasta sauce. For more info on varieties of tomatoes read this.

    Recipe Instructions

    Ten pounds of colorful chopped tomatoes on a black cutting board with a knife.
    • Step 1: Pre-heat a hot oven or two ovens to 425°F.
    • Step 2: Wash the tomatoes and core them, depending on variety. Beefsteak and heirloom tomatoes have bigger cores. If you are using Romas, you may only need to chop them. Chop the tomatoes into larger chunks. Add them to the roasting pans.
    • Step 3: Roughly chop onions and peel garlic cloves leaving them whole. Add them to the roasting pans, diving the quantity between the two.
    • Step 4: Add olive oil, chopped herbs, wine (if using), salt and pepper and toss with your hands to mix.
    • Step 5: Roast the tomatoes. Timing is approximately 1:15 minutes, depending on how juicy the tomatoes are, how concentrated you want your roasted tomato sauce, and your ovens. It might take a little longer.
    • Stir the sauce half way through. Check their progress around 45 minutes. Don't leave the ovens open too long. Roast until the tomatoes and onions are a nicely shriveled with browned edges and there is still a little juice in the pan bottom.
    A stainless steel roasting pan of roasted tomatoes, onions, herbs, and garlic.
    • Step 6: When roasting is complete, allow pans to cool long enough to handle, then spoon everything carefully into a food processor or blender in batches and puree. For a chunky sauce, do a few pulses. For a smooth sauce, process for a little longer. Your preference.
    Roasted tomatoes, onions, garlic cloves, and herbs in a food processor to be pureed.

    Another tool option, use a stick blender (immersion blender). They are a handy tool that takes up a lot less kitchen space than a food processor or high powered blender for smaller kitchens. Be sure to puree in a tall pot in the kitchen sink to reduce splatter (and wear an apron!).

    Chef's tip on yield: My most recent batch of roasted tomato sauce yielded 3 beautiful quarts. At other times, the yield has been 2 quarts. Maybe the tomatoes were more or less juicy, or maybe I reduced it farther in roasting. Either way, the sauce is fantastic and thick after pureeing.

    Pureed tomato sauce in a food processor workbowl ready to enjoy.

    Recipe Tips and Tricks

    Use one large roasting pan (like you use for a turkey) for a half batch or two large roasting pans for a full batch. For a full batch with one roasting pan, split this recipe into two batches. If you have double ovens or one really large oven, you might be able to do two pans at once with two roasting pans. If you only have one roasting pan, try borrowing a second from a friend.

    Another option is using a big electric roaster like you might do a turkey in. Electric roasters are great tools and I've used them for other recipes but not for roasted tomato sauce. You'll have to experiment with timing.

    Don't use disposable, uncoated aluminum pans. The acidity in tomatoes reacts with the aluminum with the possibility of leaving an unpleasant metallic taste.

    While the long terms effects of aluminum leaching into foods it not fully known (there are conflicting reports), acidic foods like tomatoes are better off in stainless steel or anodized aluminum. Anodized aluminum roasting pans work because the manufacturing process hardens the metal making it non-reactive.

    Read Tip: Willie says "I've been making this for a few years now - the best marinara sauce EVER! ? I use two stainless steel cookie sheets (don't have 2 roasting pans) and switch top and bottom, half way thru cooking". See here entire comment below.

    Serving and Storing Suggestions

    • Serve over your favorite pasta noodle. It's a good basic spaghetti sauce, or for penne or rotini (corkscrew).
    • For a lower carb dinner, serve over zucchini noodles.
    • It makes a terrific pizza sauce!
    • Roasted tomato sauce is also terrific with my ricotta and kale stuffed shells recipe.
    • Serve as a dipping sauce with a grilled cheese sandwich. Oh, it's so good.
    Finished tomato sauce in glass jars and silicone molds for freezing.

    How Do I Store Roasted Tomato Sauce?

    Roasted tomato sauce will keep in the refrigerator for 5 days in an airtight container, or freezer for up to 6 months. I've used glass jars (like a mason jar or a ball jar) and these portioned silicone freezing cubes.

    Store roasted tomato sauce in them or when the sauce is frozen solid, pop the cubes out and store in freezer-safe zip bags, labeled and dated.

    When you fill jars, don't fill them all of the way to the top. Leave a little head space for expansion.

    To thaw frozen sauce, place in the refrigerator overnight, pour into a pan over medium heat with a lid on low heat. On of my favorite things to label jars with is these removable labels. They work great.

    Roasted Tomato Sauce Canning Notes

    I used to can this sauce with a pressure canner so it was pantry stable. Now I just freeze the finished sauce.

    Low-acid foods such as tomato sauce should optimally be processed using a pressure canner, not a water bath. Only a pressure canner can reach the 240 degrees necessary to safely process low-acid foods (a ph value greater than 4.6).

    For instructions on preparing canned tomatoes, check out this article from Simply Canning.

    A jar of rich red, chunky roasted tomato sauce without a lid and red ripe tomatoes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Which type of tomatoes are best for roasting?

    Meatier tomatoes are best for making a roasted tomato sauce. Buy either Roma tomatoes or plum tomatoes, but you can use any variety of tomatoes depending on availability and personal preference. I often use heirloom tomatoes.

    If the tomatoes have lots of seeds, squeeze or slice some of them out after halving or quartering. A combination of tomatoes make for good flavor. If you want a really red sauce, use all red tomatoes, or mix in colors for fun and flavor.

    Do I need to peel the tomatoes before roasting them?

    No need to peel tomatoes before roasting as the skins soften during roasting and add nice texture to the finished sauce. Plus, there is good nutrition in those skins, so I recommend not peeling. It's definitely a time saver too. For a smoother roasted tomato sauce, puree longer in a food processor or blender.

    What herbs and spices work well in roasted tomato sauce?

    Traditional herbs for roasted tomato sauce include basil, oregano, thyme, rosemary, Italian parsley, and bay leaf. Soft leaf herbs blend into the finished sauce easily when pureeing. Herbs such as bay leaf must be removed, as you do not want to eat them. Rosemary, if chopped, will blend in, or use sprigs then remove after roasting.

    More Recipes With Tomatoes

    Here are more recipe for you using tomatoes, from oven roasted cherry tomatoes to an easy marinara, bolognese, and mushroom sauce.

    • A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.
      Garlic Roasted Tomatoes with Thyme
    • Pot full of homemade marinara.
      Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce
    • bison bolognese with pasta
      Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this roasted tomato sauce recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    Recipe originally published in September 19, 2011.

    📖 Recipe

    roasted tomato marinara sauce | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Roasted Tomato Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Roasting tomatoes makes an incredibly rich and concentrated tomato sauce. To roast this many tomatoes at once, you need two roasting pans so as not to crowd the ingredients. That may require two ovens or roasting in two batches. If you don't own a roasting pan, find a friend who does and borrow one. Freezes beautifully. Serving is ¾ cup.
    5 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 50 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 16 Yield 3 quarts (12 cups)
    Calories 133 kcal

    Equipment

    • Stainless steel roasting pans
    • Food processor or blender
    • Double ovens or split the batch into two

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 pounds fresh tomatoes
    • 16 large whole garlic cloves, peeled
    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ cup dry red wine optional
    • 6 tablespoons fresh oregano leaves or basil leaves (or both) or 2 tablespoons dried
    • 2 medium onions roughly chopped
    • 1-2 tablespoons Balsamic vinegar optional
    • 2 teaspoons sea salt
    • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼-1/2 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Pre-heat Ovens

    • Pre-heat the oven (s) to 425°F. Get out two large stainless steel roasting pans (like for roasting a turkey).

    Prep Tomatoes

    • Wash the tomatoes. Depending on the type of tomato, you may need to cut out the core first, as with large Beefsteak or Heirloom varieties. You may not need to with Roma or plum tomatoes Cut tomatoes into large chunks. Don't cut the pieces too small. Big chunks are good. Smaller pieces roast too fast.

    Roast Tomatoes

    • Place tomatoes in the roasting pan. Add garlic cloves, oil, wine or broth, oregano, onion, salt and pepper. Toss with your hands. Place pans in the oven and roast until tomatoes have reduced and are starting to get a few black edges. The pan should still have some juices, not be dry.  Depending on your oven it should take about 60 minutes. Stir half way through. If the tomatoes are really juicy, it may take longer.

    Cool and Puree

    • Remove pans from oven, set on the stove top and allow to cool until you can handle it. Carefully transfer the roast tomatoes into a food processor and pulse 5-6 times or until you get the preferred texture. You can also use a blender and process in batches. Serve or cool completely and freeze in portions.

    Notes

    Canning tomatoes requires a pressure canner. See notes in the post, and read about canning tomatoes on recommended links.
    For tomatoes, use what is best at the market. Roma tomatoes, plum tomatoes, beefsteaks, and heirloom tomatoes all work great in this recipe. 
    The yield for this recipe is 2-3 quarts, depending on how far you roast or reduce the tomatoes. This sauce will keep fresh in the refrigerator for 4-5 days, or freeze for up to 6 months. Some batches I've reduced the sauce way down with little juice left in the pan. This last batch I did not go as far and got 3 beautiful quarts of sauce. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.75cupCalories: 133kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 3gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gSodium: 307mgPotassium: 731mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 2404IUVitamin C: 41mgCalcium: 68mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Tropical Mango Pineapple Smoothie

    08/17/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.

    Refreshing on a hot day, enjoy tropical flavors with this mango pineapple smoothie, bursting with the vibrant flavors of ripe mango, pineapple, and lime juice. Skip the fast food version that's loaded with sugar and make this healthier alternative at home in minutes. Naturally sweetened with whole fruit, it's also packed with protein from Greek yogurt and fiber, making it a great way to start the day.

    Ever order a McDonald's mango pineapple smoothie? Just reading the nutrition label could send you into sugar shock. It's the kind of smoothie that gives smoothies a bad name. A medium mango pineapple smoothie at the golden arches has a whopping 57 grams of sugar (14 teaspoons) and almost no protein (3 grams). Let's fix that right now so you can enjoy this tropical smoothie at home.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Make it in minutes or make it ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast.
    • High in protein and fiber, a healthy mango pineapple smoothie recipe.
    • Use frozen fruit or fresh fruit.
    • Way less sugar than a fast food mango pineapple smoothie.

    If you love mango in smoothies, try this bright green smoothie with mango and spinach. Sounds crazy but it's terrific and a beautiful color. 

    Recipe Ingredients

    Two glasses of bright golden mango pineapple smoothies with lime and pineapple wedges.

    While this smoothie is a tropical delight, it is still a higher sugar smoothie. Be careful how much fruit you add. If you eat low carb or watch your sugar intake, keep this smoothie recipe as a treat, not an everyday smoothie.

    • Milk: Coconut milk adds more of a tropical touch, but almond milk, hemp seed milk, dairy milk, or cashew milk all work.
    • Yogurt: Buy unflavored plain Greek yogurt for the best protein.
    • Protein powder: Use your preferred. I generally use whey protein.
    • Mango: Fresh mango or frozen mango. Frozen mango chunks make it frosty and thicker.
    • Pineapple: Use fresh pineapple or frozen pineapple.
    • Lime: A little fresh lime juice lifts the flavor and tempers the sweetness.
    • Turmeric: Just a little adds golden color (optional), plus it's good for you.
    • Vanilla: What's more tropical than vanilla? Add a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste, if you are not using vanilla protein powder.

    For lower sugar smoothies, try berry smoothies and check out my smoothies recipe index page.

    Chef's tip: One tropical fruit I skip in a mango pineapple smoothie is banana. Often used in smoothie recipes to make them creamy, this smoothie recipe doesn't need more sugar, as it gets nice creaminess from the yogurt. Can you add banana? Yes, fresh banana or frozen banana. I don't think it is needed, but it's up to you.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • It might sound crazy but a little mild curry powder is nice!
    • Swap lemon juice for lime juice.
    • Use either all protein powder or all yogurt to meet your protein needs.
    • For more fiber and protein, add a tablespoon of ground flax seed.
    • If you want it sweeter, try a little maple syrup, honey, or monk fruit (for no added sugar). 
    • Try coconut water for your liquid, but read the labels for added sugar.
    • Add a vanilla extract, ground vanilla, or use vanilla protein powder. 

    Fresh pineapple mango salsa is terrific with chicken, fish, shrimp, and many other dishes. It's brightly flavored and delicious if you've never made it.

    Chef's tip: What NOT to use in a pineapple mango smoothie? Skip any mango puree concentrate, pineapple puree, pineapple juice, fruit juice concentrate, or orange juice concentrate. Why? They are pure sugar as the fiber is gone, and they really spike your blood sugar. Use whole fruit that still has the fiber and you'll do much better.

    Another good combination with pineapple is frozen cucumber. Sounds crazy but it's really refreshing! Look at my cucumber smoothie post for how to cut up and freeze the cucumber.

    Smoothie Instructions

    A blender container with ingredients for a smoothie.
    A pureed mango smoothie in a blender ready for pouring.

    Any blender will do but a high-speed blender purees better and works faster.

    To the blender container add the milk first, then the yogurt, fruit, protein powder, lime juice, and turmeric (if using). Blend away, start low to grind up the fruit, then turn it up to high to puree.

    Serving Suggestions

    A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie with pineapple and lime garnish.

    Serve right away or soon after blending. Keep it refrigerated if you are not drinking it right away, or in an insulated thermos if on the go.

    You can make a mango pineapple smoothie the night ahead of time and shake well to re-blend in the morning or after a workout. They are a great quick breakfast.

    For another classic smoothie, try this strawberry banana smoothie with yogurt.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I prepare a mango pineapple smoothie in advance?

    It's best enjoyed fresh, but you can prepare it in advance and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Shake, stir, or re-blend before drinking.

    How can I make a protein-rich mango pineapple smoothie?

    To increase the protein, try adding protein powder, Greek yogurt, silken tofu, or a handful of nuts and seeds (hemp seeds, chia seeds) to increase the protein level. Use a combination of options to round out your protein needs. One more tip, compare milk protein levels and try a higher protein option such as homemade hemp seed milk.

    Is it necessary to add sweeteners like honey or sugar?

    No, sweeteners are not needed in a smoothie including tropical fruit as they are naturally higher in sugar. If you feel you need it sweeter, use an alternative sweetener without sugar such as monk fruit.

    Do I need a high-powered blender to make a mango pineapple smoothie?

    You can make a smoothie with almost any blender. A high-powered blender creates a smoother texture, but a regular blender or personal blender also work. You might need to blend longer or add a little more liquid to achieve the desired consistency.

    More Healthy Fruity Smoothies

    • Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.
      5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe
    • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
      Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
    • chocolate blueberry smoothie
      Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie (high protein)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this mango pineapple smoothie, I hope you'll comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I appreciate hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.

    Mango Pineapple Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    A tropical dreamy creamy smoothie with mango and pineapple, blend in a minute for breakfast or a post workout refuel. Make it the night ahead if desired and keep well refrigerated, shake well before enjoying.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 254 kcal

    Equipment

    • High speed blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces unsweetened almond milk or milk of choice
    • ½ cup plain greek yogurt
    • ½ cup chopped mango fresh or frozen
    • ¼ cup pineapple fresh or frozen
    • ½ scoop protein powder plain or vanilla
    • ½ teaspoon turmeric powder optional
    • 1 lime juiced
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract or vanilla paste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add liquid to the blender first, then yogurt, then all other ingredients and blend on high until smooth and creamy. For a frostier smoothie add a few ice cubes.

    Notes

    Smoothie milk options:
    Hemp seed milk, dairy milk, almond milk, cashew milks, and coconut milk really adds tropical flavor, all make this a delicious smoothie. 
    For more tips on making healthy smoothies, please read my Healthy Smoothie Guide.
    Nutritional information is an estimate provided to you as a courtesy. You should calculate the actual nutritional information with the products and brands you are using with your preferred nutritional calculator if there are questions. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 254kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 26gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 30mgSodium: 430mgPotassium: 463mgFiber: 5gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 994IUVitamin C: 70mgCalcium: 539mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe

    06/28/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

    Got 5 minutes for a quick breakfast that's healthy? Whip up this creamy cherry smoothie. Use fresh or frozen cherries, either sweet cherries or tart cherries. Cherry season is fleeting so take advantage of the season while you can and enjoy this cherry smoothie. Prep them ahead if needed, they hold well in the refrigerator.

    Two glasses or bright pink cherry smoothie with dark cherries in the background.

    You know it's summer when cherries show up at the market. Beyond using cherries for fabulous desserts like this easy cherry cake, a cherry smoothie is one of my favorite ways to enjoy cherries. While fresh cherries are the essence of summer, frozen cherries work year round for this terrific smoothie.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Use fresh or frozen cherries.
    • Works with tart cherries or sweet cherries.
    • A simple smoothie recipe but customizable with great add-in options.
    • High protein with Greek yogurt (if you do dairy).

    Recipe Ingredients

    Simple ingredients for a cherry smoothie in glass bowls.
    • Milk: I use homemade unsweetened almond milk but use your milk of choice.
    • Cherries: Both tart cherries and sweet dark cherries make a great smoothie, as well as both fresh and frozen.
    • Yogurt: I recommend buying plain Greek yogurt for the thick creaminess and high protein that is adds to a cherry smoothie.
    • Banana: Fresh banana or frozen banana are good. Frozen makes a thicker, colder smoothie.
    • Flavoring: Just a little almond extract really adds complimentary flavor to the cherries, or use vanilla extract for a cherry vanilla smoothie.
    • Sweetening: Choose a mild honey for sweetness. How much you use will depend on the natural sweetness of the cherries. Also try maple syrup, but it has a definite taste.

    Chef's cherry tip: Fresh cherries or frozen cherries? I've used purchased frozen cherries, fresh pitted cherries, and fresh cherries that I pitted then froze for this cherry smoothie. They all work but my first choice is the fresh pitted then frozen cherries. Yes, it's a bit of work to pit and freeze your own fresh cherries but I find the flavor the best. Outside of cherry season, I'll go through my frozen stash and then use store-frozen cherries if available.

    Ways to Customize a Cherry Smoothie

    Want a healthy cherry smoothie recipe? Try some of these substitutions and variations.

    • Milk variations: try homemade coconut milk, cashew milk, dairy milk, hemp seed milk, or oat milk, (each will change the flavor a little).
    • Make it a vegan cherry smoothie with non-dairy milk and yogurt.
    • Add protein powder for higher protein, either whey, almond, egg white, or a plant-based blend.
    • For a black forest chocolate cherry smoothie add cocoa powder or use chocolate protein powder.
    • For no-added sugar, use a monk fruit honey or simple syrup for sweetening.
    • Skip the sweetening and instead use a vanilla Greek yogurt.
    • For a boost of healthy fats, add a tablespoon of almond butter, peanut butter, cashew butter, coconut butter, or even MCT oil.
    • For added fiber and protein add 1-2 tablespoons of flaxseed meal.
    • One thing I add to my smoothies everyday is a supplement called creatine. It helps with building muscle, staying strong, and improving cognition and memory. Here's a great article on creatine. It's not just for body builders or men.
    • One more add-in worth mentioning is tart cherry powder. Known to be great for joints, muscle soreness, and post workout recovery. Plus it tastes great in smoothies.

    Be sure the check out my Ultimate Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies!

    Smoothie Instructions

    Making smoothies is best with a high-speed blender.

    Cherries, banana, and milk in a blender container.
    Step 1: Add milk to the blender first, then protein powder if using. Next add the cherries, bananas, sweetener, and extract.
    A pink and bubbly blended cherry smoothie in a blender container.
    Step 2: Start blender on slow speed to start grinding the fruit together, then power up to high and blend until smooth as desired.

    How to Store Cherries

    Cherries like things cool and dry, making moisture is the enemy of cherries. I wash mine as soon as I get home with this produce wash, then allow them to dry completely on a clean kitchen towel. Do not put them away unless they are dry or you run the risk of moldy cherries.

    When cherries are totally dry, place them in a storage container with a layer of paper towels at the bottom to minimize condensation or moisture.

    They will last 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Beyond that, freeze extra cherries.

    Chef's tip on cherries: How can you tell tart cherries (sour cherries) from sweet cherries? By the color. Tart cherries are bright red while sweet cherries are the dark red ones. Read here about the health benefits of cherries.

    How to Freeze Cherries

    Pitted frozen whole dark red cherries on a sheet tray.
    Step 1: Pit and freeze whole cherries on a rimmed sheet tray until firm.
    Bagged dark red cherries frozen for storage.
    Step 2: Store frozen cherries in freezer safe containers or zip bags.

    To freeze cherries, wash and dry first, then pit them with a cherry pitter tool and lay them in a single layer on a plastic or parchment line rimmed baking sheet tray that will fit in your freezer (I use quarter sheet size). Freeze for several hours until firm, then store them in a freezer safe container.

    Frozen cherries are best up to 6 months but can last up to a year properly frozen and stored. So while it's cherry season, freeze as many as you can for the months ahead.

    Here's another beautiful fruit smoothie and my other go-to recipe, this raspberry smoothie.

    Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

    Serving Suggestions

    Enjoy a cherry smoothie right out of the blender or make it the night ahead and store it in an airtight container like a wide mouth ball jar with tight fitting lid. Refrigerate for a great grab-and-go breakfast or workout refuel.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I pit cherries for a smoothie?

    The best way to pit cherries for a smoothie or any other recipe is with an inexpensive tool called a cherry pitter. Find them online and where cooking tools are sold. Without a cherry pitter you can use a paring knife, but it's slower and messier.

    How can I make my cherry smoothie creamier?

    For a creamy cherry smoothie, add yogurt. Use Greek yogurt as it is thicker than regular yogurt. Banana adds creaminess to smoothies, either fresh or frozen. Another creamy add-in is your favorite nut butter.

    How do I make a cherry smoothie thicker?

    To make a thicker smoothie, try freezing your fruit if it's fresh. Add Greek yogurt or ground flaxseed, which also adds fiber and fat. If the smoothie does not have banana, it's a great thickener for a smoothie. Lastly, add a few ice cubes.

    More Smoothie Recipes

    Smoothies have been my go-to breakfast and post-workout preference for more than 25 years! For more healthy smoothie recipes, try the links below and check out the smoothie recipe page where I am adding more smoothie recipes.

    • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
      Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this cherry smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.

    Cherry Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Bright pink, sweet and smooth, grab some cherries while they are in season and enjoy this cherry smoothie!
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 403 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • ½ cup unsweetened almond milk or your favorite milk
    • 1 cup pitted cherries, fresh or frozen about 5 ounces or 13-14 cherries
    • 2 teaspoons honey or other sweetener, optional
    • 1 small banana fresh or frozen
    • ¾ cup plain greek yogurt 5 ounces
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract or vanilla extract optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add milk to blender first, then yogurt, fruit, honey, and extract if using. Start low to grind the fruit together then increase speed and puree to desired consistency.
      Enjoy cherry smoothie right out of the blender or make it ahead and refrigerate for later enjoyment or overnight for a grab-and-go breakfast or post-workout refuel.

    Notes

    How to Customize a Cherry Smoothie

    • Milk variations: try homemade coconut milk, cashew milk, dairy milk, hemp seed milk, or oat milk, (each will change the flavor a little).
    • Make it vegan with non-dairy milk and yogurt.
    • Add protein powder for higher protein, either whey, almond, egg white, or a plant-based blend.
    • For a black forest chocolate cherry smoothie add cocoa powder or use chocolate protein powder.
    • For reduced sugar, use a monk fruit honey or simple syrup for sweetening.
    • Skip the sweetening and instead use a vanilla yogurt.
    • For a boost of healthy fats, add a tablespoon of almond butter, peanut butter, coconut butter, or even MCT oil.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 403kcalCarbohydrates: 60gProtein: 21gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 216mgPotassium: 999mgFiber: 8gSugar: 42gVitamin A: 161IUVitamin C: 19mgCalcium: 387mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)

    04/01/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

    This delicious raspberry smoothie is one of my favorite, go-to smoothie recipes. Why? It's a super simple smoothie and I am crazy about raspberries! If you are too, you're going to love this smoothie using frozen raspberries. Perfect for busy mornings when you have little time and still want to eat healthy. Blend one up today or make it the night ahead.

    A beautiful pink raspberry smoothie in a small glass with a bowl of raspberries.

    I've been drinking and creating smoothie recipes for more than 25 years, and here's a simple favorite, my raspberry smoothie. It's easy to keep the ingredients on hand for whenever you need them. Plus, there are lots of ways to vary it to meet your personal needs.

    Why You'll Love This Raspberry Smoothie

    • Quick and easy raspberry smoothie recipe.
    • Just a few simple ingredients.
    • Healthy for breakfast, afternoon snack, or a post-workout re-fuel.
    • Satisfy a sweet tooth in a healthy way.

    If you love raspberries, try grilled shrimp salad with raspberry vinaigrette, and for a terrific mocktail, try this raspberry shrub recipe, it's refreshing and no alcohol.

    Smoothie Ingredients

    Keeping the ingredients simple allows the flavor of the raspberries to shine through for a delicious smoothie.

    Ingredients for a raspberry smoothie in glass bowls.
    • Raspberries: Frozen raspberries are easiest for smoothies, but use fresh berries if you prefer, or use them for garnish if desired. Frozen is easy to keep on hand and usually less expensive than fresh.
    • Milk: For a non-dairy milk smoothie use unsweetened almond milk, hemp milk, cashew milk, oat milk, organic soy milk, or use dairy milk if preferred. All will add their own little flavor differences.
    • Sweetener: I use monk fruit for no added sugar, but mild honey or simple syrup work as well. Try this monk fruit simple syrup for no sugar added, maple syrup or monk fruit no-sugar maple syrup. Sweetener is optional, just enjoy it with the natural sweetness.
    • Banana: Use frozen banana for a frostier smoothie or fresh banana. Half of a banana will do. A barely yellow banana has less sugar. An overripe banana is higher in sugar and have a stronger taste that can overpower the flavor of the raspberry.
    • Protein powder: Add a scoop of protein powder (or mored depending on your brand and how much protein you need). This is what we use for whey protein, or for plant-based, try this almond protein powder or this for a good vegan protein blend. Use either plain or vanilla protein powder.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For healthy fats, add a tablespoon of MCT oil, coconut butter, peanut butter, or nut butter, or use a few tablespoons of full-fat coconut milk.
    • Add a little vanilla extract.
    • Use a raspberry fruit blend with other berries.
    • Don't want to use protein powder? Try plain Greek yogurt, vanilla Greek yogurt, or even plain cottage cheese.
    • Alternate raspberries with another fresh fruit such as blackberries, blueberries, strawberries, plums or peaches.
    • Make a raspberry coconut smoothie using homemade coconut milk. It's creamy and delicious.
    • Use a power add-in such as pomegranate powder or tart cherry powder for an extra nutritional boost.

    How to Make a Raspberry Smoothie

    Use a high-powered blender for the best results and the creamiest texture.

    A bright pink raspberry smoothie in the blender.

    Add the milk to the blender first, then add the rest of your ingredients and blend until smooth.

    Chef's smoothie tip: This is a pretty thick smoothie. If you want it thinner, add more milk. If you want to make smoothie bowls, try using less milk for an even thicker smoothie.

    A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve raspberry smoothie right out of the blender or make it ahead, place it in an airtight container with a tight fitting lid and refrigerate. Great for grab-and-go mornings.

    For another terrific, fruity pink smoothie make this cherry smoothie with fresh or frozen cherries.

    Chef's tip on temperature: If you want it colder for warm summer days, add a few ice cubes to the blender for a frosty texture. If you want it not so cold for a wintery day, use fresh raspberries or thawed frozen raspberries and fresh banana.

    More Healthy Smoothie Recipes

    Smoothies are easy to make in so many delicious and healthy ways. Try one of these other smoothie recipes to mix up your morning or check out the smoothie recipe index where I am adding more smoothie recipes.

    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • coconut mango smoothie
      Spiced Mango Coconut Smoothie

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this raspberry smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.

    Raspberry Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Sweet, creamy, and a terrific healthy way to start your day. Make it in a minute!
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 16 ounce or 2 8-ounce
    Calories 278 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk or milk of choice
    • 5 ounces frozen raspberries ½ a 10-ounce package
    • ½ small banana fresh or frozen
    • 1 scoop protein powder or as needed
    • 1 teaspoon granulated monk fruit or honey

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add the milk to the blender first, then add the rest of the ingredients and blend until smooth.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 278kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 29gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 415mgPotassium: 485mgFiber: 11gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 159IUVitamin C: 42mgCalcium: 476mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe

    03/25/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.

    Golden and delicious, buckwheat pancakes are an easy weekend breakfast and perfect for holiday breakfasts and brunches. They are not your usual pancake. With a name like buckwheat you'd think it's wheat, but it's naturally gluten-free. This pancake recipe works for everyone. This weekend make a batch of these hearty pancakes, or make them ahead and re-heat to save time.

    A big stack or buttermilk buckwheat pancakes dripping with maple syrup.

    Buckwheat might be a trending ingredient but it's been used for centuries. Think of Japanese buckwheat soba noodles, French buckwheat crepes, or Russian blini made with buckwheat flour. You can make fantastic buckwheat pancakes at home.

    Buckwheat is a naturally gluten-free grain-like seed that's high in protein and fiber, like quinoa. It has a nutty, earthy taste and a rich brown color. Enjoy this delicious buckwheat pancake recipe piled with your favorite toppings.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Buckwheat pancakes taste more earthy with a nutty flavor.
    • Enjoy with a variety of toppings including maple syrup, honey, fruit syrups, and berries.
    • Make them ahead and warm them up to save time.
    • Make them with all buckwheat flour or a combination of buckwheat flour and gluten-free flour or regular flour.
    • Make totally gluten-free pancakes or regular buckwheat pancakes.

    Why is it the best recipe? Because it's been tested over and over again and it works!If you'd rather have waffles, try these golden gluten-free waffles.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for buckwheat pancakes in bowls ready to make batter.
    • Buckwheat flour: A terrific whole grain flour with protein and fiber, and naturally gluten-free. Find it in most grocery stores. There are different kinds of buckwheat flour. See note below in Chef's tip.
    • Flour: To blend with the buckwheat flour. Use either a gluten-free flours blend or all purpose flour, or whole wheat flour.
    • Leavening agents: Use both baking powder and baking soda. Check the dates on your packages to be sure they are fresh.
    • Eggs: Eggs are a binder and create structure, stability, and moisture in baking. Be sure they are clean and not cracked.
    • Oil: Melted coconut oil, MCT oil, or a healthy neutral oil (not vegetable oil).
    • Honey: To sweet things up a bit. Use regular honey or monk fruit honey to reduce sugar (which is what I use).
    • Vanilla: Vanilla extract works well but you can use vanilla paste. If you love vanilla like I do, try it.
    • Buttermilk: Because buttermilk is fermented it is acidic, and it activates the baking soda for lighter pancakes. For substitutions see below.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and extras and nutritional information.

    Chef's tips on buckwheat flour: I used Bob's Red Mill Buckwheat Flour to develop the recipe. It's a dark buckwheat flour (dark in color) because it's ground with the seed hulls. It also works well in quick breads. You'll also find the light colored, finely ground "light" buckwheat flour which some people prefer for baking. For a lighter baked good you can also use part darker buckwheat flour with part regular flour. Don't be surprised when you open the bag that it looks like dirt. It's not!

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use all buckwheat flour, but the pancakes will be a little darker.
    • To increase the protein, add a little protein powder to the dry ingredients, but you may need to add just a little more buttermilk for the right consistency.
    • No buttermilk? Substitute 2 ½ cups whole milk adding 2 ½ tablespoons white vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
    • Low on buttermilk? Last batch I only had 2 cups of buttermilk so I added a ½ cup of low fat milk and it worked perfectly. But you must have the buttermilk as it activates the leavening agents (baking soda and baking powder).
    • For fluffier pancakes use an old trick; separate the egg whites (and use an extra one) from the egg yolks and whip the egg whites stiff, then fold them into the batter. For me, just my standard recipe is fine!

    For an easy, make ahead breakfast, try these overnight oats with chia seeds. And for another terrific pancake recipe, try these blueberry lemon pancakes.

    If you need gluten-free, they will probably work with an all purpose GF flour blend that includes xanthan gum like.

    How to Make Buckwheat Pancakes

    Use either a non-stick skillet or griddle, or a well seasoned cast iron skillet to make buckwheat flour pancakes.

    Dry ingredients for pancakes in a glass mixing bowl.
    Step 1: Mix dry ingredients in a large bowl.
    Eggs and oil whisked together in a glass mixing bowl.
    Step 2: Mix eggs until smooth with oil, honey, vanilla.
    Pancake batter being mixed with a whisk.
    Step 3: Whisk in the buttermilk to complete the wet ingredients.
    Buckwheat pancake batter mixed in a glass bowl with a silver whisk.
    Step 4: Add the wet ingredients to the dry and blend the pancake batter.
    A pancake cooking in a non-stick pan, ready to flip with bubbles.
    Step 5: Heat the pan, brush with a tiny bit of extra oil. Using ¼ cup measure, drop batter into the pan and cook until small bubbles appear, 1 ¼ - 1 ½ minutes. 
    A golden buckwheat pancake finished in the pan.
    Step 6: Flip pancakes and cook for a minute on the other side until golden brown. Serve or remove to a plate and keep warm for serving.

    Serving Suggestions

    Enjoy buckwheat pancakes with these delicious toppings:

    • Try a drizzle of maple syrup or monk fruit maple syrup (sugar-free)
    • Honey
    • Melted butter or a pat of butter
    • Your favorite jam
    • Fruit syrup like this homemade fresh strawberry coulis.
    • And don't forget fresh berries or fresh fruit such as banana slices.

    For side dishes, add crisp bacon and a seasonal fresh fruit salad made with whatever looks best at the store.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the best way to store buckwheat pancakes?

    When I make buckwheat pancakes ahead of time or have leftover pancakes, I store them two ways: layer them between small squares of parchment paper, stack them and wrap them in plastic film or an airtight container. Another way is lay them in a single layer on layers of parchment and wrap the whole tray.

    What is the best way to reheat buckwheat pancakes?

    Using the microwave works great for re-heating buckwheat pancakes. Unwrap them and arrange them on a plate. If you are re-heating a lot at once, heat them in a 350°F oven until hot.

    What are the health benefits of buckwheat?

    Buckwheat is a highly nutritious cereal-like grain (like quinoa) that is naturally gluten-free. The health benefits vary depending on if you are eating it as a whole grain, called buckwheat groats, or ground, as in buckwheat flour. In general, buckwheat has a high mineral and antioxidant content. It's also a good source of protein and fiber. It can be a healthier alternative to all purpose white flour.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    Here are breakfast recipe ideas to help everyone get the day off to a great start. And if you'd rather have smoothies, check out my smoothie recipe page for tasty ideas.

    • A single bowl of healthy overnight oats with blueberries and pomegranates seeds.
      High Protein Overnight Oats (with Chia Seeds)
    • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
      Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)
    • A single yogurt breakfast parfait with layers of fruit, granola, and yogurt.
      How to Make Greek Yogurt Parfaits
    • A close up of an open jar of homemade granola with a silver scoop.
      Healthy Granola Recipe

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make these buckwheat pancakes, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.

    Buckwheat Pancakes

    Sally Cameron
    Golden and delicious, buckwheat pancakes are an easy weekend breakfast and perfect for holiday breakfasts and brunches. And buckwheat is gluten-free! Top with syrup, berries, or powdered sugar.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 18-5-inch pancakes
    Calories 433 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan or griddle
    • Pancake turner or thin spatula

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup buckwheat flour 4.7 ounces
    • ¾ cup gluten-free flour blend or white wheat flour 3.7 ounces
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 ½ cups buttermilk
    • 3 tablespoons oil see notes below for best oils
    • 2 tablespoons honey or monk fruit honey or sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Optional toppings

    • Warm maple syrup or sugar-free (monk fruit) maple syrup
    • Easy strawberry sauce recipe link below
    • Fresh berries of choice
    • Warm melted butter
    • melted coconut oil

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add dry ingredients to a large bowl, including flours, baking powder, baking soda, and salt, and whisk together.
    • In a medium bowl or 4-cup liquid measure, whisk eggs until smooth, then add milk, oil, honey, and vanilla, Whisk until smooth.
    • Add the milk and egg mixture a little at a time whisking until smooth. Batter is ready to use.
    • Heat a large non-stick pan or griddle over medium heat. Brush or wipe with a little extra oil. When pan is hot, cook pancakes using ¼ cup of batter per pancake. Cook pancakes until golden on the first side, 1 ½ minutes until bubbles appear. Turn pancakes and cook another 1 ½ minutes.
      Don't over cook the pancakes. The goal is a golden brown not a dark brown. turn your heat down a little if needed.
      As pancakes are done, serve as you go or remove them to a parchment lined baking tray and keep warm in a low over (200°F) or a warming drawer.
    • To serve, drizzle with warm melted butter or coconut oil, or warm maple syrup. Another great option is th.

    Notes

    • You can use all buckwheat flour for these pancakes or do as I've noted with part gluten-free or wheat flour. 
    • To reduce sugar/carbs, use a sugar-free honey made with monk fruit. It's how I make my pancakes. 
    • For oil, use either melted coconut oil, MCT oil, or a healthy neutral oil such as Zero Acre Farms. 
    • Recipe for the easy strawberry sauce. Make it with other berries too. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 433kcalCarbohydrates: 54gProtein: 14gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 110mgSodium: 852mgPotassium: 417mgFiber: 5gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 383IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 303mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Blueberry Spinach Smoothie Recipe

    01/26/2016 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    blueberry green smoothie

    If you haven't yet tried a blueberry spinach smoothie because it sounds too weird, this one might change your mind. It's a fantastic way to start your day with blueberries, spinach, and nut butter for healthy fat. Grab your blender and make one!

    Blueberry green smoothie|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Versatile Smoothies

    There are many great things about smoothies. They are fast and easy to make, endlessly customizable, super healthy (with the right ingredients) and transportable to take with you on busy mornings. In fact, I've had one most every morning for more than 15 years. You could say I am hooked.

    Oh, and this one? As I took the photo well after breakfast, I capped the jar and put it in the fridge. The next morning, I poured the jar into a blender and re-blended it and it was perfect. I am sure a really good shake would have sufficed, so they can even be made ahead if time is tight.

    Superfood Blueberry Green Smoothie

    I've used all superfoods to create one super way to start the day. The blue comes from blueberries and a blue-green micro algae called spirulina. More green power comes from big handfuls of baby spinach leaves.

    To complete the smoothie, add protein (options at end), healthy fat from nut butter (almond, coconut, or cashew), and extra flavor from raw cacao powder and chocolate flavored liquid stevia drops.

    Beautiful Blueberries

    Nutrient-dense blueberries are packed with nutrition. Toss them into plain Greek yogurt, add to steel cut oats, or add them to smoothies. Blueberries are high in fiber, vitamins C and K and are thought to contain the highest levels of antioxidants of all commonly consumed fruits and vegetables.

    Blueberries are thought to help reduce blood pressure, prevent heart disease and they are great brain food to boot. Talk about food as medicine, these little berries offer huge health benefits. But be sure to buy organic. Conventional blueberries have high levels of pesticides.

    Blueberrie on a tray | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Superfood Spirulina

    Spirulina is considered one of the world's first superfoods. Its one of the most nutrient-rich, nutritionally complete foods on earth and offers a long list of health benefits. The fine, dark emerald green powder mixes easily into smoothies. That rich green color comes from chlorophyll, a natural detoxifier, helping our bodies get rid of toxins and other impurities. Spirulina also boost our immune system.

    Just 1 teaspoon of spirulina provides 2 grams of complete protein (all essential amino acids) along with non-essential amino acids, and an amazing array of vitamins and minerals. I highly recommend you read more about the benefits here.

    Spirulina | AFoodCentricLife.com

    After researching brands, I buy Nutrex Hawaii. It's the only one of its kind to be cultured in a BioSecure Zone that is free of pesticides, herbicides, and GMOs on the big island of Hawaii. For pennies a day, you can add this amazing superfood to your diet. One note - if you are sensitive or allergic to iodine, skip the spirulina.

    Baby Spinach

    Adding baby spinach leaves to your morning smoothie is like an insurance policy to getting enough green veggies into your daily diet. The tender leaves blend smoothly into an emerald puree and it sounds crazy, but you don't taste the spinach.

    Another nutrient powerhouse, spinach is rich in vitamins (K and A), minerals (Manganese and folate) and powerful little plant compounds called phytonutrients, shown to have anti-inflammatory and anti-cancer benefits. In particular, the high levels of vitamin K are great for our bone health.

    The Rest of the Ingredients

    Milks

    Start with your milk of choice. Homemade almond milk and coconut milk are great bases. Homemade is so much better than from a store and no unwanted additives. See links for recipes.

    Protein

    Try a clean, unsweetened, plant-based, whey blend, or grass fed whey protein powder. Other protein options include Greek yogurt and many seeds such as hemp seeds.

    Sweetness and Flavor

    I add a few drops of chocolate flavored liquid stevia and a little raw cacao powder for a chocolatey flavor.

    Superfood Blueberry Green Smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    Superfood Blueberry Green Smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Blueberry Spinach Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    This blueberry green smoothie is a nutritious way to start the day. Blueberries, baby spinach, and blue-green spirulina add a superfood punch of nutrition. Use your milk of choice and protein. Nut butters add flavor, creaminess and healthy fat. Whirl in a blender and enjoy.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 404 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk
    • 3 handfuls baby spinach leaves 3 ounces
    • ⅓ cup organic blueberries fresh or frozen
    • 1 teaspoon spirulina optional
    • 1 tablespoon cashew butter almond or coconut butter
    • 1 serving protein powder of choice 1-2 scoops, see notes in post
    • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds
    • 1 ½ teaspoons raw unsweetened cacao powder
    • a few drops of chocolate liquid stevia optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place all ingredients in a blender in order given.
    • Blend gradually, getting to high, until smooth.

    Notes

    Chocolate stevia drops are made by Sweet Leaf, available and many stores, health oriented markets and online. There are lots of great flavors!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 404kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 40gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 519mgPotassium: 761mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 8597IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 548mgIron: 8mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    07/16/2017 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Golden Mediterranean hummus in a bowl sprinkled with olive oil, za'atar, and garbanzo beans.

    Craving hummus but out of tahini? Make homemade hummus without tahini instead. It works beautifully, and if you avoid sesame for allergy reasons, I have a great substitute for you. This creamy Mediterranean-style hummus comes together in minutes in a food processor, with turmeric for beautiful color and extra flavor. It's a fresh way to change up your usual hummus routine and satisfy that afternoon snack craving.

    Golden Hummus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    While there are plenty of hummus brands at the store, homemade hummus is easy to make with just a few pantry ingredients and a food processor. It's popular for good reason: hummus is nutritious, protein-packed, plant-based, and incredibly versatile for snacks and meals. For extra-creamy hummus, try my easy trick-simmering the chickpeas with a little baking soda to help loosen the skins before pureeing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Homemade Hummus Recipe No Tahini Highlights

    • Simple ingredients - Made with basic pantry staples and no tahini.
    • Stays fresh - Keeps well in the fridge for up to a week.
    • Healthy and versatile - Perfect as a nutritious snack or part of a mezze platter for a get-together appetizer spread.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Garlic - Use fresh garlic cloves or garlic paste from a tube.
    • Chickpeas - Also called garbanzo beans, canned chickpeas make this recipe quick and easy. And save the aquafaba (bean liquid).
    • Baking soda - To simmer the chickpeas and remove the skins for extra-creamy hummus.
    • Sunbutter - Sunflower seed butter is a great tahini substitute and makes the hummus creamy and rich.
    • Olive oil - Use extra virgin olive oil, or try a lemon olive oil for even more citrus flavor.
    • Lemon - Adds fresh, tangy flavor and helps the hummus blend smoothly.
    • Spices - Ground cumin and coriander add warmth, while za'atar is optional but delicious. (Note-za'atar has sesame seeds so skip for an allergy).
    • Fresh herbs - Chopped parsley or cilantro make a fresh, colorful garnish.

    Chef's Tip: What Is Za'atar? - Za'atar is a Mediterranean spice blend made with sumac, toasted sesame seeds, salt, cumin, and dried herbs such as thyme, oregano, and marjoram. It's wonderful sprinkled over chicken, fish, vegetables, and tomatoes, or mixed with olive oil for a simple dressing or spread. You may also see it spelled zahtar or zaatar. While its delicious, it has sesame seeds so omit for a sesame allergy.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For golden hummus - Add a little turmeric for warm color and earthy flavor. The lead photo is golden hummus with turmeric.
    • More tahini substitutes - Try cashew butter, or almond butter for a similar creamy texture (but the flavor will be a bit different).

    Chef's Tip - Why the Baking Soda Works: Simmering canned chickpeas with a little baking soda for 15 to 20 minutes before blending changes the pH and helps break down the pectin in the chickpeas, softening them further and loosening the skins to discard. This trick gives you a smoother, creamier hummus with less graininess. After simmering, rinse under cold water and gently swish to release some of the skins before blending.

    How to Make Homemade Hummus No Tahini

    Step 1 - For extra creamy tahini start by simmering the chickpeas 15-20 minutes in enough water to cover adding ½ teaspoon of baking soda. Rinse the simmered beans to remove any soapy taste from the baking soda and shake the strainer to remove most of the skins.

    Step 2 - With the food processor running, drop the garlic cloves in through the feed tube to chop fine, or use a microplane zester to turn it into a paste.

    Step 3 - Stop processor and add all of the rest of the ingredients. Puree until creamy, taste, and adjust seasoning to your preference. If you need to thin it, add a tablespoon at a time of the saved aquafaba (the liquid from the can).

    golden hummus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve homemade hummus with pita wedges, pita chips, or an array of fresh raw veggies. Serve immediately or hold in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    More Terrific Dip and Snack Recipes

    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
      Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)
    • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
      Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil
    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. And your comments really help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    golden hummus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    Sally Cameron
    A creamy puree of garbanzo beans (chickpeas) with lemon olive oil, tahini and spices, the beautiful golden color comes from turmeric. Enjoy it as an appetizer or snack with raw vegetables. Makes about 3 cups of hummus, without tahini. If you want to use tahini, you can.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Snack
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 6 to 8
    Calories 114 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor

    Ingredients
      

    • 1-2 garlic cloves peeled
    • 30 ounces chickpeas (aka garbanzo beans) 2 15-ounce cans, drained
    • ⅓ - ½ cup reserved aquafaba or water
    • ¼ cup sunbutter
    • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil divided use
    • 1 lemon juiced
    • 1 teaspoon cumin
    • 1 teaspoon turmeric optional
    • 1 teaspoon coriander
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black or white pepper

    Optional Garnishes

    • 2 teaspoons za'atar
    • 2 teaspoons chopped parsley or cilantro

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Simmer the chickpeas

    • Drain the chickpeas reserving the canned juices (called aquafaba). Add them to a pot and cover with water, Add the baking soda. Simmer for 15-20 minutes. Drain in a sieve or colander, rinse, and shake off the skins. If a few remain, don't be concerned.

    Make the hummus

    • With the food processor running, drop the garlic cloves in through the feed tube to chop fine.Stop processor and add all of the rest of the ingredients. Start with 5-6 tablespoons of water and add more depending on how creamy you want the hummus. Serve immediately or hold in the refrigerator for 4-5 days in an airtight container.

    Notes

    Customize the recipe with extra lemon juice or spices to suit your taste preference. 
    For beans, I prefer Eden Foods no sodium added organic garbanzo beans. Check the label for sodium levels on other beans and adjust salt as needed. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 114kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 2gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 78mgPotassium: 68mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.4gVitamin A: 21IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Best Ricotta Cheese Filling Recipe

    11/04/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Ricotta cheese spinach filling in a bowl on the counter.

    Creamy ricotta, spinach, Parmesan, and herbs mix up for a terrific ricotta cheese filling recipe usable in many ways. Stuffed shells? Lasagna? Omelets? Pasta casserole? Stuffed spaghetti squash? Savory crepes? It's so good, and I've listed 10 ideas for using this cheesy goodness. Grab some ricotta and let's get going.

    Ricotta cheese spinach filling.

    This was inspired by my popular stuffed shells recipe, but this filling recipe is made with spinach (versus kale). The amazing thing is you can use it in so many ways! Read on to find out how.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Really easy recipe.
    • It can be used in many ways, see below for 10 ideas.
    • Easy ingredients.

    Recipe Ingredients

    I tested this with both fresh and frozen spinach and found the frozen, chopped easier to use with better results because the fresh had a lot of stems. Frozen is also easy to keep around. I made the first batch in the food processor and it got too fluid. Ricotta cheese filling is best made by hand.

    Ricotta filling ingredients
    • Spinach: get the frozen chopped spinach, bagged kind that is IQF (individually quick frozen). Don't get the little square blocks.
    • Ricotta: whole milk ricotta cheese is the rich and creamy best choice, but low fat will work. I buy the organic brands and think it's a better product, if it's available.
    • Onion: for the flavorful aromatic quality and moisture.
    • Garlic: for flavor! Fresh is best.
    • Oil: extra virgin olive oil.
    • Parmesan cheese: get the good stuff, Parmigiano-Reggiano. Find store-grated in the cheese department or get a small block and grate it yourself.
    • Herbs: fresh basil leaves (or fresh parsley), and dried Italian seasoning blend.
    • Eggs: as a binder.
    • Seasoning: Salt, ground black pepper and red pepper (optional).

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If eggs are a problem, here are two options to replace eggs: flax egg or arrowroot starch.
    • To make a flax egg, add 1 tablespoon of ground flaxseed to 3 tablespoons of water and stir. Allow it to stand for a few minutes until is looks sort of like a beaten egg. Mix into the ricotta.
    • Another option is mixing 2 tablespoons of arrowroot starch or cornstarch with 3 tablespoons of water and stirring until smooth. For more ideas on egg substitutes read this post.

    Recipe Instructions

    You can make ricotta filling a day ahead of a making a bigger recipe like stuffed shells or homemade lasagna.

    Chopped spinach on cutting board.
    Step 1: Cook frozen spinach according to package directions. Drain through a fine mesh strainer and press out as much moisture as possible with the back of a large spoon. Next, place spinach on layers of paper towels and press out any additional moisture until spinach is almost dry.

    After the spinach is dry, chop it to refine the texture, then add to medium mixing bowl.

    Cooking onions in cast iron pan.
    Step 2: Cook onion in olive oil, add garlic and dried Italian seasoning and cook another minute.
    Mixing filling in glass bowl.
    Step 3: Add ricotta to the spinach, stir together, add the rest of the ingredients: cooked onion, eggs, Parmesan, basil, salt, ground black pepper, and red pepper. It is ready to use or refrigerate.
    Finished ricotta filling in glass bowl.

    Chef's Tip: If your filling is not as thick as you were expecting, place all of it into a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and allow any extra liquid to drain. You can cover and refrigerate it for a few hours or overnight. Also allow it to strain through cheese cloth until it is to your desired consistency.

    Spaghetti squash with ricotta filling.

    Serving Suggestions

    10 Ways to Use Ricotta Cheese Filling

    • Stuff jumbo pasta shells or manicotti, cover with 30-minute pasta tomato sauce and a little more Parmesan or Romano cheese then bake. Another sauce you can use is this meat sauce, my bison bolognese recipe for a rich and hearty winter dish.
    • Fill an omelet (it's delicious!).
    • Make a baked pasta casserole, tossing the ricotta filling with cooked penne or fusilli and cooked ground beef or turkey, topping with some grated mozzarella cheese and baking.
    • Use it as a ricotta filling for lasagna topped with marinara sauce.
    • Fill savory crepes (for gluten-free, try buckwheat or cassava flour crepes).
    • Make lasagna rolls. Cook lasagna noodles, trim a little of the length, put a few tablespoons on one end and roll up. Place in a casserole, top with sauce and cheese and bake.
    • Mix with spaghetti squash threads and stuff back into the squash for baking, covered with aluminum foil (vegetarian and meat options). Make it vegetarian, or add finely chopped sweet Italian sausage or browned ground meat of choice.
    • Ricotta toast. Make garlic toast in the oven with gluten-free bread or baguette slices, top with a few spoonfuls of the ricotta filling, and enjoy along side a big green salad or cut into bite-sized pieces for appetizers. For breakfast, top with poached or fried egg.
    • Make a white pizza spreading the filling over homemade pizza crust, topping with sliced tomatoes, and baking.
    • Make lemon ricotta pasta by adding fresh lemon zest to the filling and tossing it with your favorite hot cooked pasta noodle.

    Finished ricotta cheese filling keeps up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. This is not something I recommend freezing as the texture changes.

    Chef's Tip: If you use this ricotta filling for manicotti or jumbo shells, you can pipe it in with a pastry bag fitted with a large open tip (not a star tip).

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you thicken ricotta filling?

    There are several ways to thicken ricotta filling. One is to place the filling in a fine strainer over a bowl and allow excess liquid to drain off. Another way is to line the strainer with cheesecloth. Yet another way is to add a thickener such as cornstarch or arrowroot starch. Start with 2-3 teaspoons and allow it to stand for 15-20 minutes.

    How do you make store bought ricotta taste better?

    Ricotta is a mild tasting fresh cheese, so it readily takes on whatever flavors you want to add to it. Add fresh herbs, lemon juice and zest, olive oil, sauteed onions and garlic to make it savory, or honey for a sweetened ricotta spread. Try chopped sun dried tomatoes and olives. There are so many ways to make store bought ricotta more flavorful.

    Do I have to add egg to ricotta filling?

    No, you can use an egg substitute or for some recipes that may not need to binding capability of egg, skip it. Substitutes that help as a binder include making a flax egg, a little white chia seed, arrowroot starch mixed with water ( 1:1), or a commercial egg replacer product. Some egg substitutes have definitive flavor that may not work in all recipes, such as mashed banana or applesauce.

    More Italian Recipe Ideas

    Try a few of these recipes when you are in the mood for Italian-inspired recipes and flavors.

    • shrimp fra diavolo
      Spicy Shrimp and Pasta (Shrimp Fra Diavolo)
    • Ribollita in a gray pot.
      Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
    • A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.
      One Pan Italian Chicken Thighs
    • A plate of crispy golden chicken parmesan with pasta sauce and cheese.
      Easy Chicken Parmesan Cutlets

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Ricotta cheese spinach filling in a bowl on the counter.

    Best Ricotta Cheese Filling Recipe with Spinach

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy ricotta, spinach, Parmesan, and herbs mix up for a terrific ricotta cheese filling recipe usable in many ways. See ideas in the notes below.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Filling, Main Course, pasta
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 6 to 8 (Yield 4 cups)
    Calories 249 kcal

    Equipment

    • Fry pan or saute pan
    • Fine sieve or strainer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound frozen chopped spinach
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ medium onion chopped
    • 2-3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ¾ teaspoon dried Italian seasoning
    • 15 ounce tub of ricotta cheese, full fat sub low fat
    • ¼ cup chopped fresh basil leaves
    • ¾ cup grated Parmesan Parmigiano-reggiano
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 pinch red pepper flakes optional
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook the spinach

    • Cook the spinach according to the directions on the bag. Put a small amount of water in a pot, bring to a boil, add the frozen spinach, add a lid to the pot, and turn to low. Cook 5-7 minutes until totally thawed.
    • Pour the cooked spinach into a fine mesh strainer and press the liquid out with the back of a large spoon over the sink. To get the spinach very dry, place it onto double layers of paper towels, top with more paper towels, and press with your hands. Repeat to get most of the water out. Chop to refine the spinach then place in a medium bowl.

    Make the filling

    • Heat a saute pan, fry pan or cast iron skillet over medium heat. When it's hot, add the olive, then add the chopped onion. Cook, stirring until soft, 2-3 minutes. Add the garlic and Italian seasoning, cook 1 minute longer.
    • Add the ricotta to the bowl with the spinach and stir together. Add the onion mixture, Parmesan, basil and eggs, mix until smooth. Add the salt, ground black pepper, and red pepper if using. The filling is ready to use. Filling will keep refrigerated and used within 4 days.

    Notes

    • Stuff pasta shells or manicotti and cover with 30-minute pasta sauce, then bake.
    • Fill an omelet (it's delicious!).
    • Make a baked pasta casserole, tossing with cooked penne and cooked ground beef or turkey, topping with more cheese and baking.
    • Use it as a ricotta filling for lasagna.
    • Fill savory crepes (for gluten-free, try buckwheat or cassava flour crepes).
    • Make lasagna rolls.
    • Mix with spaghetti squash threads and stuff back into the squash for baking (vegetarian and meat options).

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.75cupCalories: 249kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 17gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 456mgPotassium: 407mgFiber: 3gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 9441IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 374mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    09/22/2023 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.

    Looking for a quick, healthy breakfast that tastes like pumpkin pie? This pumpkin smoothie is thick, creamy, and full of pumpkin spice flavor. Made with canned pumpkin purée and simple, wholesome ingredients, it blends up in minutes and can easily be boosted with protein for a filling start to your day.

    A beautiful orange colored creamy pumpkin smoothie in a tall glass with a steel straw.

    Fall means pumpkin everything, and this pumpkin smoothie is one of my favorites. And it's a healthy pumpkin smoothie - creamy, spiced, and just sweet enough. Made with canned pumpkin and simple ingredients, it blends up in minutes for a delicious fall breakfast or snack post-workout.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Pumpkin Smoothie

    • Pumpkin pie flavor - Warm spices make it taste like dessert in a glass, but it's good for you.
    • Quick & nutritious - Blend it up in minutes.
    • Healthy & flexible - Dairy-free, gluten-free, and easy to customize with your favorite milk or add-ins.
    • Protein-ready - Boost it with protein powder or Greek yogurt for a filling pumpkin shake.

    If you enjoy pumpkin, try making homemade pumpkin seed milk, an excellent source of plant-based protein, healthy fat, and minerals like potassium and magnesium.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for a pumpkin smoothie on a marble counter.
    1. Milk - I use homemade almond milk, but any favorite brand works. For nut allergies, try oat milk, rice milk, or regular dairy milk. If your smoothie is too thick, add a splash of water.
    2. Pumpkin - Use canned pumpkin purée (100% pumpkin), not pumpkin pie mix. It's easy to keep on hand and blends smoothly.
    3. Flaxseed - Grind whole golden flaxseeds right before blending for the freshest flavor, or use pre-ground. They add healthy fat, protein, and fiber.
    4. Sweetener - Options include pumpkin stevia drops, pure maple syrup, sugar-free maple syrup with monk fruit (my go-to), or honey.
    5. Vanilla - A good quality vanilla extract or paste enhances the pumpkin spice flavor.
    6. Spices - Cinnamon, nutmeg, allspice, ginger, or clove - or simply use pumpkin pie spice for a classic flavor profile.
    7. Protein powder (optional) - Add 1-2 scoops of your favorite to make this a protein pumpkin smoothie. See my post on how to choose a protein powder for tips.

    For fun, make your own pumpkin pie spice blend starting with cinnamon and adding ground ginger, ground clove, and nutmeg.

    Chef's Tool Tip: Handheld grinders. Small handheld grinders are a handy kitchen tool. Use them for coffee beans, whole spices, nuts and seeds. I use one to grind my flaxseed each day and for whole black peppercorns.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vary the milks, spices, and sweeteners and customize your healthy pumpkin pie smoothie.
    • Add a little canned coconut milk for added creaminess and healthy fat.
    • For another protein powder option, try this vegan pure pumpkin protein powder. It's really good.
    • Other protein substitutions include plain yogurt or plain Greek yogurt, vanilla yogurt or vanilla Greek yogurt. Greek yogurt has twice the protein (then skip the vanilla extract).
    • For more creaminess, add a little frozen banana.
    A small glass bowl of whole golden flaxseed before grinding.

    How to Make Pumpkin Smoothie

    Golden ground flaxseed in a small hand-held grinder container.
    Step 1: Assemble all ingredients, grind flaxseed first if using whole seeds. Whole flax seed will not breakdown in the blender.
    Creamy orange pumpkin smoothie in a blender container.
    Step 2: Add all ingredients to high-speed blender and blend until smooth.

    Add a few ice cubes to smooth out your pumpkin smoothie if desired. If smoothies ever get to thick, add a little filtered water to thin down. Thicker smoothies fill you up longer, digest slower; thinner smoothies digest faster and you are not full as long.

    Chef's Tip: Pumpkin Power
    Pumpkin isn't just for pie - it's a nutrition powerhouse. The beta-carotene in its bright orange flesh converts to vitamin A, supporting healthy eyes, bones, teeth, and immune function. It's also rich in antioxidants and fiber (4 grams in just ½ cup). A pumpkin smoothie gives you all those benefits in a glass!

    Golden orange pumpkin smoothie in a glass with cinnamon sprinkled on top.

    Serving Suggestions

    Pour into a tall glass and enjoy right away. A pumpkin smoothie makes a quick fall breakfast, a refreshing post-workout refuel, or even a mini version for kids as a healthy after-school snack.

    Have leftover pumpkin purée? Transfer it to a glass airtight container and refrigerate for up to a week - perfect for making another round of smoothies.

    Pumpkin pie smoothie on the counter with a mini pumpkin and jar of pumpkin puree.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use pumpkin pie filling instead of puree?


    It's best to use pure pumpkin purée. Pumpkin pie filling has added sugar and spices, which makes it much sweeter and changes the texture. Pure pumpkin purée gives you control over sweetness and flavor. Check labels - the only ingredient should be pumpkin.

    What spices should I add to a pumpkin smoothie?

    Classic fall spices like cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, and clove are perfect. You can also use pumpkin pie spice (a blend of all of these) for convenience.

    Can I make pumpkin smoothies ahead of time?

    Yes, but they're best fresh. Store in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 24 hours. If it thickens, stir in a little water or re-blend with ice before drinking.

    What sweeteners work best in a pumpkin smoothie?

    Maple syrup, honey, or dates add natural sweetness. For low-sugar or keto options, try monk fruit syrup, liquid stevia (plain or pumpkin spice), or sugar-free maple syrup. Each one slightly changes the flavor, but maple pairs especially well with pumpkin.

    Is a pumpkin smoothie healthy?

    Yes. Pumpkin is low in calories, high in fiber, and rich in beta-carotene (vitamin A). When blended with milk or yogurt and optional protein powder, it makes a healthy, filling smoothie.

    More Pumpkin Recipes

    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake
    • black bean pumpkin soup
      Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
    • Peaking into a jar of freshly roasted pepitas with olive oil and salt.
      What Are Pepitas and How to Roast Them
    • Pumpkin tart
      Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Healthy Pumpkin Smoothie Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Smooth and creamy with warm spices, a little vanilla, and of course, pumpkin. This smoothie tastes like liquid pumpkin pie. Puree it all in a blender and you have a nutritious smoothie for a healthy fall breakfast.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk 1 ¼ cups
    • ⅓ cup canned pumpkin puree
    • 1-2 tablespoons flaxseed, ground
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup or monk fruit maple syrup or liquid pumpkin stevia drops
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon or blend of warm spices cinnamon, nutmeg, allspice, clove, ginger
    • 1-2 scoops protein powder of choice 20-25 grams

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place all ingredients in blender and puree until smooth and creamy. If it gets too thick add a little water.

    Notes

    • Dessert for breakfast? Why not. The pumpkin spice stevia drops are made by SweetLeaf, or use regular maple syrup. This keto maple syrup is terrific and what I now use to reduce sugar. It tastes terrific so why not reduce the sugar.
    • Instead of individual spices you can use pumpkin spice blend. If it gets too thick, add water and blend.
    • The protein levels in this smoothie will vary depending on what you use and how much. 
    • If you want it even creamier and richer with some healthy fat, add 2 tablespoons of canned coconut milk. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 29gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 420mgPotassium: 330mgFiber: 6gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 12796IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 498mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pumpkin Mousse (Easy No-Bake Dessert)

    10/20/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.

    Skip the crust, keep the flavor. This easy pumpkin mousse is light, fluffy, and full of warm pumpkin spice - like pumpkin pie in a glass. With no baking required, it's the perfect make-ahead dessert for Thanksgiving or any fall gathering.

    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse with a spoon and cinnamon.

    I've made this creamy pumpkin mousse many times for family, friends, and even catering clients - it's always a hit. The best part? You can make it a day ahead, so dessert is done and off your holiday checklist early. Using canned pumpkin purée keeps it simple without sacrificing flavor, and the texture is divine.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Pumpkin Mousse

    • Perfect for fall & Thanksgiving - all the pumpkin pie flavor without the crust.
    • Light & airy texture - creamy, fluffy, and refreshing after a big meal.
    • No-bake pumpkin mouse - quick to prepare, no oven needed, easy to chill ahead.
    • Lighter than pie - fewer carbs, simple ingredients, same cozy flavor.
    • Make it ahead - Make it a day ahead to save time.

    Love pumpkin? Toasted pumpkin seeds are easy to make in minutes and a great add to salads and soups for garnish. They are addictive!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    The light, fluffy pumpkin mousse makes a refreshing alternative to pumpkin pie. And unlike many recipes, there's no cream cheese or boxed pudding mix here - just simple, from-scratch ingredients for pure flavor.

    Ingredients for pumpkin mousse in glass bowls.
    • Gelatin: Get the unflavored type.
    • Eggs: You only need the egg yolks. Save the egg whites for other recipes.
    • Sweetener: Sugar or monk fruit for low carb and special diets.
    • Pumpkin: Read the label and buy plain pumpkin puree, not pumpkin pie filling.
    • Spices: Cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, and ground clove.
    • Cream: Heavy cream or heavy whipping cream: they are the same. Say no to that tub of fake food whipped topping! Homemade whipped cream is the best.
    • Vanilla: Get good vanilla extract or vanilla paste.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Dairy-Free Pumpkin Mousse
    When I first created this recipe, good non-dairy whipping options didn't exist. Now there are several! Coconut cream and plant-based heavy cream alternatives can both work, as long as they whip up stiff like dairy cream. The texture might be a little different, but you'll still get that light, fluffy mousse and wonderful flavor.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Spices - Swap individual spices for a pre-made pumpkin pie spice blend.
    • Gelatin - Use silver gelatin leaves (170 bloom strength) in place of powdered gelatin.
    • Sweeteners - Replace sugar with monk fruit, stevia drops, or sugar-free maple syrup for a low-carb pumpkin mousse. Maple syrup or honey add natural sweetness.
    • Fun garnishes - Sprinkle crushed gingersnaps or graham crackers on top, or layer them in the bottom of your serving glasses before adding the mousse.

    If you prefer a crust, try this gluten-free pumpkin tart. It has a press-in cookie-type crust versus a roll out pastry crust. It's wonderful and easy to make.

    Chef's Tip: Setting Up a Double Boiler
    Fill a saucepan with a few inches of water and bring it to a gentle simmer. Place a heatproof glass or stainless-steel bowl on top, making sure it fits snugly but doesn't touch the water. This gentle, indirect heat is perfect for cooking egg yolks (or melting chocolate) without scrambling or scorching.

    How to Make Pumpkin Mousse

    Softening gelatin with water in a stainless steel bowl.
    Step 1: Soften the powdered gelatin in cold water (called blooming) to make it usable. See recipe card for using leaf gelatin.
    Adding egg yolks and sugar to a bowl with gelatin.
    Step 2: Add egg yolks and sugar.
    Stainless steel bowl with yellow egg yolks and a whisk.
    Step 3: Whisk yolks and sugar until smooth (it's sticky and heavy).
    Cooking egg yolks with sugar to 165°F on stovetop.
    Step 4: Cook by whisking on the stovetop over a double boiler (note below) until it reaches 165°F. About 5 minutes.
    Cooling cooked egg yolks with a hand mixer in motion.
    Step 5: Cool the cooked mixture with an electric mixer; hand mixer or standing mixer, about 3 minutes.
    Beating canned pumpkin into the cooked egg yolks and sugar.
    Step 6: Beat in the pumpkin, spices and vanilla until smooth. Refrigerate until cold, about 1 hour.
    Whipping heavy cream in the bowl of a mixer.
    Step 7: Whip the cream on high speed until stiff peaks form.
    Beating together whipped cream and pumpkin mixture.
    Step 8: Add whipped heavy cream and chilled pumpkin mixture together. The pumpkin mousse is ready.

    Chef's Tip - Sweeten and Stiffen Your Whipped Cream:
    If your whipping cream isn't holding peaks as firmly as you'd like, try this trick before folding in the pumpkin base. Add a tablespoon or two of sifted powdered sugar to stiffen, sweeten and stabilize the whipping cream. It works great. For a lower sugar option use powdered allulose. This also makes the mousse sturdy enough to pipe for a prettier presentation.

    Creamy orange pumpkin mousse in a disposable piping bag with star tip.

    If you like pumpkin, try this creamy polenta with pumpkin. It might sound like a crazy combination but it is terrific. Top with poached eggs for breakfast or browned sausage for dinner. Leftovers re-heat beautifully.

    How to Pipe Pumpkin Mousse

    1. Fit an 18" piping bag with a large plain or star tip.
    2. Stand the bag in a tall container (like a blender container or vase) for support.
    3. Fold the top of the bag down a few inches to make a collar. Spoon the pumpkin mousse into the bag.
    4. Twist the top closed and secure with a rubber band. Refrigerate until ready to serve.
    5. When serving, snip off the tip of the bag to expose the piping tip. Hold the bag with your dominant hand (I twist with my right), apply gentle pressure, and pipe the mousse into glasses or bowls.

    Chef's Tip: Piping makes serving cleaner, faster, and so much prettier than spooning mousse into glasses. I squeeze with my right hand and guide the bag with my left (I'm right-handed).

    Looking into a dessert glass of pumpkin mousse.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve pumpkin mousse in a variety of ways.

    • In glasses - Pipe or spoon the mousse into stemmed glasses for a more elegant look, or use simple tumblers for a casual presentation.
    • In pastry shells - Fill cream puffs or mini pastry shells with pumpkin mousse for a fun bite-size dessert.
    • Make-ahead ease - Use a piping bag to portion the mousse ahead of time. Cover and chill until serving for a stress-free dessert.

    Optional Garnishes

    • Whipped cream - A classic finishing touch.
    • Warm spices - Sprinkle with cinnamon or nutmeg for extra pumpkin pie flavor.
    • Cookie crunch - Crushed amaretti, gingersnaps, or graham crackers add texture.
    • Sweet drizzle - A ribbon of maple syrup (regular or sugar-free) makes it decadent.
    • White chocolate - Finely grated or zested white chocolate adds a pretty, elegant finish (like in the photos).
    • Parfait-style - If you want to get fancier, make it into a pumpkin mousse trifle by layering into glasses with the crushed cookies.

    If you like a parfait, here is a yogurt and berry breakfast parfait good year round.

    Chef's Tip: Piping Mousse (and More)
    Disposable piping bags make storing and serving soft fillings a breeze. I recommend an 18" bag fitted with a large star tip (#823-#869). These are bigger than the ones you usually find in stores, but easy to order online or from a restaurant/pastry supply. I use them for mousse, the best deviled eggs, and even fancy mashed potatoes. Once you try it, you'll never go back to spooning.

    A tray of 6 pumpkin mousse desserts ready to serve.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is pumpkin mousse the same as pumpkin pie?

    Not quite. Pumpkin mousse has the same cozy flavor but a lighter, airy texture and no crust. Pumpkin pie is baked and more dense, while mousse is a no-bake dessert that's refreshing after a big meal.

    Can I make pumpkin mousse ahead of time?

    Yes! In fact, it's better when chilled. Make it a day ahead and store in an airtight container or a disposable piping bag fitted with a large tip. Refrigerate until serving, then pipe or spoon into glasses.

    What spices are best in pumpkin mousse?

    Classic fall spices like cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, and clove work beautifully. You can also add cardamom or star anise for depth, or simply use pumpkin pie spice blend for convenience.

    More Delicious Pumpkin Recipes

    Looking for more pumpkin recipes? Try some of these delicious ideas.

    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • black bean pumpkin soup
      Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake
    • Pumpkin tart
      Pumpkin Tart (Gluten-Free Almond Flour Crust)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.

    Pumpkin Mousse Dessert Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, rich and light-textured, make this pumpkin mousse a day ahead and have dessert ready to go. Serve in small dishes or glasses. Spoon it or pipe it for a pretty effect. Make this with powdered monk fruit blend for a sugar-free, low-carb dessert. See notes below recipe.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Chilling 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 334 kcal

    Equipment

    • Electric hand mixer
    • 18" disposable piping bag optional
    • Large star or plain tip for piping bag optional for piping
    • Whisk

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ teaspoons unflavored gelatin or 2 silver leaf gelatin 170 bloom leaves
    • 1 ½ tablespoons cold water
    • 3 large egg yolks
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar or powdered monk fruit, or half and half.
    • 1 15 ounce can pumpkin puree not pumpkin pie filling
    • ¾ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ¼ teaspoon ground ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground clove
    • 1 ½-2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ cups heavy whipping cream very cold, well chilled

    Optional Garnishes

    • a little extra whipped cream
    • a sprinkle of cinnamon or nutmeg
    • crushed amaretti or ginger cookies
    • a cinnamon stick
    • shaved or zested white chocolate

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook Pumpkin Base

    • For powdered gelatin, sprinkle over 1 ½ tablespoons cold water in a medium bowl to soften for 1 minute. For leaf gelatin, cut leaves into small pieces and soak in 2 tablespoons cold for 5 minutes.
    • Into the bowl, whisk in egg yolks and sugar until smooth. Set the bowl over a saucepan of simmering water (water bath). Cook egg mixture, whisking constantly, until a digital kitchen thermometer reads 165°F, about 5 minutes. Tilt bowl to facilitate easier measuring of the temperature.

    Cool Pumpkin Base

    • Remove the bowl from pan and with a hand electric mixer (or standing mixer), beat egg mixture until cool and thickened, about 3 minutes. Mixture will be sticky. Beat in pumpkin, spices, and vanilla. Beat in the canned pumpkin until smooth. Cover pumpkin base and chill in the refrigerator until thickened and cool, about 1 hour.
      Note: you can do this step the day ahead. The base will firm up, so whisk it by hand to loosen it up, then add to whipped cream.

    Whip Cream, Finish Mousse

    • In a large stainless steel bowl with clean beaters, beat cold cream until it holds stiff peaks. To finish mousse, gently fold into pumpkin mixture by hand or quickly beat it in with the mixer.

    To Serve

    • To serve mousse right away, spoon or pipe into stemmed glasses , glass ramekins, or small jars.
      Make the pumpkin mousse several hours ahead—or up to one day in advance. Spoon into serving glasses, cover each with plastic film, and chill until set and firm, about 3 hours. The mousse will thicken as it chills. Before serving, remove the plastic and garnish as desired.

    Optional Piping Directions

    • Transfer mousse to a large disposable pastry bag fitted with a large star tip (see below) and pipe into stemmed glasses. Alternatively spoon into glasses or small bowls.

    Notes

    For the spices, you can use pumpkin spice blends if preferred.
    What's a large star piping tip? It's in the 823 to about 865 sizes, look at this one for reference.
    Monk Fruit Tips:
    Using granular monk fruit keeps this low-carb and almost zero sugar. If you use natural granulated sugar, each serving has 27 grams of sugar (27 carbs). If you go half and half, it's about 13 grams of sugar/carbs per serving.
    If you use all monk fruit blend it is only 2 ½ carbs per serving and tases the same. Use the powdered monk fruit blend to make it more "pipe-able" as the powdered version gives it body. The granular monk fruit comes out a bit softer. 
    Chef’s Tip — Sturdier Whipped Cream:
    Lightly sweeten the cream before folding it in. A spoon or two of powdered allulose (or powdered sugar) both sweetens and helps it hold peaks—great if you want a mousse firm enough to pipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 334kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 4gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gCholesterol: 159mgSodium: 23mgPotassium: 71mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 27gVitamin A: 1024IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 54mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese

    08/18/2023 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.

    Refreshing watermelon basil salad with feta cheese is the perfect summer salad. With the sweetness of the watermelon, tangy salty feta cheese, crisp cucumber, and fragrant basil the flavor combination is summer magic. Make it in minutes and serve chilled on a hot day tossed with a honey-lime vinaigrette at serving. This is the recipe that turned me from a watermelon liker to a watermelon lover. Give it a try.

    Colorful watermelon salad with feta, shallots, basil, and cucumber.

    With extra cut watermelon in the fridge, plus cucumber and basil in my garden, and cheese in the fridge, this watermelon salad recipe came together in minutes. If the combo sounds strange, it really works with sweet, tart, salty, tangy flavors. It's got it all. I think you'll enjoy this version of a watermelon feta basil salad recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A perfect summer side dish.
    • The best part, no cooking!
    • Uses peak summer seasonal produce.
    • Super easy recipe, made in minutes.

    For another easy, refreshing summer salad with simple ingredients, make this cucumber and mint salad.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for a refreshing watermelon salad.
    • Watermelon: Get a mini ripe watermelon or store-cut watermelon. Seedless watermelon works best. If you get a bigger watermelon and have extra, make this Mexican watermelon juice. Delicious!
    • Cucumber: I prefer the small Persian cucumbers for their crisp texture and sweet taste but an English cucumber works too.
    • Aromatics: Either shallot or crisp red onion, and add some green onion if you like.
    • Cheese: Use either Greek feta cheese or goat cheese, crumbles or cubes.
    • Fresh Herbs: Fresh basil is my choice for this salad, for flavor and the beautiful green ribbons, but mint is terrific as is cilantro.
    • Lime juice: Gives the tart lime vinaigrette a little sweetness for balance.
    • Oil: Choose extra virgin olive oil, or for fun, use a lime olive oil or basil olive oil.
    • Honey: Just a little sweet to balance the tart lime juice, or try this no-sugar honey.

    For measurements please see the recipe card. For help on how to cut watermelon, read this post and see the step-by-step photos. You'll also find information on how to choose a good watermelon.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add diced avocado for it's buttery flavor and texture.
    • For a different vinaigrette dressing, use balsamic vinegar instead of the lime juice, or lemon juice.
    • Drizzle with a balsamic reduction (aka balsamic glaze) and just squeeze on some lime.
    • Another terrific addition is brined black kalamata olives, either whole or sliced.
    • Add raw pine nuts for more crunch and a buttery tase.

    To make a homemade balsamic glaze, see this recipe for balsamic reduction.

    Recipe Instructions

    If you have a container of pre-cut watermelon pieces, spread them out on a cutting board and cut the pieces into smaller pieces if the chunks are large. Something bite-sized is better. If you have a whole watermelon, start here.

    Whisking golden colored vinaigrette in a glass measuring cup.
    Step 1: Whisk vinaigrette together in a small bowl; taste and adjustment with more salt or honey.
    Cutting watermelon slices into cubes.
    Step 2: Cut watermelon into bite-sized cubes with a sharp knife.
    Cucumbers on a black cutting board cut in different ways.
    Step 3: Chop cucumber into desired shape and size.
    How to cut feta cheese into cubes for salad.
    Step 4: Cut feta into small cubes.
    Bright green basil leaves on a black cutting board.
    Step 5: Roll basil leaves into a cylinder and slice crosswise into ribbons.
    Red watermelon cubes in a glass bowl.
    Step 6: Add watermelon cubes to a bowl.
    Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
    Step 7: Add melon, cucumber, and shallot to a bowl. Scatter the feta cheese over the top and mix gently. Add basil leaves and serving dressing on the side.

    Recipe Tips

    Here are a few tips for making this watermelon basil salad.

    • If making ahead to save time, do your prep work and keep the ingredients separated, covered, and refrigerated. Assemble when ready to serve. For example, prep in the morning and toss to serve for dinner.
    • When prepping ahead, drain the watermelon before combining if needed. It might get juicy as it stands.
    • Serve dressing on the side, so any extra un-dressed salad is still good a day or two longer.

    Serving Suggestions

    Watermelon basil salad is a great summer side dish for just about anything such as grilled meats and grilled chicken, rotisserie chicken, burgers and summer bbq, and grilled vegetables. Fresh basil leaves or fresh mint leaves make lovely garnish.

    Try the salad without the dressing and add if you wish. It's so good by itself, we don't usually use the dressing.

    Chef's Tip on red onions: If you're using red onions in the recipe, a good trick to tame their pungency is to thinly slice them them soak them in cold water for 10-15 minutes, then drain, dry and use in your salad. Works great. If you have a strong shallot, do the same.

    Recipe FAQs

    What cheese goes well with watermelon?

    A mild, salty Greek feta is a classic paring with sweet watermelon. The sweet and salty flavors really compliment each other. A mild goat cheese works equally as well. Add the cheese either cubed or crumbled to chunks of watermelon, add herbs, lime juice, maybe a little onion and you have a delightful watermelon salad.

    How do you cut a watermelon salad?

    For the freshest watermelon salad, start with a whole watermelon. Mini watermelons are easier to handle. Start by cutting a small piece off of one end, then stand the watermelon flat on the end for stability. Slice in half top to bottom with a big chef's knife or watermelon knife. From there, cut slices, trim off the rind, and cut a grid pattern in bite-sized pieces.

    Can you eat watermelon and cheese?

    Absolutely! Watermelon and cheese are a terrific combination because of the sweet and salty flavors, plus crisp and creamy textures (depending on the cheese). Feta cheese is popular and goat cheese can be used as well. Use this combination to make a watermelon feta salad, or serve cheese alongside slices of watermelon on a platter, scattered with fresh chopped herbs such a basil or mint.

    More Refreshing Summer Recipes

    Beat the heat and still love what you eat!

    • Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.
      Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter
    • Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.
      Fresh Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe
    • watermelon goat cheese appetizers
      Summer Watermelon Goat Cheese Appetizer
    • Fruit kabobs with watermelon, cantaloupe, and honeydew melons.
      Fruit Kabobs With Melon

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.

    Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese

    Sally Cameron
    A refreshing summer salad with the sweetness of watermelon, tangy salty feta cheese, crisp cucumber, and fragrant basil. The flavor combination is summer magic, and easy to make.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 361 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cutting board
    • Chef's knife

    Ingredients
      

    Vinaigrette

    • ¼ cup extra virign olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons fresh squeezed lime juice
    • 1 teaspoon mild honey or no-sugar honey optional
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt

    Watermelon salad

    • 4-5 cups watermelon cubes half a mini watermelon
    • 2-3 small Persian cucumbers or half an English cucumber
    • 4 ounces feta or goat cheese cut into cubes or crumbled
    • 1 large shallot thinly sliced crosswise into rings or ¼ of a red onion, sliced thin
    • 5-6 large fresh basil leaves

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make vinaigrette (makes extra)

    • Whisk all ingredients together in a small bowl or glass measuring cup until smooth. You can also add ingredients to a jar, cap tightly, and shake well. Taste the vinaigrette and adjust seasoning with more salt or honey.

    Watermelon salad

    • Cube watermelon into bite-sized pieces, about ¾". Depending on the type and size of cucumbers, if using small Persian cucumber, slice in half lengthwise then cut crosswise into half circles. If they are really small, just cut crosswise into small circles.
      For an English or larger cucumber, quarter the cucumber lengthwise, trim out seedy center, then chop into large or small pieces.
      Roll basil leaves together into a cylinder then chop thinly crosswise into ribbons.
      For the cheese, either cube or crumble the feta, or crumble the goat cheese. Serve vinaigrette on the side, or if preferred, toss with 2 tablespoons to start, then serve rest on the side.

    Notes

    Fun substitutions and variations:
    • Swap fresh herbs, mint is terrific, or try cilantro, or blend them.
    • For a different vinaigrette dressing, use balsamic vinegar instead of the lime juice.
    • Drizzle with a balsamic reduction (aka balsamic glaze) and just squeeze on some lime.
    • Another terrific addition is brined black kalamata olives, either whole or sliced.
    • Add raw pine nuts for more crunch and a buttery tase.
    • For a no-sugar option on honey, try this no-sugar honey, it's terrific.
    •  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 361kcalCarbohydrates: 48gProtein: 10gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 333mgPotassium: 672mgFiber: 2gSugar: 38gVitamin A: 3246IUVitamin C: 49mgCalcium: 45mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Sautéed Mixed Vegetables Recipe

    08/19/2012 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Summer vegetable medley

    This easy sautéed mixed vegetables recipe became a family favorite when clients asked for it three times in one week. It's a delicious side dish and a healthy recipe. It makes the most of abundant summer zucchini, corn and sweet peppers, plus I've added ideas to vary the vegetable mix by season. Fresh herbs give it even more flavor. Add this to your easy recipes file.

    Colorful summer vegetables medley of corn, pepper, zucchini.

    The combination of zucchini, sweet corn and sweet bell peppers really hit the spot for my clients. They could not get enough of it. No matter how much I cooked, they ate it all. If you have a hard time getting your family to eat vegetables, try mixed vegetables. It's a great way to make vegetables more interesting, plus it offers lots of colors, textures, and flavors.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    You need the following. See measurements on the recipe card.

    • Fresh corn 
    • Zucchini (baby zucchini or small regular)
    • Red bell pepper
    • Orange bell pepper
    • Extra-virgin olive oil
    • Shallot minced, chopped fine (or use onion)
    • Garlic cloves, chopped fine
    • Fresh herbs
    • Salt
    • Black pepper (or red pepper)

    Ingredient Tips and Swaps

    I use fresh veggies, but if you can't get all fresh, use frozen to fill in the gaps.

    • Corn: if fresh is not available, buy organic frozen kernels
    • Zucchini: use the baby ones or small to medium zucchini
    • Shallot: use sweet onions or red onion
    • Optional fresh herbs: try parsley, oregano, tarragon or cilantro (coriander leaves)
    • Instead of shallot, swap in sweet onions
    • For bell peppers, use a yellow bell pepper or even green
    • No fresh garlic? Use a little garlic powder

    Varying Seasonal Vegetables

    I created this recipe in summer, but you can vary the recipe using different vegetables to work year round. The goal is to get healthy dinners on the table. Next time, try adding:

    • Cooked green peas
    • Small chopped broccoli florets
    • Cooked carrots chopped into small cubes
    • Cooked lima beans
    • Cooked french beans or green beans, chopped small (across)
    • Small bits of cooked squash or sweet potatoes
    Fresh zucchini on a cutting board with shallots.

    How to Cut up Zucchini

    For the zucchini, I like to use the baby version when available but regular small zucchini works fine. If using baby zucchini, trim off the stem and cut whole ones on the diagonal.

    Slice regular size zucchini lengthwise into quarters, then trim out the seedy centers and cut on the diagonal into about ½″ wide (1 ½ cm) pieces.

    Slicing bell peppers.
    Slice off the top, the slice down on side.

    How To Cut Up a Bell Pepper

    Cutting up vegetables like bell peppers is a challenge. Here's to handle them. Cut off the top and bottom. Stand the pepper up and cut a slice through the side to open it up. Remove the large seed core.

    Chopping bell peppers into strips.
    Open up the pepper, lay flat, and slice out the ribs. Cut into strips.

    Lay the pepper flat and holding your knife parallel to  the cutting board, trim out the ribs and seeds that are left. From here, cut the pepper into long thin slices. Lay them together, then cut across creating a perfect dice.

    Chopping peppers into small pieces.
    Chop the strips in small cubes or squares.

    How to Cut Corn From the Cob

    For the corn, remove the husk and silk, then drop into boiling salted water for three minutes. Remove the corn and drain on a kitchen towel. With a sharp knife, cut the cob in half to make it more manageable. Stand the cob on end, then cut the kernels from the cob into strips and set aside.

    Slicing corn off of the cob.
    Cut the cob in half, stand on end and slice off kernels.

    Instructions

    Once the prep work is done (which you can do ahead of time), this cooks up quickly for a healthy side dish. All of the vegetables get a quick sauté over medium heat with a little olive oil, some chopped shallot and garlic. Lastly, mix vegetables.

    Fresh herbs make a nice finish but are optional. A nonstick skillet or large cast iron fry pan works fine. I like the vegetables cooked quickly so they are crisp tender, but cook them to your preference.

    Finished vegetables in individual crocks.

    How to Serve

    This makes a great side dish for whole roast chicken, roast bone-in chicken breasts, grilled chicken or burgers. Just about anything.

    And if your family will eat anything as long as it has Parmesan cheese on it, toss the mixed vegetables at the end with finely grated Parmesan or shower it over the top of the veggies.

    Those cute little mini pots are called cocottes, from Le Creuset, available on Amazon in many colors. So fun to serve side dishes and individual portions in.

    Leftovers

    Leftovers are good the next day. Refrigerate in an airtight container. Scramble with eggs or fold into an omelet, or just warm them up again.

    More Vegetable Recipes

    If your family likes green beans, here are 12 ways to dress them up to keep things interesting. Ever tried roasting broccoli? Serve it here with lemon and Parmesan. If you have lots of zucchini, try grilling it.

    📖 Recipe

    mixed vegetables in little pots | afoodcentriclife.com

    Colorful Summer Vegetable Medley

    Sally Cameron
    This easy vegetable side dish takes the saying "eat your colors" to a new level, with zucchini, corn and sweet red peppers. Add chopped fresh herbs if desired. Serve with roast chicken, steak, pork or tossed with pasta or quinoa for a vegetarian/vegan option.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish, vegetables
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 67 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large saute or fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 large ears of fresh corn, husked and silk removed or 1 cup thawed frozen kernels
    • 1 pound zucchini baby zucchini or regular
    • 1 red bell pepper
    • 1 orange bell pepper
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 large shallot or small onion chopped fine
    • 2 garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped herbs parsley, oregano or tarragon, optional
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Vegetable prep work

    • Bring a large pot of water to a boil. When the water boils, drop corn cobs in and boil for 3 minutes. Remove corn and drain on a kitchen towel. When corn is cool enough to handle, cut the kernels from the cobs in long strips and set aside.
      Alternatively thaw frozen corn kernels and cooked according to package directions.
    • While you are cooking the corn, prep your zucchini and peppers. For the zucchini, trim off the ends, then cut into approximately ½″ ( 1 ½ cm) slices on the diagonal. If using baby zucchini, cut them crosswise into pieces.
      If using regular sized zucchini, cut into long quarters, slice out the seedy centers, then cut into pieces.
      For the bell peppers, cut off the tops and bottoms, cut out the seeds and membranes, slice into long thins strips, then chop into small cubes. Follow the photos in the post for help.

    Cooking

    • Heat olive oil in a large sauté pan over medium heat. When oil is hot, add the shallot and cook until soft, about 1 minute. Add the zucchini and cook for a few minutes, then add the garlic and bell peppers, stirring to combine. Continue to cook the vegetables until they are softened and browning. How long will depend on how crisp you like your vegetables. They cook pretty quickly.
      Towards the end, add the corn and heat through for a minute. Add any chopped fresh herbs if desired, salt and pepper, and serve hot.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 67kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 2gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 161mgPotassium: 337mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 1424IUVitamin C: 65mgCalcium: 20mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Hoisin Sauce

    06/10/2023 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    A glass jar with rich brown hoisin sauce and a whisk for mixing.

    Finally, a gluten-free hoisin sauce you can make at home in minutes with no cooking required. Gluten-free hoisin sauce is the perfect balance of sweet, salty, savory and sour, a marvelous sauce widely used in Asian cuisine. Use hoisin as a dipping sauce, a glaze or sauce. You've got to try it! Think of it like Asian barbeque sauce. Homemade beats the bottles.

    A jar of rich brown hoisin sauce in a jar with a silver whisk.

    My question was is hoisin sauce gluten-free? Surprised at what store-bought hoisin sauces labels revealed, I created my own gluten-free hoisin sauce recipe. It's the best! All of the flavor and thick texture I wanted without any lower quality ingredients like caramel color, added colors, modified corn starch, or gluten. Good bye bottles!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Easy to make, no cooking required with mostly pantry ingredients.
    • Versatile complex sauce: use it on ribs, chicken, shrimp, scallops, burgers, and as stir-fry sauce.
    • Gluten-free use tamari, which is simply gluten-free soy sauce.

    For another Asian-inspired sauce recipe, try this homemade gluten-free teriyaki sauce. Try gluten-free hoisin as a dipping sauce with these colorful vegetable spring rolls.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for hoisin sauce in glass bowls, ready to be blended.

    I've skipped an ingredient used in many traditional hoisin sauce recipes: fermented soybean paste. No miso paste or black bean paste. Why? I tested batches with it added and found they made a too salty sauce. While traditional, I liked it better without.

    Gluten-free hoisin has amazing rich flavor and lower sodium without bean paste, sweetness from honey rather than plum puree (and a lot of extra sugar), and rich color from soy sauce and molasses versus caramel color.

    • Tamari: wheat-free soy sauce. Choose the 50% reduced for lowest sodium. This is the brand of tamari I buy. Not concerned about gluten? Use regular soy sauce (low sodium).
    • Nut butter: gives this sauce it's its rich, creamy, thick texture and adds flavor. Tahini (sesame seed butter) is my top choice as it is creamy and has a more neutral flavor than other nut butters. Swaps below.
    • Molasses: a thick, dark brown syrup made during the sugar-making process, adds warm sweetness and rich, deep color to homemade hoisin. Get the unsulphured style. Molasses is why brown sugar is brown. Don't use blackstrap molasses; it's too bitter.
    • Sesame Oil: sesame oil adds rich flavor, and be sure to use toasted sesame oil for it's stronger flavor and deeper color.
    • Honey: adds sweetness, use a mild liquid style honey.
    • Tamarind: tamarind is a fruit-like legume with a wonderful sweet-sour taste. It's optional but worth finding. I use Glory Bee organic tamarind puree. It's pure and thick with no additives or seeds (like tamarind in block form). Find it at Whole Foods, ethnic markets and online. Tamarind is a staple in Indian, Mexican, African, Thai and Latin-American cuisines. It's sometimes labeled as tamarind paste.
    • Vinegar: use apple cider vinegar. It adds mild acidity and tang.
    • Chinese Five Spice: five spice is a marvelous, exotic spice blend. Often used are szechuan pepper or black pepper, cinnamon, clove, fennel, star anise or other warm spices. Blends vary. If you are a cinnamon fan, I bet you'll love Five Spice.
    • Garlic: using garlic powder is fine for gluten-free hoisin sauce (versus fresh garlic).

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Note: Hoisin sauce is from Cantonese cuisine, but it's use in Vietnamese, Japanese cuisines and other Asian-inspired dishes. If you've tried bottled Kikkoman hoisin sauce or Lee Kum Kee hoisin sauce, try this recipe for a homemade version.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Here are a few substitutions for my hoisin sauce recipe.

    • Swap nut butters: try creamy almond butter, cashew butter, or creamy peanut butter for the tahini. The flavors are a little different for each. I've made hoisin sauce with them all. Tahini is the most neutral tasting.
    • Swap unseasoned rice vinegar for the apple cider vinegar.
    • To reduce sugar or for vegans, sub this keto honey syrup for honey. It's terrific.
    • Another option is date syrup but I have not tested it.
    • Maple syrup is a substitute, but the flavor will be a little different.

    Chef's Tip: five spice is a marvelous, exotic spice blend. Try it wherever you'd use cinnamon, and it's great with chocolate! Try five spice in my chocolate energy smoothie or this recipe for chocolate pudding (chocolate pots de creme).

    Recipe Instructions

    How to make hoisin sauce? It couldn't be any easier. Measure and blend.

    Ingredients for sauce in a Pyrex glass measuring cup with a whisk for mixing.

    Step 1: Add all to a jar and shake or whisk until smooth. A quick blend on low with a blender works too. No cooking required to thicken, as the tahini makes it thick and creamy. That's it!

    Top down photo of deep brown hoisin in a jar after mixing.

    Chef's Tip: What else can you do with tamarind puree? Use it in jams, chutney's, condiments (like my gluten-free hoisin sauce), glazes, barbecue sauce, dressings, drinks and stir-fry dishes. It's adds bright sweet-tart flavor, sort of like lemons and sweet dates (if that makes sense). It's an ingredient in worcestershire sauce, if you like that flavor. Really, it's delicious!

    Serving Suggestions

    Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.

    ChIcken kabobs: Brush grilled chicken kabobs (above) with gluten-free hoisin sauce for beautiful color and fantastic flavor. Serve extra on the side as a dipping sauce.

    Baby back ribs: Gluten-free hoisin sauce is terrific on this oven baby back ribs recipe.

    Seared sea scallops with hoisin: Glaze seared jumbo sea scallops with hoisin or other seafood dishes like this easy sesame salmon.

    Gluten-free hoisin gets very thick when refrigerated (because of the nut butter). To thin for more of a glaze, add a little water until you get the consistency you desire. It will also thin if you gently heat it over low heat in a small pan. I don't recommend microwaving.

    Oven baby back ribs glazed with rich brown hoisin sauce in a cutting board.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is hoisin sauce gluten-free?

    Hoisin sauce is only gluten-free if you are using tamari, which is wheat-free soy sauce. Tamari tastes the same as soy sauce, just gluten-free. Read labels to be sure.

    Can teriyaki be substituted for hoisin?

    Teriyaki sauce can be a good hoisin sauce alternative in some recipes. They have a similar consistency, but different flavors. Both are delicious. Salty, savory soy sauce (or tamari) is the common lead ingredient for both sauces, and both contain sugar or other sweetener.

    Can you get gluten-free hoisin sauce?

    Yes, but not always. If you find it you can buy bottled gluten-free hoisin sauce but homemade is far better and simple to make. Plus you control the ingredients such as sodium level and sugar levels, both of which are super high in commercial brands.

    What is oyster sauce vs. hoisin sauce?




    In the Asian family of popular sauces, the flavor of oyster sauce is somewhere between fish sauce and soy sauce, as it is made with oysters, as well as sugar, MSG, caramel color, and wheat. Both are thick sauces with a syrupy texture and deep brown color, and both are widely used in Asian cooking. It might be a little fishy tasting for some palates, more of an acquired taste. Hoisin sauce does not have fish sauce (although you can add it if desired).

    More Delicious Sauce Recipes

    And be sure to check out the sauces and dressing category for more easy tasty ideas!

    • Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.
      Easy Homemade Italian Dressing
    • Bright red strawberry coulis (strawberry sauce), in a jar with a gold spoon.
      Fast and Fresh Strawberry Coulis
    • Homemade Mayonnaise| A FoodCentricLife.com
      Homemade Mayonnaise
    • Citrus mango sauce
      Creamy Mango Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass jar with rich brown hoisin sauce and a whisk for mixing.

    Homemade Hoisin Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Sweet, sour and savory all at once. Think of hoisin like ketchup or Asian barbecue sauce with a twist and it's gluten-free. Use it on chicken, scallops, shrimp, ribs, stir-fries, vegetables, burgers and cold Asian-style noodle salads. Holds for 30 days refrigerated.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine Asian
    Servings 8 Yield 1 cup
    Calories 129 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • ¼ cup low sodium gluten-free Tamari or low sodium soy sauce
    • ¼ cup tahini (sesame seed butter) swaps below
    • 3 tablespoons honey
    • 2 tablespoons molasses
    • 2 tablespoons sesame oil
    • 2 tablespoon jarred tamarind puree
    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or unseasoned rice vinegar
    • ¼-1/2 teaspoon Five Spice Powder aka Chinese five spice
    • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Combine all ingredients into a large measuring cup or bowl. Whisk until smooth. You could even toss all of the ingredients into a blender and whirl to blend. Taste, and if you want it sweeter add a little more honey. Store covered and refrigerated in a jar for 30 days.

    Notes

    Substitutions for tahini (sesame seed butter) include creamy cashew butter, creamy almond butter, or creamy peanut butter. Tahini blends in the best with its mild flavor.
    For less sugar (and vegans), use this keto honey made with monk fruit. 
    For tamari look for the 50% reduced style for lower sodium. 
    Gluten-free hoisin is very thick when cold after refrigeration, so depending on use you may need to thin. Use a little water. You can also warm it up on low heat in a small pan. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 129kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 2gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 293mgPotassium: 168mgFiber: 1gSugar: 12gVitamin A: 7IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 28mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies

    06/03/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.

    These rich and fudgy gluten-free chocolate brownies are so easy to make you'll never go back to a boxed mix. Skip the cocoa powder and use melted chocolate, the secret to this brownie recipe. No one would ever know they are gluten-free. Dairy-free brownies option too. Let's fix that chocolate craving!

    Sliced dark chocolate brownies in a square silver baking pan with one piece gone.

    Here's a decadent treat that hits all of your chocolate loving buttons. Gluten-free chocolate brownies; not too fudgy, but just right. Many brownie recipes use dutch-processed cocoa powder or natural cocoa powder for making brownies, but melted chocolate was a brownie game-changer for me in this recipe. It was love at first bite.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Intense chocolate flavor, fudgy texture.
    • Simple ingredients.
    • The best gluten-free brownies and you'd never guess.
    • Serve them simple or fancy.

    For another baked cake-like treat with chocolate chips, try this easy pumpkin brownies with chocolate chips. It's good year round.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for gluten-free brownies on the counter in glass bowls.
    • Chocolate: This brownie recipe uses melted chocolate instead of cocoa powder. Buy dark chocolate, either bar chocolate, block chocolate, or these organic chocolate pieces called gems. It's lovely, clean chocolate for snacking and baking, great to have on hand.
    • Vanilla extract: Be sure to use good quality real vanilla extract. Here's my favorite vanilla.
    • Fat: Oil or butter? Both work. Use unsalted butter, and let it sit out at room temperature before baking. For a dairy-free option use melted coconut oil (but see below). Gluten-free brownies are rich and decadent both ways. In fact the coconut oil version might be even fudgier (if that is a word!).
    • Sweetener: Choose either light brown sugar or golden monk fruit blend for less sugar.
    • Eggs: Eggs provide structure, act as a binder and leavener in baking, plus provide richness and moisture in brownie batter. Use large eggs.
    • Flour: Use a gluten-free blend with xanthan gum for structure.
    • Arrowroot starch: An easily digested starch that binds ingredients in gluten-free baking together and keeps baked good a little lighter.
    • Baking powder: Works as a natural leavener for baking gluten-free brownies.

    Please see the recipe card for exact measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you're coconut allergic, use avocado oil or a neutral oil like this. Another option is plant or vegan butter.
    • Sugar types: I tested gluten-free chocolate brownies with light brown sugar and coconut sugar. Another great option to reduce sugar is golden monk fruit blend.
    • For egg-free brownies, try substituting with flax eggs. For more ideas, read this article on egg substitutions. I have not tested gluten-free brownies using egg substitutes.
    • Enjoy coconut? Add shredded unsweetened coconut to the batter.
    • Want it even more chocolaty gluten-free brownies? Add dark chocolate chips.
    • Love nuts in your brownies? Fold in chopped walnuts or chopped pecans into the batter.

    Looking for another chocolate treat for your family? Chocolate bark bites are fun to make and bite-sized too.

    Chef's Tip: What's a double boiler? It's a bowl over a pot of simmering water. The bottom of the bowl should not touch the water. A double boiler creates gentle, indirect heat for melting sensitive things like chocolate. Read more here about using a double boiler. For microwave directions, see below.

    Recipe Instructions

    Before starting, be sure the butter and eggs are at room temperature. It makes a difference with baking.

    Set up: Grease or spray an 8x8 light colored metal square pan and line with a piece of baking parchment that goes over the side by a few inches. This will help you get the brownies out of the pan more easily. Pre-heat the oven to 325°F.

    Dry ingredients in a glass bowl for baking brownies.
    Step 1: Whisk together dry ingredients.
    Melting chocolate in a double boiler on the stovetop.
    Step 2: Melt chocolate in a double boiler over low heat on the stovetop. Microwave melting instructions below.

    Creaming butter and brown sugar in a glass bowl with a hand mixer.
    Step 3: With an electric mixer in a medium bowl, beat the soft unsalted butter and brown sugar together until fluffy and smooth (called creaming), then add eggs, then the dry mixture.
    Mixing chocolate brownie batter with an electric hand mixer in a glass bowl.
    Step 4: Add the melted, cooled chocolate to the batter and beat until smooth. Add vanilla. When batter is smooth, it's ready to pour.
    Brownie batter ready to pour into a light metal square baking pan for baking.
    Step 5: Scrape brownie batter into the prepared pan lined with parchment using a flexible spatula and sprayed with non-stick and bake for approximately 30 minutes.
    Baked brownies in the pan cooling for slicing.

    Step 6: Remove brownies from the oven, cool a few minutes in the pan, the with the help of the parchment wings, lift the gluten-free brownies out of the pan to a cooling rack. Allow them to cool before slicing. Resist cutting them right out of the oven!

    Chef's Note: To melt chocolate in the microwave, place the chocolate pieces or chopped chocolate in a clean, dry, glass bowl and microwave on 70% power for 1 minute. Stir with a flexible spatula or spoon, then continue melting chocolate in 15 second intervals, stirring between times, until chocolate is melted, smooth and glossy. Cool chocolate for 5 minutes, then stir in the vanilla and the melted butter or coconut oil until smooth. 

    Brownie Baking Tips

    Choose the Right Pan

    Metal pans: Bake the brownies in a light colored square baking pan. Light colored pans reflect the heat. Dark metal pans absorb and distribute heat more quickly than light colored pans, so the edges and bottom of the brownies will be more done than in a light metal pan.

    If you use a darker metal pan, watch your timing as darker pans bake more quickly. The results might be a little different.

    Slice gluten-free brownies on a cooling rack and one on a small plate for serving.

    Use Baking Parchment

    Use a piece of baking parchment paper cut to line the pan, allowing the edges to drape over the sides. This makes the brownies easier to get out of the pan after baking and cooling. It also protects the batter from the direct heat of the metal pan. I prefer parchment to aluminum foil.

    A stack of gluten-free brownies on a small plate, the top one has a bite out.

    Serving Suggestions

    Just a simple brownie all by itself is perfect for a casual dessert or snack. To dress gluten-free brownies for a served dessert:

    • Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream
    • For fancy brownies, pour a little easy strawberry coulis over the top
    • Drizzle melted chocolate on top and sprinkle on goodies like chopped nuts, coconut, or sprinkles.
    • Add frosting!
    Add a small scoop of vanilla ice cream to the top of brownies for a serving suggestion.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do brownies have gluten in them?

    Standard brownie recipes using white all-purpose flour (wheat flour) contain gluten as wheat contains gluten. Using gluten-free flours, it's easy to make gluten-free brownies that are fantastic. No one would ever know they are gluten-free; they are just delicious. You don't need gluten for great brownies.

    Can you freeze gluten free chocolate brownies?

    Yes, you can freeze gluten-free brownies. Properly wrapped and airtight they will be good for a couple of months.

    How long do gluten free brownies last in the fridge?

    Gluten-free brownies last about 5 days in the refrigerator, but I doubt they will last that long before being eaten. I store mine on the counter top for a few days in an airtight container and they stay moist and wonderful.

    Why don't my brownies have a crackly top?

    It depends on whether you are baking with white flour or gluten-free flour, how much you beat the batter, and the fat to flour ratio. With regular flour, the more beating, the more crackly top. With GF flours it's different. There's no gluten to beat. You still get delicious, moist, rich brownies, but they don't get crackly on top.

    More Fantastic Chocolate Recipes

    Try these chocolate chip meringue forgotten cookies that you leave in the oven overnight.

    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • A small plate of peanut butter protein balls, plain, and rolled in hemp seeds and coconut.
      Peanut Butter Protein Balls (No-Bake)
    • Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust
      Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart
    • bittersweet chocolate pudding
      Chocolate Pots de Creme (Dairy-Free)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these gluten-free chocolate brownies, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.

    Rich and Fudgy Gluten Free Chocolate Brownies

    Sally Cameron
    Gluten-free brownies are easy to make, skip the boxed mixes. This recipe uses melted chocolate instead of cocoa powder. Dairy-free option and variations at the end.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9
    Calories 328 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8x8 light colored metal baked pan
    • baking parchment paper
    • Electric hand mixer

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces dark chocolate chopped or use the gems
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ¾ cup light brown sugar packed, no lumps
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, room temperature or coconut oil, melted
    • 3 large eggs
    • 3 tablespoons gluten-free flour blend (with xanthan gum) or try teff flour
    • 2 tablespoons arrowroot starch
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Grease a square light metal baking pan (8x8-inch) with a spritz of non-stick spray or a little extra coconut oil. Cut a piece of parchment to line the pan draping it over two opposite sides of the pan by a few inches. The parchment overlap makes it easy to remove the brownies after baking. Pre-heat the oven to 325°F.

    Melt the chocolate (two options)

    • If using bar or block chocolate, chop the chocolate into small chunks with a serrated bread knife or heavy chef's knife.
      Double boiler method: Fill a medium pan with a few inches of water and bring to a simmer over medium heat. Place chopped chocolate in a stainless steel or glass bowl large enough to sit on top of the pan and fit a little inside without touching the simmering water. Turn heat down to low, add chocolate, and allow to slowly melt, stirring occasionally with a silicone spatula.
      Microwave method: See note at end of recipe.
      Cool melted chocolate for a few minutes and stir in the vanilla extract, then proceed with the recipe.

    Mix dry ingredients

    • Add the flour, arrowroot starch, baking powder and salt to a small bowl and whisk together.

    Make the batter

    • Place the brown sugar, soft butter or oil, and eggs in a large bowl and beat 2-3 minutes until smooth. Start at low speed and build up as needed. Add the dry ingredients into the bowl and beat well until smooth and incorporated. Next, beat in the melted chocolate with vanilla, increasing the speed as the batter stiffens. The batter will be thick.
      Note: As there is no gluten, do not worry about over-beating. It's actually good.

    Bake

    • Scrape the batter into the prepared baking pan and smooth evenly with a spatula. Bake for approximately 30 minutes, until the brownie surface is a little firm to the touch, but not hard. Cool brownies in the pan for 10 minutes. Grasp the parchment paper edges and lift out the brownies, transferring them to a wire cooling rack. Slice into 9 pieces when cool.

    Serving

    • Serve alone, or topped with ice cream with shaved chocolate, chopped nuts, shredded coconut, or even a strawberry coulis.

    Notes

    Buying chocolate
    For the dark chocolate, use bar chocolate, block chocolate, or the chocolate gems. Break the bars up with your hands, chop the blocks with a serrated knife, the gems are ready to go. 
    Microwave melting chocolate
    Place the chocolate pieces or chopped chocolate in a clean, dry, glass bowl and microwave on 70% power for 1 minute. Stir with a flexible spatula or spoon, then continue melting chocolate in 15 second intervals, stirring between times, until chocolate is melted, smooth and glossy. Cool chocolate for 5 minutes, then stir in the vanilla. 
    Gluten-free brownie variations:
    • Add ⅓ cup shredded unsweetened coconut to the batter.
    • Fold chopped walnuts or chopped pecans into the batter. Add ½-3/4 cup. 
    Recipe for easy fresh strawberry coulis right here. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 328kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 4gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 83mgSodium: 147mgPotassium: 231mgFiber: 3gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 333IUCalcium: 74mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Ground Meat Taco Recipe

    05/04/2023 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.

    Looking for a quick and delicious ground meat taco recipe that's ready in about 15 minutes-without those sodium-heavy, preservative-filled seasoning packets? This easy recipe uses my homemade taco seasoning blend for fresh, bold flavor you can feel good about. It works with ground beef, turkey, chicken, or pork, and makes a versatile taco filling that's perfect for meal prep, freezes beautifully, and tastes amazing in tacos, burritos, or taco salads.

    Savory spiced taco meat in a black cast iron skillet ready for tacos.

    If you've been searching for the perfect ground meat taco recipe, this is it. It's a mainstay in our house for both lunch and dinner, and it works whether you're gluten-free, low-carb, or neither. Serve it up in soft tortillas, crisp taco shells, lettuce wraps, or over a bed of greens as a taco salad-the possibilities are endless.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ground Meat Taco Recipe Hghlights

    • Fast & easy - Ready in about 15 minutes, perfect for busy weeknights.
    • Family-pleasing - Customize with your favorite toppings for everyone at the table.
    • Versatile - Works for soft tacos, crisp tacos, lettuce wraps, or taco salads.
    • Meal prep-friendly - Make a double batch and freeze half for quick dinners.
    • Budget stretcher - Add a can of rinsed and drained black or pinto beans to stretch a pound of meat.
    • Low-carb option - Naturally low in carbs when served in lettuce wraps or over greens.

    For another taco recipe try these spicy shrimp tacos.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Simple ingredients for taco meat with ground beef.
    • Ground meat: choose either ground beef (80/20 ground beef or 15/85 ground beef). Another options is ground turkey (93%), ground bison, or ground dark chicken. The meat needs some fat for flavor, so a higher fat content is fine.
    • Onion: use either white, brown or yellow onion, for flavor and moisture.
    • Oil: olive oil, avocado oil, or a neutral oil like this, they all work. Don't use vegetable oil, it's really unhealthy for you. If you have it, toss it.
    • Garlic: use fresh cloves of garlic for the best flavor.
    • Taco meat seasoning: make a batch of my homemade taco meat seasoning recipe. The store-bought taco seasoning packets work, but they are super high in sodium and added preservatives. Homemade is way better and it's controllable. If you never done it, make your own homemade seasoning.
    • Tomato paste: tomato paste adds a rich, savory flavor to taco meat. Swaps below.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities and all ingredients.

    Ground meat is so versatile and economical. For another dish with ground meat, try these baked turkey meatballs or ground beef meatballs. Serving options and sauce ideas in the post.

    Homemade taco seasoning blend in a glass jar.

    Homemade Taco Meat Seasoning (optional)

    You can use a taco seasoning packet but homemade taco seasoning is much better and you control the ingredients. Homemade is gluten-free, no mystery ingredients, and no cornstarch or crazy high sodium. Plus it's good with shrimp, chicken and other dishes too, not just tacos. It's got bold flavor with just a little heat. You need:

    • Dried oregano
    • Ancho chili powder
    • Ground cumin
    • Ground coriander
    • Smoked or regular paprika
    • Granulated garlic (sub garlic powder)
    • Chipotle chili powder (optional for heat, or sub cayenne pepper)
    • Ground black pepper

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    For another terrific homemade spice blend, try this all-purpose dry rub. I use it on ribs, chicken, rotisserie, salmon, and shrimp.

    Chef's Tip: When opening dried herbs and spices, be sure to date the jar. For the best flavor use within 6 months. For storage, place in a cool, dark place like a drawer or pantry, away from the heat of the stove and out of the light. Both degrade the flavors.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you're out of tomato paste, use ketchup or tomato sauce. You may need a bit more, use the taste test.
    • Add mild green chiles, either a small can of green chilies or fresh finely chopped chili such as a mild Anaheim or a green bell pepper.
    • Add hot chilies for heat with jalapeno chilie or serrano chile, or use your favorite hot sauce.

    How to Make Ground Taco Meat

    Sautéing chopped onions in a cast iron skillet.
    Step 1 Over medium heat, sauté onions in oil until soft and lightly golden in a large skillet, 1-2 minutes, then add garlic and cook another 30 seconds.
    After cooking onions, ad spice mix and tomato paste.
    Step 2 Stir in the taco meat seasoning plus a tablespoon of water and cook 1 minute.
    Add tomato paste to the pan and stir into the spices and onion.
    Step 3 Add the tomato paste and stir. If needed add another tablespoon of water.
    Adding the ground beef to the skillet for taco meat.
    Step 4 Add ground meat and cook, breaking it up with a wooden spoon, cooking until meat is no longer pink inside. If meat seems a little dry at the end, stir in a tablespoon of water.
    Finished juicy taco meat, rich brown from spices and tomato paste.

    Chef's Tip: Get your ground meat out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes ahead of time if possible. It is safe to do so and the meat breaks up easier when cooking and cooks a little faster because it is softer and not so cold.

    Ways to Enjoy Ground Taco Meat

    What makes a good taco? It's personal preference. Serve taco meat in corn tortillas or cassava tortillas for soft tacos, or butter lettuce leaves for a low-carb or paleo approach.

    For using taco meat burrito-style, use large size tortillas. Taco meat is super for burrito bowls and taco bowls too. Its versatile!

    Taco Garnishes

    For taco garnishes try:

    • Grated cheese (jack, cheddar, or a Mexican cheese)
    • Chopped cilantro
    • Chopped tomato
    • Chopped green onions
    • Thinly sliced cabbage or lettuce
    • Diced or sliced avocado
    • Homemade salsa verde
    • Sliced radishes
    • A dollop of sour cream
    • Pico de gallo
    • Pineapple-mango salsa

    And don't forget a wedge of fresh lime juice to squeeze over the top.

    Make taco meat ahead on a Sunday to use during the week. Leftover meat holds up to 4 days refrigerated and freezes great. Great for Taco Tuesday!

    10 Minute Turkey Taco Filling | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to drain ground beef before adding taco seasoning?

    It's better to not drain any rendered fat after cooking the ground beef, because fat carries flavor. It adds flavor and juiciness. A good fat level for ground beef for making tacos is 15% fat. There really isn't' any excess fat.

    How much meat is in 1 taco?

    Typically a taco provides approximately 2 ounces of cooked meat, along with optional garnishes such as grated cheese, finely sliced cabbage or lettuce, chopped tomatoes, and fresh cilantro.

    Do you season taco meat before or after browning?

    You can do it either way. Many recipes added the taco seasoning after cooking the meat. I add it before the meat, after cooking the onions in oil, to allow the spices to release their flavors and "bloom".

    More Mexican-Inspired Recipes

    For another great family recipe with ground meat try my bison bolognese meat sauce.

    • based Mexican ranchero sauce in a bowl with a wood spoon.
      Ranchero Sauce (Quick Mexican Tomato Sauce)
    • A baking dish full of shredded beef enchiladas with a deep red enchilada sauce cilantro, and pickled onions.
      Shredded Beef Enchiladas
    • Smoked salsa in a tall jar and a small serving glass cup with corn chips
      Easy Smoked Salsa (pellet grill recipe)
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this ground meat taco recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.

    Ground beef taco recipe

    Sally Cameron
    This fast and tasty taco meat makes a quick lunch or dinner. Extra freezes great. Serve in corn or cassava tortillas or in lettuce cups for low carb. The taco seasoning mix makes extra. Use 15% fat beef, dark ground turkey, or bison for best flavor.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, lunch, Main Course
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 4 (8 tacos)
    Calories 285 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cast iron skillet or fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    Taco Meat

    • ½ white or yellow onion chopped
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil or avocado oil
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • 1 ½ tablespoons taco seasoning mix homemade or store-bought
    • 1 pound ground beef 15% lean dark turkey 93% or bison
    • 2 tablespoons tomato paste or ¼ cup ketchup
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt skip if you use a store packet
    • 2-3 tablespoons water as needed

    No-salt Homemade Taco Seasoning (or use store-bought)

    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried oregano
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ancho chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon cumin ground
    • 1 teaspoon coriander ground
    • 1 teaspoon smoked or regular paprika
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic sub garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon chipotle chile powder optional, or sub cayenne
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    For Tacos and Optional Garnishes

    • 8 corn tortillas or cassava, or lettuce leaves
    • 1 cup thinly sliced green cabbage
    • 2 tablespoons chopped cilantro
    • 4-8 ounces grated cheese
    • 1 avocado diced or sliced
    • 2 limes cut into wedges for squeezing over tacos

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Taco seasoning (makes extra, doubles easy)

    • Add all ingredients to a jar with a tight lid and shake well. Label and date the jar.

    Taco meat

    • Heat a large saute or frying pan over medium heat. Add oil, then add the onion, cooking onion until softened, 1-2 minutes. Add garlic and cook another 30 seconds. Add 1 ½ tablespoons of the seasoning mix and a tablespoon of water, stirring so it is coated in the oil and onion and cook 1 minute. Add the tomato paste and cook 1 minute. Add another tablespoon of water if needed to keep it juicy.
    • Add the meat to the pan. Cook meat, breaking it up with a wooden spoon and stirring until it is no longer pink, about 8-10 minutes. If it's dry add a tablespoon of water. Stir to heat through, then serve.
      To make tacos, heat tortillas and fill with approximately a ¼ of a cup per taco filling. Garnish as desired. Makes 8 tacos.

    Notes

    Adding fresh chopped green chili (mild or hot) or canned chopped chili is good too, more flavor and color. To stretch the serving, add a can of rinsed and rained black beans or pinto beans. 
    Nutritional calculation note: The calculation is for the taco meat alone as different tortillas and garnishes can be used. As the seasoning has no salt and makes extra, it is not included in the overall calculation as well.
    Recipe Yield: This makes 8 tacos, 2 per person, but if you've got big eaters you can make 1 ½ x or double the recipe. Leftovers won't go to waste! If you increase the quantity, use a 12" fry pan or skillet (or larger) for more surface area to help with cooking quickly. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 285kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 22gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 505mgPotassium: 422mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 210IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    Updated 5/27/2020

    How to Make Sabayon

    06/28/2018 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    champagne sabayon sauce

    Sabayon, the luscious French take on the classic Italian zabaglione, is a light and ethereal dessert sauce made with Champagne, wine, or sparkling wine. Perfect for drizzling over fresh berries or other fruits, it adds a touch of elegance to any dessert. Never made it before? It's surprisingly simple! Let me show you how to whip up this delightful, dairy-free sauce called sabayon. It's one of my favorite recipes, and once you try it, it might become yours too. Alcohol-free option too.

    A glass filled with fresh berries drizzled with sabayon dessert sauce and topped with mint.

    Sabayon is a simple, luscious dessert sauce made with egg yolks, sugar (just a little) and sparkling wine. Make it in minutes and serve it warm right off the stove, layered into glasses or jars with the berries. It's heavenly!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Most people don't know what is and you'll surprise them.
    • It's delicious and easy.
    • Use a dry champagne or sparkling wine.
    • No-alcohol option included.
    • Make it ahead tip.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Eggs: All you need it the yolks.
    • Sugar: Superfine works great but regular sugar, or natural sugar work too. I've not yet tried this with monk fruit but will to reduce sugar.
    • Liquid: Dry sparkling wine or dry Champagne. See tip below.
    • Fruit: Use what is best at the store such as berries and when in season add cantaloupe, honeydew, pineapple, and other fruit.
    • Mint: Optional garnish but a nice touch.

    Chef's tip: For making sabayon I buy the mini size airline bottles (6 ounces) versus opening a big bottle. You don't need expensive stuff for sabayon. The mini size is perfect for four servings of sabayon, or open two minis for eight servings. Plus the mini bottles are inexpensive and store easily in the pantry for a quick dessert.

    A bowl of fluffy sabayon sauce with a whisk in process.

    Chef's tip: What to do with extra egg whites? Make these easy chocolate chip meringue cookies called Forgotten Cookies!

    How to Make Sabayon Sauce

    Set up a double boiler on your stove by filling a large pan (about 4 quarts) a quarter full of water, then bring it to a simmer over medium heat. To make the sabayon, use a medium stainless-steel bowl that fits on top and partially inside the pan but does not touch the simmering water.

    Off the heat, add the yolks and sugar to the bowl and whisk until they are thick, pale and smooth. You don't want grainy sabayon from un-dissolved sugar. Place the bowl atop the simmering water.

    Next, whisk in the wine a little at a time. It comes together like magic, but its a bit of an arm workout. You can whisk in circles, alternating fast and slow to give your arm a break, but don't stop whisking.

    When it's ready, you will feel it shift and thicken into a ribbon-like consistency that drips from the whisk and holds its shape briefly when drizzled back into the bowl.

    A glass pitcher with sabayon pouring into a dessert glass filled with colorful fresh berries.

    Tips for Success

    Making sabayon is an arm workout. You need a large stainless steel whisk. Here are tips that make it easier:

    1. When you whisk the sugar and egg yolks together the mixture will be heavy and sticky at first, but it lightens up and gets easier as you whisk.
    2. To stabilize the bowl on top of the pan, wedge a small soft potholder between the edge of the bowl and pan. This way you can whisk without trying to hold a hot bowl.
    3. After you whisk the sugar and yolks together off the stove, place the bowl on top of the pan and whisk until the sugar melts (you'll feel it's no longer gritty), then start adding your wine.

    Serving Suggestions

    I discovered that sabayon sauce holds up well made a little ahead of time, such as a few hours. Then you're not standing at the stove whisking away while your guests wait for dessert (but mine like to watch or help). The difference is the sauce will be chilled versus warm, but both are heavenly.

    Serve with the best looking fresh fruit of the season. To speed getting dessert to the table, choose your glasses and fill them with the fruit beforehand and keep them refrigerated and ready to go for the sabayon when done.

    If you love fresh fruit desserts, try this easy one-pan fresh cherry cake.

    No-Alcohol Sabayon Option

    I've made delicious sabayon without alcohol using ginger ale for a special event where wine was not allowed. It worked great.

    The problem is commercial ginger ale is nothing but carbonated water, high fructose corn syrup, caramel color, preservatives and hardly any ginger. If you don't cook with wine, try to find a natural ginger ale and give that a try.

    Another option is fruit juice but I've not tried it and and most fruit juices are very sweet so the overall sabayon might be too sweet.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of wine should I use for sabayon?

    I prefer making sabayon with champagne or sparkling wine to keep it light. Some recipes call for Marsala, and you can substitute with Prosecco, or even a dessert wine like Moscato.

    Do I need a double boiler to make sabayon?

    Yes, but you can easily set up your own, you don't need special pans. Use a bowl (I use stainless steel) set over a simmering pot of water as a substitute. The bowl you choose should fir slightly inside the pan without touching the simmering water. And slip a small hot pad between the bowl and the pot so you can whisk away, hands free.

    Can sabayon be served cold?

    Sabayon can be served warm right out of the pan, more room temperature, or chilled and cold.

    Can sabayon be reheated?

    Generally no. Once sabayon is made it's best to enjoy right after making or after no more than a few hours refrigerated. I've made it and whisked in a little heavy whipped cream to stabilize it for making ahead by a few hours with success.

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make sabayon, please comment and let me know. If they were a hit, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers and I love hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    sabayon with berries | afoodcentriclife.com

    Sabayon (Dessert Sauce)

    Sally Cameron
    Lightly sweet and foamy, sabayon is easy to make and requires just three ingredients. Serve over fresh berries or mixed fruit. For mixed fruit add small chunks of melon, pineapple, kiwi or halved grapes. Make the Sabayon at the last minute and serve warm or make it ahead and serve chilled. If serving chilled, re-whisk before serving. This recipe doubles easily for 8 but will take a little longer (and more of an arm workout).
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Servings 4
    Calories 212 kcal

    Equipment

    • French whisk
    • Medium stainless steel bowl

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 large egg yolks
    • 4 tablespoons superfine sugar or regular sugar or sugar substitute
    • ¾ cup dry sparkling wine or dry Champagne airline sized bottle, 6 ounces
    • 4 cups fresh berries or mixed fruit
    • mint sprigs optional garnish

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Start by readying where the sabayon will be served. Place berries or mixed fruit in wine glasses, brandy snifters or glass bowls.
    • Set up a double boiler using a 4 quart sauce pan and a medium size stainless steel bowl. The bowl should fit on top and partially into the pan. Fill sauce pan with about 3 inches of water. Be sure the the water does not touch the bottom of the bowl you are using. Bring to a simmer.
    • Off of the heat, whisk the egg yolks and sugar in the bowl until smooth, thick and pale. Place the bowl over the simmering water and wedge a small soft potholder between the pan edge and bowl for stabilization.
      Whisk and fell that the sugar is melted and smooth before you start adding the liquid.
      Whisking quickly, in a steady stream add the champagne. Continue whisking until the sauce becomes light and foamy and all of the wine is incorporated. It will thicken up and become and ethereal sauce. Keep whisking as needed until done.
    • Pour the sabayon over the readied fruit glasses and serve.

    Notes

    Sabayon holds up well made ahead. The difference is the sauce will be chilled versus slightly warm, but both are heavenly. After making the sabayon, refrigerate covered until ready to use, then re-whisk and use over fruit of choice. For more tips on making sabayon, please see the post.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 212kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 3gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 184mgSodium: 12mgPotassium: 134mgFiber: 4gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 316IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 38mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce

    03/31/2023 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.

    This roast pork tenderloin with Dijon mustard sauce is everything you want in a dinner recipe-tender, juicy, flavorful, and done in just 30 minutes. The pork roasts beautifully in the oven, while a creamy Dijon sauce adds tangy, savory flavor that pairs perfectly with the mild sweetness of the pork. Whether you're cooking a quick weeknight meal or hosting friends, this easy pork tenderloin recipe is a guaranteed crowd-pleaser.

    Slices of roast pork tenderloin with a creamy mustard sauce on a white platter.

    Pork tenderloin is one of my favorite cuts of meat - quick cooking, tender, and so versatile. It shines with sauces, especially Dijon mustard, my favorite (I keep 2-3 jars in my pantry). Dijon adds bold flavor and naturally thickens into a luscious sauce, turning this easy roast pork tenderloin into a 30-minute dinner that's both both easy and elegant.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Roast Pork Tenderloin

    • Ready in 30 minutes - Quick-cooking, perfect for weeknights or special occasions.
    • Tender and juicy - Seared on the stovetop, finished in the oven to perfection.
    • Luscious mustard sauce - With white wine, fresh herbs, and a touch of cream.

    If you enjoy pork, try this beautiful, holiday-worthy pistachio crusted pork rib roast or this smoked pork tenderloin if you have a pellet grill or smoker.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for pork tenderloin with mustard sauce on a sheet tray.
    • Pork tenderloin - Sometimes labeled as pork fillet.
    • Oil - Olive oil, avocado oil, or a neutral oil all work well for searing.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter for salt level control.
    • Heavy cream - Look for heavy cream or heavy whipping cream (the same). The higher fat content means a richer, silkier Dijon mustard sauce.
    • White wine - Essential for deglazing the pan and deepening flavor. Sauvignon Blanc or Chardonnay are ideal, but dry white vermouth is a handy alternative. Mini bottles are perfect for cooking so you don't have to open a full bottle.
    • Shallot - Mild, slightly sweet, and classic in French cooking. Shallots add both depth and texture to the creamy mustard sauce.
    • Dijon mustard - You'll need two kinds: creamy Dijon for body and flavor, and whole-grain Dijon for rustic texture and bite. I prefer the French brands.
    • Fresh herbs - Thyme pairs beautifully here, but rosemary also works. Use fresh when you can; dried thyme is a good fallback.

    Please find the measurements in the recipe card. if you like to brine pork, use my pork brine recipe ahead of cooking.

    Chef's Tip - Pork Tenderloin vs. Pork Loin (Roast)
    Don't confuse pork tenderloin with pork loin. They come from different parts of the animal. Pork tenderloin is always boneless, very lean, and about 1 pound in size, while pork loin roasts are much larger (2-5 pounds), may be bone-in or boneless, and often have a fat cap. Pork loins are less expensive and take longer to cook, while pork tenderloin is pricier but cooks quickly and stays tender without needing that fat layer.

    If you love tenderloin as a cut of meat, try this slow roasted beef tenderloin, also terrific for special occasions.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Wine substitutions - Skip the wine and swap in a good quality, low-sodium chicken broth or stock. You can also use apple cider vinegar diluted with water (half and half) or the same ratio with lemon juice. These options add acidity and brightness without alcohol. For more substitution ideas, see this guide to wine substitutes in cooking.
    • Mustard variations - Prefer a smoother, less textured Dijon cream sauce? Simply use all creamy Dijon mustard and skip the whole-grain. Use just under double the amount of creamy Dijon for balanced flavor.

    How to Roast Pork Tenderloin

    Start: Get the pork out of the refrigerator an hour ahead of time so it's closer to room temperature for better roasting. Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Trim the pork tenderloin of silver skin (it looks like packaging tape) and excess fat with a sharp knife. Place a frying pan over medium to medium-high heat.

    Searing pork tenderloin in a stainless steel fry pan.
    1. Season pork with salt and pepper. Add a little oil to the pan, then add the pork. It should sizzle when it hits the pan. Sear on all sides until nicely brown.
    Seared pork tenderloin going into the oven to finish on a sheet tray with parchment.
    1. Place the pork on a rimmed baking sheet with parchment. Use a pastry brush to lightly add a little extra olive oil for moisture and shine. Place in the oven to roast, about 10 minutes, 140°F -145°F.
    The tasty bits left in the fry pan after searing pork will make great pan sauce.

    3. DO NOT WASH THE PAN, use it to make the sauce.

    Chopped shallots sautéing in butter starting a pan sauce.

    4. Over medium heat, add the butter to the still hot pan, then shallots. When the butter is melted, add shallots and thyme. Cook, stirring and scraping the bottom of the pan until soft, 1-2 minutes.

    Deglazing a pan after searing pork to make a pan sauce with mustard cream.
    1. Add wine to deglaze the pan, scraping up all of the tasty bits on the pan bottom. Cook most of the wine off.
    A tasty pan sauce being created in a stainless steel fry pan for pork tenderloin.
    1. Whisk together the cream and both mustards. Add to the pan, still stirring. The sauce will start to thicken quickly.
    Thickened mustard cream sauce finishing in the pan, ready to serve.

    7. Sauce is done when you can draw a line through it. When pork is done, remove to a cutting board, rest 5-10 minutes covered, then slice and serve with the sauce.

    Roast pork sliced for serving on an oval platter with Dijon mustard sauce.

    Chef's Tip on Cooking oil. What not to use? It's best avoid seed oils or vegetable oils. They are really not healthy because they are inflammatory, often refined with chemicals, plus most use GMO crops. I use olive oil for most of my cooking needs (yes olive oil is more safe and stable than many say). Coconut oil is good, where the flavor works. A terrific fat for higher heat cooking? Ghee, made from butter. It's a clarified pure fat (no water) and it is lactose and casein-free. And a favorite? This clean, healthy, neutral oil.

    How to Serve

    What do you eat with roast pork tenderloin? Just about anything! Here are my suggestions for serving:

    • Green beans: try simple green beans drizzled with Balsamic glaze, or green beans almondine.
    • Potatoes: try these easy Dutch potatoes with fresh herbs or whipped sweet potatoes.
    • One of our favorite veggies, this air fryer broccolini is a terrific, easy side dish that takes just minutes!
    • Asparagus: roast asparagus or even bright green creamy asparagus soup as a starter.
    • Roasted vegetables like these roasted carrots with thyme.

    Of course a good salad is always welcome.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you cook a pork tenderloin without drying it out?

    This sear and finish in the oven technique is a great way to insure moist pork tenderloin. To not dry it out, don't over cook it. It's done when an instant-read digital thermometer reads 140°F - 145°F. Remember the temperature will rise while it is resting for a few minutes, covered with foil. And because pork tenderloin is lean, it's good to serve with a sauce for added moisture.

    Should you pan sear pork tenderloin?

    Pan searing pork tenderloin gives it a nice browned and tasty exterior. Finish in the oven for just a few minutes at 375°F. For a convection oven, about 10 minutes. A few minutes longer in a standard conventional oven.

    How long does roast pork last in the refrigerator?

    Leftover roast pork tenderloin keeps in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. Eat it cold or warm it up. I've even chopped up extra pieces and used it in tacos. Leftover Dijon sauce is very thick and even good cold. If you want to warm it up a bit, place a glass container with the sauce in a small pan with water over low heat for a few minutes. Re-whisk if it separates.

    Is it necessary to sear pork tenderloin?

    Searing pork tenderloin adds flavor and color, so it's a great method for starting a roast pork tenderloin, then finishing it in the oven for moist and tender pork.

    More Recipes With Pork

    Pork is a versatile, healthy, and delicious meat that can be cooked in many ways! Form ribs to roasts, try some of the pork recipes.

    • A golden crusted pork rib roast on a gray platter with fresh green parsley.
      Pistachio Crusted Pork Rib Roast
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe
    • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
      3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.

    Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Savory pork tenderloin with a delicious Dijon mustard cream sauce. A crowd pleaser in just 30 minutes. Serve with green beans, potatoes, and a salad for a weekend or holiday winner of a dinner.
    5 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    resting time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American, French
    Servings 4
    Calories 467 kcal

    Equipment

    • 12" stainless steel or cast iron fry pan large enough to get the pork in to
    • Parchment paper
    • Rimmed baking sheet ¼ sheet or ½ sheet size.

    Ingredients
      

    Pork Tenderloin

    • 1 ¼-1 ½ pounds pork tenderloin
    • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil divided use
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Dijon mustard Sauce

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • ¼ cup finely chopped shallot 1 medium shallot
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine swap low sodium chicken broth
    • 4 ounces heavy cream or heavy whipping cream ½ cup
    • 1 tablespoon creamy Dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon whole grain Dijon mustard
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme leaves swap ¾ teaspoon dried thyme

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Season the pork

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a sheet pan with a piece of baking parchment and ready near the stove.
      Trim the pork tenderloin of any silver skin if needed, and any extra fat. It's usually pretty lean. Rub the tenderloin with a little oil (2 teaspoons) and sprinkle with salt and pepper on all sides.

    Sear and roast the pork

    • Heat the pan over medium heat, when hot, add the rest of the oil and place the tenderloin into the pan. It should sizzle when it hits the pan.
      Allow the pork to sear on all sides, occasionally rolling it over with tongs or forks so all side become golden brown, about 10 minutes.
      Place the seared pork tenderloin on the baking sheet and brush lightly with a little extra olive oil. DO NOT WASH THE PAN.
      Roast pork for approximately 10 minutes or until the pork reads 140°F - 145°F with an instant read thermometer. While the pork is roasting, make the sauce.
    • Remove pork from the oven and allow to rest covered with foil until the sauce is ready. When the mustard sauce is ready, slice the pork tenderloin, either on the diagonal or straight across, place on a platter and serve with the sauce.

    Make the Dijon mustard sauce

    • With the pan still warm over medium low heat, melt the butter, then add the shallots. Stir and scrape the bottom of the pan to get the tasty bits off the bottom.
    • When the shallots are golden, add the wine and continue stirring. When the wine has cooked down, add the cream and the mustards whisked together until smooth, then add to the pan. Add the thyme. Stir until the sauce thickens, just a few minutes. Serve a little over the pork slices and the rest on the side for extras.

    Notes

    Right size pan: Be sure your pan can accommodate the length of the pork tenderloin. A frying pan with wider flared sides work well as the ends might have to start up the sides a bit. 
    Timing: Cooking time will depend on your oven and whether you use convection mode or not. I use convection roast mode and it takes 10 minutes for perfect pork tenderloin. Standard conventional baking mode will take a little longer. 
    Testing for doneness: It's good to test the meat near the end of roasting to be sure it is done, but remember that each time you open the oven you lose heat and extend roasting time by another 1-2 minutes. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 467kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 43gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 176mgSodium: 488mgPotassium: 893mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 650IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 50mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)

    02/19/2021 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    roasted red pepper soup

    Easy soups make for easy meals and this sheet pan roasted red pepper soup is both. Add a green salad and you've got a meal. All of your ingredients go on sheet pans and into the oven. To finish the soup, puree all of the roasted veggies in a blender with broth and add a little dairy or non-dairy milk for creaminess if desired. An added benefit, there is little mess to clean up.

    roasted red pepper soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    This simple soup is full of flavor (and a great way to get your veggies in).

    It takes 5 large red bell peppers or about 3 pounds. Slice the peppers in quarters top to bottom, remove seeds and place cut side down on a parchment lined baking sheet pan.

    To a shallow baking dish add 1 sliced onion and a few large, whole, peeled garlic cloves drizzled with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast in a hot oven until the pepper skins are blackened and the onions and garlic are soft and browned.

    roasted pepper in a blender | afoodcentriclife.com

    Finishing the Soup

    Roast your vegetables then add everything to a blender and puree with chicken broth or vegetable broth. For creaminess add either canned coconut milk or dairy milk (half and half or cream).

    For another easy, creamy vegetable soup, try this cream of asparagus soup (coconut milk or heavy cream)

    roated red pepper soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Roasting and Spice Notes

    Sheet pans are a super handy kitchen tool. They come in full, half, quarter and even eighth size. When you sheet pans, buy rimmed heavy duty ones as they are less likely to warp in the oven. If you are concerned with aluminum in your diet from foil and sheet pans, cover them with parchment paper to protect your food and speed clean up. If you don't have a rimmed baking sheet use a large cookie sheet. Don't put the peppers in a casserole dish because they need the high heat exposure of a flat or almost flat baking sheet to roast the skins.

    For spices I prefer smoked paprika but regular is fine too. For more smoky spice add a little spicy ground chipotle powder when pureeing. Another way to add heat is with sharp paprika. For more Southwestern flavors add cumin, coriander or ancho chili powder.

    roasted red pepper soup | afoodcenticlife.com

    If you love bell peppers, try these Turkey Quinoa Stuffed Peppers! And for another marvelous creamy soup, be sure to make this easy cream of asparagus soup. Make it dairy-free or not.

    Low Histamine Notes

    For histamine friendly soup use homemade low histamine chicken broth. I make mine in an Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker. Find the recipe here. Another option is homemade vegetable broth. Also made in the pressure cooker, it beats anything off the store shelf. If coconut milk doesn't work for you, try another non-dairy milk or use more broth as needed. In the photos I garnished with toasted pumpkin seeds. If your sensitive skip them and use herbs. Cilantro or Italian parsley are nice.

    📖 Recipe

    roasted red pepper soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Sheet Pan Roasted Red Pepper Soup

    Sally Cameron
    From a sheet pan to the blender, this soup is easy with little mess to clean up. For dairy-free use canned coconut milk, or regular dairy half and half or cream as perferred. For low histamine be sure to use a low histamine broth. The recipe is on this site. For a spicy soup see notes below.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course lunch, Main Course, Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Yield about 7 cups
    Calories 161 kcal

    Equipment

    • Sheet pans
    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 5 large red bell peppers about 3 pounds
    • 1 medium brown or sweet onion peeled and sliced into chunks
    • 3 large whole garlic cloves peeled
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 ½ teaspoons smoked paprika
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 cups chicken or vegetable broth
    • 1 cup coconut milk or dairy milk

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 425°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment. Snap any green stem off the top, then slice peppers in quarters from top to bottom and remove the seeds.
    • Lay the peppers cut side down on the half sheet pan. Place the onions and garlic to a shallow baking dish and drizzle with the olive oil and stir to coat. Place vegetables in the oven and roast until the peppers have blackened skin, about 30 minutes. Check the onions at 20-25 minutes or when you smell them. They should be browned and soft. Remove the pans from the oven.
    • Cover the peppers with foil or another sheet pan upside down to steam the peppers and make the skin easy to peel off. Allow them to stand 10 minutes. Remove the cover and peel as much of the skin off as posible with your fingers. Don't worry about getting everyone last bit. Place all of the veggetables in a blender with the paprika, broth, salt and pepper then puree smooth. Add the coconut or dairy milk and blend a bit more to combine. Adjust the thickness with more broth or milk and serve hot or cool completely. Soup will last in the refrigerator 4 days or freezes well.

    Notes

    For Low Histamine:
    If you are histamine intolerant, freeze finished soup in portions immediately. If you can't handle coconut milk, use a safe non-dairy "milk" to puree your soup or just use all low histamine chicken or vegetable broth. The soup won't be as thick and creamy but it still tastes delicious.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 161kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 4gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 8gSodium: 229mgPotassium: 484mgFiber: 3gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 4526IUVitamin C: 177mgCalcium: 28mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Coconut Milk (from Canned in 1 Minute)

    02/15/2023 by Sally Cameron 24 Comments

    Making coconut milk at home is quick, affordable, and healthier than most store-bought options. With just a can of coconut milk and water, you can whip up fresh homemade coconut milk in minutes-no additives, gums, or preservatives. The result is creamy, versatile, and perfect for everything from smoothies and coffee to soups and curries.

    A glass and bottle of coconut milk on a marble counter.

    If you're sensitive to dairy, coconut milk is a delicious plant-based alternative (as long as you don't have a coconut allergy). It's creamy, versatile, and easy to make at home with just a can of coconut milk from your pantry. In less than a minute, you'll have fresh coconut milk that's more economical-and often better tasting-than store-bought, without any additives.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Homemade Coconut Milk

    • Just 2 ingredients, 1 minute - No complicated steps or special equipment.
    • Pantry-friendly - Canned coconut milk stores easily until you need it.
    • No mess - Unlike nut milks or dried coconut versions, there's no soaking, straining, or cheesecloth required.
    • Versatile - Perfect for smoothies, coffee, curries, soups, or baking.
    • Budget-friendly - Making your own is far more economical than buying cartons.

    For other recipes using canned coconut milk, try this coconut shrimp curry, or this creamy cauliflower soup.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for homemade coconut milk.
    • Coconut milk - Use organic, unsweetened, full-fat canned coconut milk. It keeps well in the pantry and gives the creamiest, richest results.
    • Water - Use filtered water instead of tap for the cleanest flavor and healthiest homemade coconut milk. 

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    For another terrific easy plant-based milk you can make in a minute, make this hemp milk recipe.

    Chef's Tip: What is Coconut Milk and Why Make It?
    Coconut milk is made by blending the white flesh of mature brown coconuts with water. Canned coconut milk is usually much richer than the carton versions sold in stores. By diluting it at home, you can control the fat level and thickness-making it light like almond milk for everyday use or creamier for cooking. If you're concerned about saturated fat, read this article for more information on the fat content of coconut milk.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vanilla Coconut Milk - Add a splash of vanilla extract or vanilla paste. Paste gives you those pretty flecks of vanilla bean.
    • Sweetened - Stir in monk fruit syrup for natural sweetness without sugar. Honey adds flavor but works, or try brown rice syrup or maple syrup. Powdered or granulated monk fruit also blend in easily.
    • Chocolate Coconut Milk - Whisk in unsweetened cocoa powder. Start with 1 tablespoon and adjust to taste for a chocolatey treat.

    How to Make Coconut Milk

    Put the water and the canned coconut milk into a large container and shake well or stir. It takes 1 minute!

    If the coconut milk is solidified, add it to a high-speed blender with a tight fitting lid, add water and blend for a few seconds until smooth. That's all there is to making fresh homemade coconut milk. 

    If you dilute according to my ratios you will have a quart (liter) or 4 cups of coconut milk. For creamy coconut milk, use less water. See the health benefits section for more ratios of water to coconut milk and variable fat grams.

    Breakfast setting with granola, berries, coffee and pitcher of milk.

    Coconut Milk from Coconut Milk Powder

    Coconut milk powder is another option if you want a shelf-stable choice. Most brands provide about 3-4 grams of fat per cup once mixed with water, and you can easily adjust the ratio for creamier or lighter milk. It's handy for smoothies-just add water and powder straight to the blender. The only issue is additives.

    Chef's note: Coconut milk powders usually contain tapioca maltodextrin as a thickener and stabilizer. It's gluten-free but processed and high on the glycemic index, so it may spike blood sugar. For that reason, I prefer using canned coconut milk when possible, but powder can be convenient in a pinch. For more information on tapioca maltodextrin.

    Almond Milk Versus Coconut Milk

    FeatureAlmond Milk (unsweetened)Homemade Coconut Milk (diluted from canned)
    Calories~30–40 per cup~50–100 per cup (depends on dilution)
    Fat2–3 g (mostly unsaturated)5–10 g (mostly saturated)
    Protein1–2 g0–1 g
    FlavorMild, nuttyCreamy, coconut-forward
    Best UsesSmoothies, cereal, coffeeCurries, soups, sauces, dairy-free baking

    Customizing Coconut Milk: One advantage of making your own coconut milk from canned is that you can adjust the fat level. For example:

    • Mix 1 (13.5 oz) can with 64 oz water → ~10 g fat per cup.
    • Mix 1 (13.5 oz) can with 128 oz water → ~5 g fat per cup (similar to store brands like Silk or So, but without additives).

    This way, you can make coconut milk as light as almond milk for daily use, or richer for cooking. Here's my almond milk recipe. It is unstrained, rich, and creamy compared to store brands.

    Chef's Tip: Watch for Additives in Coconut Milk
    Many store-bought coconut milks (canned and boxed) contain stabilizers and thickeners like carrageenan (from red algae) or guar gum (from guar beans) to improve texture. While safe for most, they can cause digestive upset for some. Making coconut milk at home means you skip the additives and control exactly what goes in. I use Native Forest "Simple" without gums.

    Homemade granola with berries and coconut milk pouring.

    How to Enjoy Homemade Coconut Milk

    • Smoothies - Swap it for nut milks or cow's milk for a creamy, dairy-free smoothie base.
    • Coffee or tea - Use as a creamer; make it thicker by diluting with less water.
    • Breakfast bowls - Pour over oatmeal, porridge, or homemade granola with berries.
    • Soups - Stir into pureed soups like this creamy fennel soup recipe.
    • Chia oats - Use in place of almond milk for chia pudding with coconut milk.

    Any dairy swap - Works almost anywhere you'd use milk-served warm or chilled.

    Storage

    Homemade coconut milk usually lasts about 3-4 days in the refrigerator in a sealed container. A couple of tips to stretch quality: Shake or stir before using - it can separate as it sits. Glass jar over plastic - helps it keep fresher. Sniff & taste test - if it smells sour or develops a tang, it's gone.

    Homemade coconut milk lasts about 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container or glass jar. Shake before using if needed.

    If it smells sours or off, curdles, turns grayish or gets cloudy, toss it and make fresh. Do not store at room temperature.

    Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass.

    Coconut Milk FAQs

    Is it cheaper to make your own coconut milk?

    Yes-homemade coconut milk is usually a few cents cheaper per serving. More importantly, canned coconut milk is shelf-stable, so you'll always have it in the pantry without extra trips to the store. Coconut milk powder is another option if you want convenience.

    Is homemade coconut milk better than store bought?

    Homemade coconut milk gives you full control: no additives, no gums, and you can adjust the thickness by diluting more or less. Choose organic canned coconut milk without additives for the cleanest base-this is the brand I buy.

    Can you make coconut milk from coconut flakes?

    Yes, but it takes more work. You'll need to soak shredded or flaked coconut in hot water, puree it thoroughly, and strain it. You'll also need to decide what to do with the leftover pulp. Using canned coconut milk is faster and easier.

    Can you freeze coconut milk?

    Yes. Freeze in airtight containers or ice cube trays for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge and whisk or blend to restore creaminess.

    More Recipes for Non-Dairy Milks

    For more smoothie recipes to use coconut milk in, get ideas on this page. Its delicious in this sheet pan roasted pepper soup too.

    • A glass dairy bottle of homemade almond milk with raw almonds on a wooden table.
      How to Make Homemade Almond Milk
    • pale green pumpkin seed milk
      Homemade Pumpkin Seed Milk (Dairy-free)
    • homemade cashew milk pouring into a glass on a wooden counter.
      Cashew Milk Recipe
    • White round platter with a glass of hemp seed milk, a pitcher, and hemp seeds.
      Hemp Mylk (hemp milk recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make your own coconut milk, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Quick Homemade Coconut Milk

    Sally Cameron
    For quick and creamy coconut milk, dilute organic canned coconut milk with water. Simply mix, cover and refrigerate. You can dilute more or less for your needs. Yield: 1 quart/1 liter. For dilution options please see recipe notes at end.
    4.43 from 7 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 2 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 minutes mins
    Course Beverage
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 8-ounce servings
    Calories 220 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 13.5 ounce can organic coconut milk
    • 20 ounces filtered water 2 ½ cups

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Shake the canned coconut milk well (if needed) and pour canned milk into a tall container or large mixing cup, add filtered water and stir well. If needed, add to a blender and briefly blend on low to smooth it out. Taste for your preference and add more water if desired.

    Notes

    If you have a sensitive digestive system, read labels and choose a no-additive brand. It should just be coconut milk. 
    To reduce the fat, dilute the milk further or try using light coconut milk. 
    Variations:
    • Vanilla flavored: For vanilla coconut milk, add a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste. Using vanilla paste gives you flecks of vanilla bean.
    • Sweetened: To sweeten, try this all natural syrup made from monk fruit. It adds sweetness without any sugar and blends into liquid easily. Honey works but has a definite flavor. You can also try brown rice syrup or maple syrup. Powdered or granulated monk fruit work as well.
    • Chocolate: Use unsweetened coca powder. Start with 1 tablespoon and add more if desired.
    For lower fat levels consider these ratios:
    • Mix 1 13.5-ounce can of full fat coconut milk with 64 ounces of water for approximately 9 servings at 10 grams of fat per 8-ounce serving.
    • Mix 1 13.5-ounce can of full fat coconut milk with 128 ounces of water for approximately 17 servings at 5 grams of fat per 8-ounce serving. At this ratio of water to coconut milk it is closer to what you get from store brands such as So and Silk, but it is more fluid because there are no additives.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 220kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 2gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 21mgPotassium: 252mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 20mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Instant Pot Lentil Soup Recipe

    01/20/2023 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Instant pot lentil soup

    Instant Pot Lentil Soup-thick, hearty, and ready in about 45 minutes. This cozy bowl borders on a stew: French green lentils, vegetables, and rich chicken broth cook perfectly in the pressure cooker for a satisfying, meal-prep-friendly soup. No Instant Pot? Stovetop directions included as well as slow-cooker instructions. Make a big batch now, freeze a few portions for later, and dinner's done.

    Lentil soup with vegetables in bowls with spoons and parsley.

    This Instant Pot lentil soup is a make-on-repeat keeper-comforting, protein-rich, and easy to finish with simple garnishes. It keeps 4-5 days in the fridge and freezes up to 3 months, so it's great for meal prep. Serve with garlic toast or crusty bread (or cornbread) and you've got dinner. Stovetop method included, so you can make this pressure cooker lentil soup either way.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Should Make Lentil Soup

    • Choose your method - Instant Pot, stovetop, or slow cooker; same cozy result.
    • Hearty & healthy - High protein and fiber, naturally gluten-free.
    • Thick, stew-like texture - Lentils stay tender, not mushy.
    • Meal-prep friendly - Keeps 4-5 days in the fridge; freezes 3 months.

    For another lentil recipe, try my lentil and quinoa salad, great for year round.

    Ingredients & Notes

    Ingredients for lentil soup with labels on a counter top.
    • Cooking fat - Extra-virgin olive oil for flavor and a healthy fat.
    • Onion - Sweetness + depth; yellow, white, or sweet all work.
    • Carrot - Balances the lentils with natural sweetness.
    • Celery - Completes the aromatic base (classic mirepoix).
    • Fennel (optional but great) - Mild anise notes; adds another vegetable layer.
    • Garlic - Fresh is best, jarred or tube purée works as well.
    • Dried herbs - Dried Italian seasoning or a blend of thyme/oregano/rosemary; dried holds up well to pressure cooking.
    • Tomato paste - Savory depth and that umami savory taste.
    • Broth - I use chicken broth (Instant Pot chicken broth recipe here) but you can substitute turkey broth, beef broth, or vegetable broth.
    • Lentils - French green (Puy) hold their shape and give a meaty texture.
    • Bay leaf - Adds a subtle savory note; remove before serving.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Fennel is delicious eaten raw too, try this lovely winter salad, Fennel Salad with Orange Vinaigrette.

    Chef's Tip - Why French Green (Puy) Lentils? - They hold their shape so the soup stays thick and hearty without turning mushy, and they bring a nutty, earthy, slightly peppery flavor. If your bag says Puy lentils, that's the same type grown in the Le Puy region of France. What about other lentils? You can use brown lentils in a pinch (softer texture), but skip red or yellow for this recipe as they break down and go creamy in texture.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Herbes de Provence - Use the classic French dried blend (often with a touch of lavender) for a Provençal twist; it pairs beautifully with French green lentils.
    • Fresh thyme - Use 1 tablespoon finely chopped thyme leaves in place of dried.
    • No fennel available - Substitute chopped leek or add a little extra celery + onion. For fennel flavor, add ½ teaspoon lightly crushed fennel seed (or a pinch of fennel pollen or anise seed).
    • Out of tomato paste - Skip it (but it adds depth of flavor), or use 3 tablespoon tomato purée or unsweetened ketchup.

    Chef's Tip: Cooking with Fennel. If you don't cook with fresh fennel, you should try it. It's one of my favorite vegetables. It has a lightly sweet licorice flavor which might sound funny, but it is delicious. I add it to many soups and stews along with the other standards of onion, carrot, and celery. It can be eaten raw, juiced, and braised as a side dish. Fresh fennel is a classic culinary ingredient in France, Italy, and other Mediterranean countries, and a terrific addition to lentil soup.

    How to Make Instant Pot Lentil Soup

    Chef's tip: For stovetop and slow-cooker methods, please see the recipe card.

    Vegetables sautéing in an Instant Pot before pressure cooking lentil soup.
    Step 1: Cook the vegetables with the saute function in olive oil.
    Vegetables, lentils, broth and herbs ready to cook for lentil soup.
    Step 2: Add the remaining ingredients, lock the lid on. Close the float valve, set for 15 minutes cook time and walk away.
    A pot of finished lentil soup ready to enjoy.
    Step 3: The Instant Pot beeps when the lentil soup is ready. Allow the Instant Pot to cool down for 15 minutes, then quick release the remaining pressure.

    Alternatively use the natural release method allowing the pressure cooker to come down on its own which takes approximately 30 minutes. I've made the soup with both pressure release methods.

    Chef's tip: Brighten the Flavor at the Finish. Lentils are earthy. A splash of red wine vinegar, lemon juice, or a few drops of balsamic at the end wakes everything up. Taste first, then add the acid in small amounts until the flavors pop. A drizzle of good olive oil right before serving adds silkiness.

    Serving Suggestions

    Lentil soup is satisfying on its own. For a bigger meal, add a simple side salad, warm cornbread with soft butter or whipped maple butter, or parmesan-garlic toast (use a good GF loaf if needed). For color and extra flavor, try:

    • Fresh chopped parsley - bright, garden-fresh finish.
    • Finely diced tomato - adds juicy color and freshness.
    • Grated Parmesan - savory richness and umami.
    • Crisp bacon crumbles - smoky, salty contrast.
    • Toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas) - nutty crunch; great on soups and salads.
    • Good olive oil - A drizzle of good, fruity olive oil or herb-infused olive oil like rosemary or basil.

    Storage and Freezing

    Extra lentil soup keeps 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. You can freeze lentil soup for up to 3 months. Portion into labeled, dated containers and cool completely before freezing. Souper Cubes work great for freezing in portions. For best texture, thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

    Reheating Lentil Soup
    Stovetop - put soup in a small pan over low heat, cover, and warm until hot, stirring occasionally.
    Microwave - use a microwave-safe bowl and heat on 70% power in short bursts, stirring between intervals until hot.

    Chef's note: Lentils continue to absorb liquid as they sit. If the soup seems thick after chilling or thawing, stir in a splash of hot water or broth to loosen, then adjust seasoning.

    A bowl of earthy, hearty  lentil soup with vegetables and fresh garnishes.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of lentils are best for soup?

    French green lentils are the best for soup. They hold their shape and have wonderful flavor. Green lentils and brown lentils are used for soups with different results. Red or yellow lentils are split lentils. They break down quickly and are best for purees and dishes like curries or Indian Dhal.

    Do you have to soak lentils before making soup?

    No, lentils do not need to be soaked like beans do. They cook more quickly. Be sure to rinse them before cooking (in a sieve or strainer) and sort out any broken ones. For soup, French green lentils hold their shape best and taste great.

    What can I serve with lentil soup?

    A tossed green salad makes a nice side dish for lentil soup with a tangy vinaigrette. A slice of artisan, crusty bread is also a nice textural accompaniment. When serving lentil soup, have fun with garnishes such as diced tomato, toasted pumpkin seeds, fresh chopped herbs that compliment the recipe, or a little sharp earthy cheese such as grated parmesan.

    More Soup Recipes

    For more hearty soup recipes try these: hearty favorite Ribollita Tuscan Vegetable Bean Soup, French Market Soup, Navy Bean with ham or Mexican Chicken Tomatillo.

    • Ribollita in a gray pot.
      Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • Navy bean soup with ham and vegetables.
      Instant Pot Navy Bean Soup Recipe (with ham)
    • chicken tomatillo soup
      Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this Lentil Soup, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Instant Pot Vegetable Lentil Soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Lentil soup (Instant Pot or stove top)

    Sally Cameron
    Hearty and healthy, with Instant Pot and stove top instructions. It's loaded with vegetables and plant-based protein. Lentil soup freezes great if you have leftovers.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Pressure rise and release 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Yield 2 quarts
    Calories 272 kcal

    Equipment

    • 6 quart Instant Pot
    • OR 5 quart Dutch oven or large pot

    Ingredients
      

    Lentil Soup

    • 1 ½ tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 cups chopped onion 1 large
    • 1 ½ cups chopped carrot 3 large
    • 1 ½ cups chopped celery 3 large ribs
    • 1 cup chopped fennel 1 medium, bulb only
    • 3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried herbs: Italian blend OR Herbs de Provence, or thyme
    • 1 bay leaf dried or fresh
    • 1 ½ tablespoons tomato paste
    • 5 cups low sodium chicken broth OR vegetable, turkey, or beef
    • 1 ½ cups French green lentils
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Optional Garnishes

    • ¼ cup chopped fresh parsley or cilantro
    • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
    • ¼ cup toasted pumpkin seeds
    • drizzle of Balsamic or olive oil
    • sprinkle of red pepper flakes

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Instant Pot Method

    • Select "sauté" to pre-heat the Instant Pot. When the word "hot" appears on the display, add the olive oil, onion, carrot, celery, and fennel. Set the timer for 7 minutes and stir occasionally. Towards the end of the sauté cycle, stir in the garlic, dried herbs and tomato paste. 
    • Stir in the broth, lentils, salt and pepper, place the lid on and turn to lock. Turn the steam release handle on top of the lid closed. Select "pressure cook" and set the timer using the [+] button for 15 minutes. When the Instant Pot completes the warm up and cooking cycle it will beep. Use the natural release method for 15 minutes, then quick release remaining pressure by pressing "cancel" and turning the steam release handle on top of the lid to the "venting" position.  
    • If you are not in a hurry, leave the Instant Pot to come down all of the way naturally. Unlock, stir and serve. Leftovers keep well for up to four days and freeze well.

    Stove Top Method

    • Sauté all of the vegetables in oil until tender in a large pot like a Dutch oven, 5-7 minutes. Add the garlic, dried herbs and tomato paste, stir and cook 1-2 minutes to brown the tomato paste.
      Add the rest of the ingredients, bring just to a boil, turn heat to low, cover with a lid and simmer on low until the lentils are tender, about 30 minutes. Taste, and if the lentils are not tender enough simmer for a few additional minutes. Adjust seasoning with salt and pepper.

    Slow-cooker Method

    • If slow cooker has Sauté/Brown: sauté oil + onion, carrot, celery, fennel 5-7 min; add garlic, herbs, tomato paste 1 min. (If not, do this in a skillet.) Add broth, lentils, bay leaf, salt, pepper; stir.
      Cook LOW 6–7 hr or HIGH 3–4 hr, until lentils are tender but intact.
      Remove bay leaf. Adjust thickness (hot broth to loosen; uncover on HIGH 15–30 min to reduce, thicken). Season. Store 4 days or freeze 3 months.

    Notes

    Umami flavor boost option (choose 1) -  Parmesan rind, 1 teaspoon soy/tamari, or 1 teaspoon white miso (off heat). 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 272kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 17gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 244mgPotassium: 965mgFiber: 17gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 5777IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 84mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi

    12/03/2017 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    baked lemon shrimp scampi

    Baked shrimp scampi is a dish I've made forever-it's easy, delicious, and has a fun twist! Tender shrimp bake in a lemon garlic butter sauce with white wine. Instead of traditional breadcrumbs, I've topped it with crunchy almonds and fresh parsley. A splash of Amaretto (optional) adds subtle depth, complementing the buttery richness. This recipe is quick enough for a weeknight yet elegant for a dinner party. In just 30 minutes, you'll have a foolproof, flavor-packed dish that makes its own luscious sauce

    Baked shrimp scampi in a white casserole dish with parsley and lemon.

    Lemony buttery baked shrimp scampi is one of my go-to shrimp recipes. After a short marinade at room temperature, bake for about 10 minutes and you've got a terrific shrimp dinner with built-in buttery sauce. Super easy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A easy recipe and fast to make.
    • Tastes like a dish a restaurant would serve.
    • Good for busy weeknights and entertaining too for rave reviews.
    • Marinate shrimp for 20 minutes and bake for 10.

    For another easy shrimp recipe, try Italian-style spicy Shrimp Fra Diavolo.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for shrimp scampi in bowls as prep work.
    • Shrimp: Look for wild shrimp versus farmed (see tips below), either thawed at the seafood counter or frozen to thaw ahead of time. Different sizes work, smaller ones bake faster. Go with 13-15, 16-20, or 21-25 size. This refers to the average number of shrimp per pound.
    • Butter: Use unsalted butter so you control the salt levels. If dairy sensitive, ghee works too, or use a plant butter.
    • Wine: Dry white wine, such as sauvignon blanc, pinot grigio, or chardonnay, use the little airline size bottles instead of opening a big bottle.
    • Almonds: Slivered almonds or sliced almonds.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil, along with the butter for terrific rich flavor.
    • Amaretto liqueur: This is optional but it adds such nice flavor and complements the almonds. It makes it a little different and special than regular shrimp scampi.
    • Lemon: For the bright acidity and wonderful flavor, fresh lemon juice. Save the lemon zest for garnish or freeze for other recipes.
    • Garlic: Fresh cloves are best, but a tube of paste or puree works well too.
    • Fresh herbs: Use fresh parsley for garden flavor and color.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: When choosing the best shrimp for baked shrimp scampi, use either fresh or frozen shrimp. If shrimp are frozen, thaw overnight in a sealed plastic bag or a covered flat baking dish. To quick-thaw frozen shrimp in a hurry, seal frozen shrimp in a plastic bag and press out the air. Place the bag in cold water, changing the water every 30 minutes. Depending on the size, shrimp should thaw in an hour or less. Shrimp are highly perishable, so cook them within 24 hours of purchase or thawing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Instead of the Amaretto make it a white wine sauce with all wine.
    • If you don't like almonds, leave them out.
    • If omitting the Amaretto, use ¼-1/2 teaspoon of almond extract to replace the almond flavor.
    • For shrimp scampi without wine, try unsalted vegetable broth or ver jus (unfermented pressed grape juice).
    • Want a little savory finish? Sprinkle with freshly grated parmesan cheese. Italian cooks would never do this but it's good!

    Chef's Tip: No need to buy a big bottle for a small amount of wine, spirits, or liqueurs to cook with. Buy the little airline size at the grocery or liquor store. 

    Recipe Instructions

    If you are serving baked shrimp scampi with pasta, get your pasta water started, adding a couple teaspoons salt.

    Step 1: Make the marinade

    Melt the butter then stir in lemon juice, white wine, olive oil, almonds, garlic and parsley to create a savory marinade for shrimp. Adding almond flavored Amaretto liqueur is a flavorful option if you like to cook with spirits.

    Raw shrimp on a Raw shrimp on a baking tray after cleaninbg.

    Step 2: Clean and devein the shrimp

    With your fingers, peel off the shell and legs leaving the last tail segment intact. With a sharp paring knife, gently slice along the curved back of the shrimp. Remove any veins (its the digestive tract) by rinsing under cool water. Set cleaned shrimp aside on paper towels to dry.

    Raw shrimp marinating in a white casserole dish before baking, with almonds and herbs.

    Step 3: Marinate the shrimp, then bake

    Arrange the shrimp in a single layer in a baking dish or casserole dish and pour the butter mixture over the top. Allow the shrimp to marinate for 20-30 minutes. Pre-heat the oven to 400°F while you are waiting. Cooking times depends on the size of the shrimp. Bake until shrimp turn pink, about 10 minutes.

    If you have really large jumbo shrimp you may need to turn them while baking so sides are evenly baked, another minute or two.

    Serving Suggestions

    Toss a green salad with easy homemade Italian dressing while shrimp are baking. Serve baked shrimp scampi over rice, angel hair pasta or spaghetti noodles (regular or gluten-free), zucchini noodles, cauliflower rice, or even spaghetti squash noodles.

    Try this cauliflower rice with parmesan and herbs. It's a great option with this easy shrimp scampi recipe. Spoon the sauce over each dish before serving.

    • Give the top a sprinkle of red pepper flakes for a kick or black pepper.
    • Serve with a lemon wedge for more lemon flavor.
    • Add a little more chopped parsley for the color.
    • Garlic bread or garlic toast is another nice addition.

    Need a little dessert for company? Something lemony is just the answer. Try this homemade lemon ice cream, or a lemon olive oil cake.

    Tips for Buying Shrimp

    If time is short, purchase cleaned and deveined shrimp. For more information on buying shrimp, check out this Sustainable Shrimp Guide from Seafood Watch.

    Choose wild shrimp with the shell on and clean them yourself for the best flavor and texture. Read this article about farmed shrimp and you will know why I only buy wild.

    Lemony shrimp scampi served over zucchini noodles in a bowl.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make baked shrimp scampi ahead of time?

    Shrimp scampi is not a dish you can make ahead of time, but it is so easy you don't have to. To save time, be sure your shrimp are cleaned and ready to go, and make the marinade. With your prep work done, the dish goes quickly as shrimp bakes fast, in about 10 minutes. No time to marinate the shrimp? Skip it and just bake. It's still terrific. Have it ready in about 10 minutes.

    Do I need to devein the shrimp?

    It is best to devein shrimp as it removes the digestive tract, which can be gritty (black) or gooey (orange). There are two ways to devein shrimp. One is to expose the back up by gently slicing along the curved back with a paring knife just enough to remove the vein and pull it out. The second way is insert a tooth pick at the second joint from the tail end a little way into the shrimp flesh and lift. This partially pulls out the vein, which you can completely pull out.

    How do I know when the shrimp are cooked

    Shrimp tell you when they are done by their color and texture change. They turn from translucent gray or blue to an opaque white and pink. When done, shrimp will be firm but not hard. Don't over cook them. They cook quickly so keep and eye on them. If they are very large shrimp, you may need to turn them over once while cooking so they are pink on both sides and evenly cooked.

    More Shrimp Recipes

    Shrimp is easy to cook in a variety of ways, no wonder it's the best-selling seafood in America. Try some of these additional shrimp recipes. If you are grilling shrimp, here are 25 terrific side dishes for serving with grilled shrimp.

    • grilled shrimp and avocado bowls
      Grilled Shrimp Salad with Raspberry Vinaigrette
    • spicy grilled shrimp tacos
      Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)
    • shrimp fra diavolo
      Spicy Shrimp and Pasta (Shrimp Fra Diavolo)
    • Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    baked lemon shrimp scampi

    Lemon Garlic Shrimp Scampi

    Sally Cameron
    This dish is easy enough for any cook and elegant enough for company. Serve over lemon-herbed rice, zucchini noodles, spaghetti squash or pasta. Meyer lemons work great if you can find them. If not, regular lemons are fine. 
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Marinate time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 400 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large flat baking dish or casserole

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ pounds large shrimp peeled and deveined
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter ghee or plant-based butter
    • ½ cup dry white wine
    • ⅓ cup slivered almonds or sliced almonds
    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2-3 tablespoons Amaretto liqueur optional
    • 1 large lemon juiced
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt to taste
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoons fresh chopped Italian parsley plus extra for garnish if desired

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep shrimp

    • Peel and devein shrimp if not already done. Peel off legs and shell sections up to the tail, leaving the tail section on. It makes for nice presentation and a little handle. On the outward curved side of the shrimp, cut a shallow slit with a sharp paring knife and gently rinse any debris with cold water. Dry shrimp on paper towels. 

    Make marinade

    • Melt butter in a large glass microwave-proof measuring cup, then stir in wine, almonds, olive oil, liqueur (if using), lemon juice, garlic, salt, pepper, and parsley. Arrange shrimp in a single, flat layer in a large glass or ceramic  baking dish. Pour butter mixture over the top of the shrimp. Marinate shrimp for 20-30 minutes at room temperature.

    Bake shrimp

    • Pre-heat oven to 400°F degrees. Place the shrimp in the oven and bake just until shrimp turn pink, about 10 minutes, depending on the shrimp size and your oven. 
      Note - If you're using big jumbo shrimp, you may need to turn them once half way through for even baking.
    • Remove shrimp from the oven. Serve over rice, pasta noodles, or zucchini noodles with the sauce spooned over the top. Sprinkle with more fresh chopped parsley if desired.

    Notes

    For white wine and Amaretto, buy the airline sized bottles instead of big bottles.

    Substitutions and Variations

      • Try a splash of cognac instead of the amaretto or simply use all white wine.
      • If you don't like almonds, leave them out and skip the amaretto.
      • If omitting the amaretto, use ¼-1/2 teaspoon of almond extract to replace the almond flavor.
      • For no scampi without wine, try unsalted vegetable broth or ver jus (unfermented pressed grape juice).
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 400kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 26gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 237mgSodium: 1114mgPotassium: 340mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 744IUVitamin C: 17mgCalcium: 134mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce

    12/19/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Pot full of homemade marinara.

    With just a few pantry staples, you can make this easy pasta sauce with tomato sauce in about 30 minutes. Perfect over pasta, chicken, or as a base for countless meals, it's a simple way to a delicious dinner. Plus, it freezes beautifully-so you'll always have a batch ready for busy weeknights. Skip the jar and make your own-it's fresher, more flavorful, and budget-friendly.

    Finished homemade tomato marinara in a pot with basil leaves.

    A friend recently commented that the famous Italian restaurant jarred marinara sauce her kids liked was so expensive. I served her some of my homemade pasta sauce with tomato sauce and she loved it. Plus, it can be made for less than half of the cost of the stuff she's been buying. Store bought sauces are fine in a pinch, but skip the jars and make your own marinara sauce for great taste and savings.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce

    • Basic pantry items - Just tomato sauce, crushed tomatoes, and a few other basics.
    • Tasty and easy - Call it spaghetti sauce, pasta sauce, simple tomato sauce, or marinara. A staple in the kitchen. 
    • Freezes great - Make ahead and freeze it in batches for fast meals.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Here are the ingredients for my go-to homemade pasta sauce. See recipe card for all ingredients and quantities.

    Marinara sauce ingredients labeled.
    • Tomato sauce - Use plain canned or jarred tomato sauce. You can also use the boxes of Pomi passata puree or their tomato sauce.
    • Crushed tomatoes - Starting with a high-quality crushed tomatoes makes this pasta sauce quick. See my tomato notes below.
    • Oil - use extra virgin olive oil to saute the onion and garlic in for great flavor and healthy fat.
    • Onion - onion gives flavor depth and a base for the sauce. A foundational ingredient for soups, stews, sauces and many recipes.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic is best and a head keeps in a cool pantry for some time. You can use the peeled refrigerated cloves but be sure they are fresh.
    • Herbs - Dried herbs makes this easy. Use plain dried basil or a dried Italian seasoning blend. A little fresh basil or oregano in addition to dried herbs for more flavor at the end is niece too, if you have them.
    • Spices (optional) - Ground anise seed or ground fennel seed make a terrific and unexpected flavor addition to this pasta sauce recipe. Optional but delicious.
    • Wine (optional) - A little dry red or dry white wine amplifies flavors.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, black pepper, and red pepper.

    Chef's Tip on tomatoes - Real San Marzano tomatoes are identified by the certified D.O.P. label on the can. They may cost a little more than regular tomatoes, but many cooks believe they're worth it for their balanced, naturally sweet flavor (and no additives, like calcium chloride). My favorite brands are Cento San Marzano (D.O.P.) and Bianco DiNapoli (California-grown). Mutti is also a solid choice, as is Pomi.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Here's ways to change up homemade pasta sauce:

    • Make it a smooth sauce - puree until smooth in a blender, food processor or with an immersion blender
    • Make it a meat sauce - add a couple of links of pre-cooked sausage ground fine in a food processor or chopped fine with a chef's knife, or use browned ground beef. Cooked ground bison works well too.
    • Alcohol-free - leave out the wine.
    • Only have whole tomatoes - Strain the liquid from the can and reserve in a bowl. Over the sink or a bowl (it's messy), split the tomatoes with your fingers and remove seeds, then briefly puree with liquid in a blender, food processor, or chop by hand. Don't puree smooth. Leave some texture. This works in place of crushed tomatoes. 

    How to Make Pasta Sauce with Tomato Sauce

    This homemade pasta sauce recipe is simple in both ingredients and instruction. Use a heavy pot like a Dutch oven as they conduct heat evenly and cook over lower temperatures efficiently.

    Cooking onions and garlic in a Dutch oven.
    Step 1: Chop onions and cook with garlic in olive oil until soft.
    Onion and herbs cooking in a Dutch oven.
    Step 2: Add dried herbs and stir into the moist onions and garlic so the herbs rehydrate and release their flavors.
    Tomato marinara simmering with red wine in a pot.
    Step 3: Stir in the crushed tomatoes, tomato sauce, and wine. Turn heat up a bit and bring the sauce to bubbling, then turn it down to a low simmer, covered, for about 20 minutes.

    Lastly, taste the sauce. It has too much acidity for you, add a little sugar or neutral flavored sweetener like monk fruit. It's ready to serve, refrigerate and used with 5 days, or cooled and frozen.

    Chef's tip on cooking with wine: I use the mini bottles of wine to cook with and save the full-sized bottles for dinner. They are great to keep in the pantry for adding a little to this marinara recipe or for deglazing a pan for a sauce, and they are inexpensive. The cooking rule is use one you would drink, not "cooking wines". Don't add it at the end. It needs to simmer with the sauce. 

    Marinara sauce in a jar with basil.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Over a big bowl of pasta topped with fresh herbs and parmesan cheese
    • For making Chicken Parmesan
    • Use it as a dipping sauce
    • As a pizza sauce
    • Make spicy stovetop shrimp, Italian style
    • Simmer Italian meatballs in it
    A white platter of chicken parmesan with red sauce and sprinkles of cheese.

    Storing and Freezing Pasta Sauce

    The yield for this recipe is about 5 cups of pasta sauce. Homemade sauce keeps in the refrigerator in an airtight container for 5 days or freezes for 2-3 months.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why do chefs use San Marzano tomatoes?

    Because they have lower acidity (so more sweetness), less seeds, thicker flesh, and terrific taste. They can cost more, so you decide if they are worth it. There are delicious tomatoes from other brands that are not San Marzano. See my Chef's tip in the post.

    How do you make tomato sauce taste better for pasta?

    Start with good-quality tomatoes, then add garlic, olive oil, herbs, and a pinch of salt. A splash of wine, a pat of butter, or a sprinkle of Parmesan at the end adds extra depth.

    What herbs go in pasta sauce?

    Classic choices include basil, oregano, parsley, and thyme. You can use one or a mix, depending on the flavor you like

    What can I add to tomato sauce for more flavor?

    Try sautéed garlic or onion, fresh or dried herbs, red pepper flakes, a splash of wine, or a little butter at the end. Even small additions can make a big difference.

    More Tomato Sauce Recipes

    Love pasta sauce? Us too. And here are a few more delicious ideas for tomato-based sauces.

    • roasted tomato marinara
      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
    • bison bolognese with pasta
      Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce
    • Glass jar of pesto rosso, red pesto, ready to enjoy.
      Sun-Dried Tomato Pesto (Pesto Rosso)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make pasta sauce with tomato sauce, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I love hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Pot full of homemade marinara.

    Pasta Sauce with Tomato Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade marinara is easy to make from a few staples in your pantry in about 30 minutes. It's better and healthier than most jarred brands and it freeze well. Yield is about 5 cups of marinara.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 10 ½ cup portions
    Calories 75 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot or Dutch Oven 4-5 quarts

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion
    • 3 large garlic cloves minced, finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon dried basil or Italian herb blend
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ground anise seed or fennel seed
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon red pepper more or less to your heat preferences
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • 28 ounces can crushed tomatoes
    • 15 ounces can tomato sauce
    • ¼ cup red wine optional, use the airline size bottles
    • 1 handful fresh chopped basil leaves optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook the onion, garlic, spices, herbs

    • Heat olive oil in a medium pot over medium low heat and add onion. Cook until onion is soft and translucent. Add garlic, dried herbs, ground anise seed, black pepper, red pepper, salt, and cook another 2 minutes to allow flavors to blend.

    Add tomatoes and simmer

    • Add crushed tomatoes and sauce, and wine if using. Cover and simmer sauce for 20 minutes until flavors are blended. For a smoother sauce, puree briefly in blender if desired.
      If using fresh chopped basil leaves, stir in at the end.

    Notes

    About anise seed and fennel seed:
    Fennel seed is milder and less sweet while anise seed has a little more potent and sweeter flavor of licorice. Use one or both. They are two different plants. Optional but delicious!
    They come in both ground and whole forms. Whole spices/herbs stay fresher longer than pre-ground. Pre-ground are more convenient to use. Whole need to be ground before using in cooking. Use an inexpensive coffee grinder that you save for just herbs and spice. 
    How to use:
    Use marinara for pasta, chicken, shrimp, fish, meatballs, and many dishes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 75kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 2gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 366mgPotassium: 411mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 373IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 52mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • …
    • 4
    • 5
    • 6
    • 7
    • 8
    • …
    • 10
    • Next Page »
    Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

    Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

    More about me →

    Best Summer Recipes

    • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
      Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • A bowl of slow cooker pinto beans topped with jalapeno slices, cilantro, and chopped white onion.
      Crock Pot Pinto Beans

    More Recipe Ideas

    • Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.
      Grilled Hoisin Chicken Skewers
    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
      Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)

    Best Summer Recipes -->

    Footer

    as seen on

    Logos of Featured Publications

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Accessibility policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

    Menu

    • Home
    • About
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required